Roundup Archives - Breaking Muscle https://breakingmuscle.com/roundup/ Breaking Muscle Fri, 12 Jan 2024 16:59:48 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.3.1 https://breakingmuscle.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/11/cropped-bmlogowhite-red-120x68.png Roundup Archives - Breaking Muscle https://breakingmuscle.com/roundup/ 32 32 13 Best Exercise Bikes for Home Gyms (2024) https://breakingmuscle.com/best-exercise-bike/ Mon, 11 Dec 2023 16:45:53 +0000 https://breakingmuscle.com/?p=201949 Out of all the cardio machines on the market, exercise bikes offer the best calorie burn in the smallest space possible. Certain bikes can work your entire body, some are low-impact, and others add a major dose of FUN to your training. Despite packing an efficient punch, the best exercise bikes cost similar to rowing machines —  as...

The post 13 Best Exercise Bikes for Home Gyms (2024) appeared first on Breaking Muscle.

]]>
Out of all the cardio machines on the market, exercise bikes offer the best calorie burn in the smallest space possible. Certain bikes can work your entire body, some are low-impact, and others add a major dose of FUN to your training.

Despite packing an efficient punch, the best exercise bikes cost similar to rowing machines —  as little as $300 to well over $2,500. Imagine the horror of spending thousands of dollars just to find out you don’t love your shiny new cardio equipment?!

Lucky for you, I’ve done the research for you and gathered a list of the 13 best exercise bikes, so you can pick the right one for you.

How We Chose the Best Exercise Bikes

The Breaking Muscle team comprises a passionate squad of fitness aficionados, including conditioning coaches, spin instructors, competitive triathletes, and home gym owners. Altogether, our team has tested and reviewed 50+ exercise bikes — from the cheapest to the most expensive — putting them through rigorous a 13-point protocol.

From there, we chose the best exercise bikes by category rating each from 1 to 5 based on criteria like:

  • Adjustability: Are the handlebars and the seat adjustable to fit various body sizes?
  • Customization: Can you swap in your own pedals, saddle, and handlebars for a more custom riding experience?
  • Tech capabilities: What interactive tech is available, if any? Is there Bluetooth or ANT+ connectivity available?

We have lots to cover… so gear up and let’s dive in!

Our Top Picks for the Best Exercise Bikes

Best Exercise Bike Overall: NordicTrack S22i Studio Bike

NordicTrack S22i Studio Bike
4.5
  • Dimensions: 60" L x 22" W x 63" H
  • Resistance levels: 24
  • Available programming: Yes (requires iFIT subscription)
  • Weight capacity: 350 pounds
  • Type: Spin
Check Price

Pros

  • Excellent classes and courses with iFIT
  • Smooth resistance with impressive incline/decline
  • Multiple convenient accessories
  • One-year iFIT membership included
  • Bluetooth connectivity

Cons

  • Slightly cumbersome to move
  • Limited workouts without iFIT subscription
  • Higher-priced exercise bike

The NordicTrack S22i is hands-down the best exercise bike overall. We had three product testers take this bike for a ride to tell us why it won our top pick.

A female athlete riding the NordicTrack S22i Studio Bike
Working out on the NordicTrack S22i Studio Bike

This NordicTrack bike’s programming, screen, and connectivity are excellent. Our product testers love the complimentary one-year iFIT membership because you can do live coach-led workouts, on-demand studio classes, and outdoor courses. 

Plus, the 22-inch touchscreen is high-definition, so it looks like you’re riding through a trail in Hawaii or taking a spin class in person.  It also swivels, so you can do other iFIT workouts off the bike without needing to see the screen from the rest of your home gym. 

RELATED: Best Budget Home Gym Equipment

With 24 smooth-adjusting, magnetic resistance levels, our Breaking Muscle staff members found the riding experience on the S22i impressive.

They were pleasantly surprised that this bike inclines up to 20 percent grade and declines down to -10 percent, which is rare for a spin bike — the angle can even be auto-adjusted during your workouts by your iFIT coaches. The resistance and incline levels adjust digitally, which feels higher-end than push buttons.

NordicTrack included a series of convenient accessories on the S22i. For starters, our product testers like the dual water bottle holders and the built-in fan to keep you hydrated and comfortable during your rides. Plus, the media shelf helps hold your smartphone, and there’s even an easy-access storage tray for the two (complimentary) three-pound dumbbells.

When it comes to mobility, the S22i is more cumbersome than you’d expect. Our product testers found the front wheels helped it move, but there’s no handle at the back, so you have to awkwardly lift it from the rear stabilizer beam for the wheels to kick in. They also noticed you need to be careful with the big screen knocking into things as you reposition it. Combined with its 205-pound in-box weight, a second person can be helpful when moving the bike.

Unfortunately, the S22i’s programming is limited if you don’t have an iFIT membership. Without it, you essentially just have the machine in manual mode. There are a few free bike workouts in iFIT that you can access without the recurring subscription, but even the live chat agent couldn’t confirm this and suggested we call their Customer Service team.

With the impressive build quality and tech of this NordicTrack Studio Bike, it’s no surprise that it commands a higher price. At the time of publishing, it retails at $1,999 — making it comparable to the Peloton Bike+. Remember, you’ll also need an ongoing iFIT subscription to use the bike to its full potential. That said, I think it’s well worth the cost, considering the bike’s features and the value of the iFIT membership.

All the above considered, we rank this 4.5 out of 5 stars for its excellent classes and courses with iFIT, smooth resistance with incline/decline capability, and convenient accessories.

Best Air Bike: Assault Fitness AssaultBike Pro X

Assault Fitness AssaultBike Pro X
4.4
  • Overall dimensions: 51.73” L x 24.52” W x 52.51” H
  • Weight: 125 pounds
  • Weight capacity: 330 pounds
  • Display: High-contrast LCD screen
Check Price

Pros

  • Rugged, beefy design
  • Excellent console capability
  • Impressive frame and parts warranty
  • Extreme calorie burn

Cons

  • Repairs can be challenging
  • Large and cumbersome to move
  • Fan-based style is loud

The Pro X is a beast of an air bike. Our product tester loved its belt drive because it’s smoother than their more affordable Assault Bike Classic and the previous model (the Assault Bike Pro), both of which have chain drives. 

An athlete riding the Assault Fitness AssaultBike Pro X
Working out on the Assault Fitness AssaultBike Pro X

At first use, its 125-pound weight stood out, as it’s incredibly sturdy even when pedaling and pushing as hard as possible. Almost everything on this unit is metal; a full-metal construction means it’s seriously rugged and should last years, even when used by heavier and stronger athletes.

Assault Fitness uses the same “Elite” monitor on all their air bikes, and after testing 10+ air bikes, it’s become our product tester’s favorite. The physical buttons are easy to touch and colored, which is an underrated feature you’ll appreciate if you’ve done a HIIT workout on an air bike. The console’s high-contrast LCD screen also displays all the essential metrics: heart rate, calories, distance, RPM, and more. The included programming intervals and Bluetooth connectivity are a great benefit as well.

An over-the-shoulder look at the monitor on the Assault Fitness AssaultBike Pro X
Highlighting the stats displayed on the AssaultBike Pro X’s monitor

Having reviewed dozens of cardio equipment pieces over the past three years, I’m personally impressed by Assault’s warranty on their Pro X. The frame is covered by a seven-year warranty, with a three-year warranty on moving parts. 

Many companies try to pass the majority of frustrating part repairs on to their customers by only covering “non-wear and tear” parts. However, Assault breaks the mold by explicitly covering “moving” parts for the first three years. Knowing you can put the Pro X through brutal workouts day after day while being covered on parts delivers serious peace of mind.

One of our Breaking Muscle staff members has extensive experience repairing air bikes and says swapping a belt or changing internal components can be a nightmare. Bike repairs often need special parts and are best done by a certified technician, so expect any significant repairs to take multiple hours, with most of your help coming from how-to/troubleshooting videos. To be fair, this applies to air bikes bought from any company — not just Assault Fitness.

Because the Pro X is large, it can be cumbersome to move. One of our product testers found the easiest way to transport it is to lift it from the rear stabilizer until the wheels contact the floor. Still, the 125-pound weight with its 52-inch x 24.5-inch footprint makes this air bike challenging to move compared to the Concept2 BikeErg, and it might be too much for some users.

In general, fan bikes might not be the best choice for home gyms that have to be careful of noise levels. As a fan-based bike, the Assault Bike Pro X is loud. 

That said, the fan-blade system of the Pro X appears to be a regular bike hub with fan blades welded to it — making it much smaller than what you’d find on the Rogue Echo bike. This smaller size means less air displacement, and some Breaking Muscle team members were surprised by how quiet it was in comparison.

All the above considered, we rank this 4.4 out of 5 stars for its rugged design, excellent console capabilities, and impressive warranty.

Best Exercise Bike With Classes: Echelon EX-8s

Echelon Connect EX-8s Bike
3.6
  • Dimensions: 59" L x 23" W x 65" H
  • Resistance levels: 32
  • Available programming: Yes
  • Weight capacity: 300 pounds
  • Type: Spin
Check Price

Pros

  • Amazing 24-inch HD touchscreen
  • Huge class selection with Echelor Premier
  • More affordable Fit Pass is also available
  • Designed and engineered in the USA
  • Sleek bike design

Cons

  • Subscription quality is lacking
  • High price for bike specs
  • The one-year warranty is disappointing

One of our product testers took the Echelon Connect bike for a ride and was immediately impressed. 

It features an oversized 24-inch curved touchscreen, which feels enormous but immersive when working out. Combine that with the high-definition quality and LED lights that sync to your workout metrics, and it feels like you’re cycling in a live studio class — which is super motivating. The dual-facing speakers offer great sound, and the screen flips 180 degrees, so you can easily view it for Echelon Premier workouts.

By joining their Echelon Premier Membership at $39.99 monthly, you unlock daily live classes and over 15,000 various, on-demand classes. Premier members receive exclusive discounts, a more comprehensive range of class difficulties, and up to five user profiles. With this membership, you can also view a leaderboard and compete against others, see when your friends are online, and check other users’ stats worldwide. Finally, the Echelon app syncs your console with your Strava, Zwift, Apple Health, FitBit, and Spotify profiles and data.

Alternatively, Echelon offers a more affordable “Fit Pass” at $11.99 monthly. This plan is best if you want to work out anywhere, anytime, without needing any equipment. Fit Pass includes 60+ instructors, 40+ daily live classes, challenges, and more. I like their range of workouts; they have everything from cardio and core training to meditation and barre. They even have a travel-the-world-fitness class option, which reminds our product tester of JRNY and iFIT. 

Despite the massive class selection, our product tester finds the quality could be better for the monthly price, even if you sign up for a two-year plan ($29.16 monthly). She notes that the price seems high for what it is because it isn’t as produced as Peloton’s live and on-demand classes, but it isn’t bad — the production quality just isn’t quite there yet.

The EX-8S retails for $3,079.50, but it’s on sale for $1,699.99 at the time of publishing. The sale price is way more reasonable, but the original cost seems expensive for the actual specs of the bike. Considering the Peloton Bike+ is more affordable and offers a better warranty, I wouldn’t be surprised if more customers jump ship.

Echelon’s warranty on the Connect EX-8S is flat-out disappointing at just one year. Their 30-day return policy and financing option are typical, but our product tester couldn’t believe the warranty is only one year, especially for such a steep retail price. If you’re an active Echelon Premier member, you can enjoy the benefit of full warranty coverage for up to five years. However, this requires an ongoing monthly membership for 60 months, costing you a whopping $1,700 over those five years in subscription fees.

All the above considered, we rank this 3.8 out of 5 stars for the outstanding 24” HD touchscreen, along with the workout subscription options offered through Echelon Premier and the more affordable Fit Pass.

Best Exercise Bike for Seniors: Horizon 5.0R Recumbent Bike

Horizon Fitness 5.0 R Recumbent Bike
4.0
  • Dimensions: 66" L x 25.2" W x 52.2" H
  • Resistance levels: 100
  • Available programming: Yes
  • Weight capacity: 300 pounds
  • Type: Recumbent
Check Price

Pros

  • Mobility-friendly access
  • Sturdy and stable design
  • Simple and intuitive controls 
  • Lighter flywheel is easy on joints
  • Smooth magnetic resistance

Cons

  • The bike requires some assembly
  • 123-pound weight might be too hard to move
  • Touchscreen console requires basic tech skills

The Horizon 5.0R is excellent for seniors due to its mobility-friendly design. For example, the low, step-through frame helps you access the seated position even if you struggle with mobility or leg strength. Once you’re ready to sit down into the seat, there are front handlebars that you can hold for support as you sit down — they also make it easier to stand up after your workout. 

I’m impressed by the sturdiness of the 5.0R, which is a blessing because most seniors have trouble with their balance. 

The large 66-inch by 25.2-inch footprint and lower seat position result in a more stable machine. The flywheel, however, weighs just 15.4 pounds, which makes it easy to pedal at first and is gentler on your joints. That said, 100 magnetic resistance levels are available, so you can still get a smooth but seriously intense workout.

I’m also glad to see toe clips on the pedals; they help keep your feet from slipping out, which is more likely on a recumbent bike due to the reclined angle of your feet. The extra-large, adjustable seat includes a backrest and handlebars along the sides. Even though you have a near-zero chance of slipping out of the seat during your workout, holding the handlebars for extra support and peace of mind is nice.

Finally, I’m pleased with this exercise bike’s simple controls and convenient features. For one, the screen and control buttons are easy to see and reach while seated. Further, a built-in fan and an included water bottle holder keep you comfortable and hydrated during your rides. All of these features add a nice touch for older populations. 

Unfortunately, the bike does require some assembly. There’s a helpful assembly video, but according to Horizon, lifting the main frame out of the box requires two people. Because of the box size, weight, and assembly, this might be too much work, depending on your strength and mobility. 

Horizon does have an in-room delivery option for an extra $199 if you’re experienced with basic tools and would prefer to assemble it yourself but want the large box brought in by another person. Alternatively, they offer white glove delivery and assembly for $239, including room-of-choice delivery, complete setup and assembly, and packaging removal.

At 123 pounds, this exercise bike might be too heavy for a senior to move. There is a carrying handle at the bottom rear of the machine, and once you lift it from the handle, you can wheel it to another location. Indeed, you’re not lifting the entire bike — some of the bike’s weight will be resting on the wheels — but combined with its large footprint, you might find it unmoveable without some help.

Finally, the touchscreen console requires basic tech skills. You’ll be okay with the console if you can operate a smartphone or tablet. That said, some seniors rely only on analog (push) buttons and might find the touchscreen and controls too confusing to use if they’re not tech-savvy.

All the above considered, we rank this 4 out of 5 stars for its mobility-friendly access, sturdy and stable design, and simple yet intuitive controls.

Best Spin Exercise Bike: Diamondback 1260sc

Diamondback Fitness 1260Sc
3.9
  • Overall dimensions: 59” L x 23” W x 50” H
  • Weight: 130 pounds
  • Weight capacity: 300 pounds
  • Display: LCD monitor to track workout metrics
Check Price

Pros

  • Spin-studio-quality bike
  • Lots of adjustments to fit many riders
  • The console connects to many apps
  • Many convenient add-on features

Cons

  • Awkwardly placed water bottle holder
  • Adjusting levers is difficult
  • No programming included

The Diamondback Fitness 1260sc is a fantastic spin-studio-quality bike. The rear-mounted 31-pound flywheel gives it extra smoothness, similar to riding a bike outside. Even better, Diamondback Fitness uses a belt to drive the flywheel — making it significantly smoother and quieter than a chain-driven system. Although our product tester didn’t think she’d like the magnetic resistance lever, she grew to love its premium-like clicking sound. All these finer touches make the 1260 comparable to an exercise bike from a commercial gym studio.

A young man riding the Diamondback 1260Sc
Riding the Diamondback 1260Sc bike at our testing facility

To add to the studio feel, the 1260 is highly adjustable. The handlebars are two-way adjustable (up, down, forward, and back) and have plenty of grips, so you can find a comfortable hand position whether riding in or out of the saddle. The two-sided pedals have toe clips for maximum safety and cycling efficiency, while the other is a classic flat pedal. Thanks to the two-way adjusting seat and the variety of available heights, our five-foot, four-inch tall product tester fit perfectly with a couple of inches to spare.

This Diamondback Fitness bike connects to many ANT+ apps and wearables so that you can pair it with Garmin and Wahoo products. Our product tester enjoys the vast range of apps connecting via Bluetooth FTMS (Fitness Machine Service protocol). This latest tech lets you connect your fitness equipment to popular apps like Zwift, Rouvy, Myzone, SPIVI, and others — tracking your watts, time, distance, rpm, heart rate, and more.

Our product tester doesn’t love where they put the water bottle holder and vertical adjustment levers on this bike. Since the water bottle holder is mounted in front of the post, she has to awkwardly lean forward and reach around the front post to grab water while riding. The adjustment levers also don’t open easily, so they require a lot of force to pry them open. Once opened, adjustments are no problem — but the initial sticking point of the levers is no joke.

The console on the 1260 is as simple as you can get, and it lacks any interactive features you’d see on a Peloton+. The console doesn’t provide any programming, so you must do your workouts manually, pair the console with an app, find free online classes, or join a subscription service like iFIT.

An over-the-shoulder look at the monitor on the Diamondback 1260Sc bike
The monitor on the Diamondback 1260Sc is pretty basic.

All the above considered, we rank this 3.9 out of 5 stars for its spin-studio quality, impressive adjustability, and wide range of console connectivity.

Best Portable Exercise Bike: Concept2 BikeErg

Concept2 BikeErg
3.9
  • Overall dimensions: 48” L x 24” W; seat to pedal height ranges from 31" to 40.5"
  • Weight: 68 pounds
  • Weight capacity: 350 pounds
  • Display: PM5 monitor
Check Price

Pros

  • Extremely easy to move 
  • Highly adjustable and customizable
  • Great for low and high-intensity cardio
  • Quality USA-built
  • Powerful monitor

Cons

  • Noisy fan-based
  • Lacks interactive tech
  • Reasonably expensive

The BikeErg is extremely easy to move, making it the best portable exercise bike due mainly to its materials and construction. Built mostly from aluminum,  it’s lightweight and compact (48 inches long by 24 inches wide), which minimizes excess weight while retaining durability. It also weighs only 68 pounds when fully assembled, making it lighter than most exercise bikes and a little over half the weight of the Horizon 5.0R Recumbent Bike. 

The C2 BikeErg includes caster wheels that make moving it a breeze. Once the machine tips up for the wheels to kick in, you can roll it smoothly to wherever you want it to go. You can fit it into most vehicles by removing the seat and handlebar posts, making it easier to haul to another CrossFit box or gym.

Its high portability is heightened further by its adjustability, customizability, and versatility. The handlebars can be adjusted up, down, forward, and back. Similarly, you can raise or lower the seat and tilt it to +/-15-degrees. I’m impressed the BikeErg is compatible with most cycling parts — letting you change the saddle, handlebars, and pedals as you see fit.

One of our Breaking Muscle staff members has used the Concept2 BikeErg extensively and is continually impressed by its versatility. They enjoy it for long endurance rides and high-intensity interval training (HIIT). Unlike an air bike like the AssaultBike Pro X, the Concept2 is a jack-of-all-trades.

There are a few downsides to the Concept2 BikeErg. First, it’s rather noisy. Like the other Concept2 cardio machines, the BikeErg is also fan-based, so a loud whooshing sound is made when you pedal. Compared to a quiet electromagnetic bike like the BLANK, I could see some users being annoyed by the noise from the fan. The higher damper settings restrict airflow, reducing the loudness, but you might still need headphones or earplugs if it bothers you.

If you enjoy using interactive consoles, you might be slightly disappointed by Concept2’s Performance Monitor (PM5). It lacks the engaging and interactive aspects of the NordicTrack S22i’s iFIT membership console. The screen is small and lacks speakers. Plus, it doesn’t offer live or on-demand workout classes — you must pay for a separate subscription service.

Finally, the BikeErg isn’t cheap by any means. It’s a quality spin bike (technically fan-based, but it doesn’t count as an air bike due to the lack of moveable handlebars), so you can expect it to cost a pretty penny. You’ll save some money going with a more economical brand, but whether you’re willing to sacrifice on performance and the power of the PM5 is up to you.

All the above considered, we rank this 3.9 out of 5 stars for its easy portability, highly adjustable components, impressive customizability, and versatility.

RELATED: Concept2 RowErg Review

Best Exercise Bike for Weight Loss: CAROL Bike

CAROL Bike
4.1
  • Dimensions: 45.5" L x 22" W
  • Resistance levels: Not listed
  • Available programming: Yes
  • Weight capacity: 330 pounds
  • Type: Spin
Check Price

Pros

  • AI-controlled, instant motorized resistance
  • Detailed, data-driven console and tech
  • Beautifully sleek design
  • 100-day home trial
  • App connectivity

Cons

  • Requires ongoing membership for full use
  • Relatively expensive at $2,595
  • The one-year warranty is lacking

When you lead a busy life, keeping a regular exercise habit is easier said than done if it takes 30 minutes to an hour — enter the CAROL. 

Quick note: our product testers trialed the original CAROL bike, but this review is based on the 2.0 version of the CAROL. We’ll note any updated features of the 2.0 version below.

A female athlete riding the CAROL Bike while sitting down
A Breaking Muscle team member working out on the CAROL Bike

This bike is the best for weight loss because it gives you an effective workout in just five minutes, so you can easily fit it into your busy schedule. There’s no excuse with the CAROL because your workout takes just five minutes. This means you can do it any time during your day, making it much more likely that you’ll stick with your new exercise habit.

The CAROL is also ideal for weight loss because the workouts use an artificial intelligence (AI) algorithm to calculate your optimal resistance. Simply choose one of 18 different workouts and fitness tests; the upgraded console 2.0 will walk you through it without any confusion, making it suitable for any age and fitness level. You even get access for up to eight riders with the home membership, so you can help others in their quest to live healthier, too.

A woman's hand touching the monitor on the CAROL Bike
Selecting a workout on the CAROL Bike’s monitor

This bike also supports weight loss through data-driven results. The first model of the CAROL had heart rate monitors built into the handlebars, whereas the 2.0 model includes a chest-strap heart rate monitor to track your training. Each workout refines what it’s learned to tailor workouts to your fitness level, then shows your progress using precise data like your overall fitness score, heart rate metrics, peak power, energy output, and global and local leaderboard stats. Seeing your fitness improve with nearly every workout will entice you to return.

Unfortunately, you’re locked into paying for the ongoing $15 monthly membership if you want a fully functioning bike. Without the membership, you can still do a manual ride, but the resistance will stay at the starting resistance and never change — making it practically useless for a real workout. For this reason, changing the intensity and using the bike to its maximum potential requires a recurring membership.

Next, the CAROL is relatively expensive. Based on the bike specs alone, it doesn’t live up to the price because it costs more than the Peloton Bike+ and doesn’t include live or on-demand classes like iFIT. Further, it’s roughly ten times the price of our most affordable exercise bike, the Yosuda Indoor Cycling Bike. Remember, though, this bike isn’t made for interactive fitness classes or enjoyable rides — it’s for people who want the best results from the shortest workout possible.

Sadly, the warranty falls short based on its $2,500 price tag. Like the Echelon EX-8s, it only has a one-year warranty, leaving much to be desired. Our product tester doesn’t think you’ll have any issues with the bike breaking down. and there’s a 100-day home trial if you change your mind. Still, she wishes the warranty was much longer, and I couldn’t agree more.

All the above considered, we rank this 4.1 out of 5 stars for its AI-controlled motorized resistance, detailed and data-driven console, and beautifully sleek design.

Best Magnetic Exercise Bike: Bowflex VeloCore

BowFlex VeloCore Bike
4.2
  • Dimensions: 59.8" L x 24.1" W x 55.3" H
  • Resistance levels: 100
  • Available programming: Yes
  • Weight capacity: 325 pounds
  • Type: Spin
Check Price

Pros

  • Excellent spin bike design
  • Highly adjustable
  • Innovative bike-leaning feature
  • Many convenient add-ons
  • Two screen sizes: 16-inch and 22-inch

Cons

  • Not budget-friendly
  • Requires ongoing JRNY subscription
  • Leaning feature may be overrated

The Bowflex VeloCore has a sleek and modern look, and our product tester was impressed with its high-quality build, finding it fun and easy to use. She appreciates the smooth-feeling 33-pound flywheel with 100 levels of magnetic resistance for quiet but intense workouts. This bike’s belt drive requires minimal maintenance and delivers a consistent performance. It has an adjustable seat, two-way adjusting handlebars, and dual-sided pedals that accommodate regular or SPD shoes — essential features for optimal comfort, especially if you’re a triathlete.

The bike comes with a choice of two screen sizes, 16-inch or 22-inch, and each is an HD, responsive touchscreen that connects to the JRNY app for live and on-demand workouts. Based on your level, an initial fitness assessment determines what classes JRNY recommends for you to try. There are also options to “explore the world” by biking around different destinations. The JRNY subscription even lets you stream entertainment like Netflix, Hulu, Prime Video, and Disney+.

The bike’s most distinctive feature is the ability to lean from side to side, creating a more dynamic and engaging riding experience. The leaning feature claims to activate muscles, burn more calories, and improve balance and coordination. The bike also has a stabilizer bar that can lock the bike in place for a more traditional ride. The leaning feature works with the JRNY app, which offers scenic rides and interactive games that challenge you to lean and steer along the route.

One downside to the VeloCore is the price, ranging from $1,799 to $2,199 based on the screen size chosen. Going off the price alone, the Diamondback 1260sc is a better choice if you’re not interested in being able to lean as part of your workouts. 

The bike also requires a monthly subscription to the JRNY app, which costs $11.99 monthly or $99 per year. However, the bike’s functionality is severely limited without the subscription because you can only use the manual mode, and you can’t stream anything. 

The bike’s leaning feature is the main selling point of the bike, but it may not be as beneficial or enjoyable as it sounds. It claims to activate more muscles, burn more calories, and improve balance and coordination, yet no scientific evidence on the product page supports these claims. Plus, more moving parts and sensors than a regular bike make it more prone to wear and tear. It might not be worth the extra cost and hassle for users who prefer a more stable and less gimmicky ride.

All the above considered, we rank this 4.2 out of 5 stars for its excellent spin bike design, highly adjustable components, and innovative bike-leaning feature.

RELATED: Best Jump Ropes

Best Affordable Exercise Bike: Yosuda Indoor Cycling Bike

YOSUDA Indoor Cycling Bike
4.0
  • Dimensions: 40.16" L x 21.65" W x 46.06" H
  • Resistance levels: 100
  • Available programming: No
  • Weight capacity: 270 pounds
  • Type: Spin
Check Price

Pros

  • Affordable and highly-praised
  • Excellent value for the money
  • Highly adjustable like other spin bikes
  • Convenient features included
  • Amazon’s 90-day return policy
  • One-year warranty on parts

Cons

  • Limited console capability
  • Accessory parts are flimsy
  • Durability concerns

The YOSUDA Indoor Cycling Bike is a highly affordable exercise bike, on sale for $249.99 at the time of writing. Compared to many other bikes in this article, it’s the most budget-friendly option. Despite its economical price, I’m pleasantly surprised by its great reviews on Amazon: 4.⅘ stars based on feedback from 21,788 customers.

Our product reviewer is impressed with several features of this bike typically found on spin-studio-quality bikes. First, the flywheel is 35 pounds for a smooth riding experience that rivals cycling outdoors, and the steel frame feels heavy-duty for peace of mind while riding. The belt-driven system also minimizes noise and, combined with the mechanical (friction) resistance, is quiet enough to operate without disturbing sleeping kids or neighbors. 

Like the NordicTrack S22i Studio Bike, the Yosuda also offers two-way adjustable handlebars and a four-way adjustable seat to ensure it fits as many cyclists of different sizes as possible. The built-in transportation wheels make moving it around easier, and the bike includes a device and water bottle holder.

However, the YOSUDA bike has some drawbacks that may make you think twice before buying it. The bike’s console has no programming, so you’re on your own for making or sourcing structured workouts. It also lacks Bluetooth and ANT+ connectivity, so you can’t sync it with cycling apps like Zwift or fitness devices like a heart rate monitor. Further, our Breaking Muscle team member’s LCD monitor was wobbly and seemed like it was about to fall off. It appears that Yosuda invested in some quality parts but cut corners on the rest.

For example, during testing, our product reviewer’s Yosuda had some pieces breaking off, such as the pedal strap. The bike seat was comfortable only for the first few minutes and already started to experience small tears, and the water bottle holder felt flimsy. Many reviews claim it’s a common experience for many parts to wear out or break off after a few months of use.

Finally, he provided some clear guidance on its durability. At around $300, it’s a great price but not a durable bike — it will likely need replacing in about two years. The Yosuda is fine if you’re looking for a quick short-term fix, but it’s not a forever bike. 

Suppose you prefer to make your exercise bike investment once. In that case, you may want to save for a more expensive and reliable bike that offers a better value and riding experience, like the Diamondback 1260sc.

All the above considered, we rank this 3.8 out of 5 stars for its affordability, value, adjustability, and high praise on Amazon.

Best Recumbent Exercise Bike: Schwinn 290 Recumbent Bike

Schwinn 290 Recumbent Bike
4.0
  • Dimensions: 66.4" L x 28" W x 47" H
  • Resistance levels: 25
  • Available programming: Yes
  • Weight capacity: 330 pounds
  • Type: Recumbent
Check Price

Pros

  • Compatible with JRNY® + ZWIFT apps 
  • Bluetooth speakers and connectivity
  • Convenient accessories included

Cons

  • Pedals aren’t easy to adjust
  • The step-thru area is a tripping hazard
  • 90-day labor warranty is lacking

I’m pleasantly surprised with the Schwinn 290’s console and connectivity. You can use the JRNY® app on the 7″ LCD screen to access 200+ virtual courses that automatically adjust your bike’s resistance to the course’s terrain. 

Alternatively, there are trainer-led classes for a workout with a more human touch. There are many workout durations and class types, so you’ll most certainly find an intensity and trainer matching your preferences. Best of all, you get a two-month free trial to JRNY® when you buy the 290 Recumbent Bike. 

If you’re a ZWIFT fan, the console is compatible with that platform, so you can virtually interact, train, and compete against others worldwide. The speakers and console even have Bluetooth capability to connect to your smartphone or tablet easily. If you prefer to play your own music playlist or sync your heart rate monitor, both are possible on the 290.

While almost twice as expensive as our choice for the best affordable exercise bike (Yosuda Indoor Cycling Bike), the Schwinn 290 packs impressive features to make this an excellent value exercise bike. 

The console includes a media shelf and USB charging port to rest your smartphone or tablet on within view for a hands-free workout without worrying about battery life. It also features a water bottle holder attached to the side of the backrest for easy hydration access, whether you like water or the best electrolyte powders during your rides. Due to its 107.6-pound weight, the transport wheels are super convenient for moving, especially if you plan on storing it away between workouts.

Regarding downsides, I don’t like how the foot pedals adjust. You can tighten and loosen them quickly, but you must push the selector tab into your desired strap notch to lock a size in place. Securing the tab is shockingly tricky, even more so if you have big feet or struggle with mobility. 

You’re better off getting a rough estimate of the notch you need, dismounting the bike, and adjusting them with both hands. Based on my experience with these, I feel like a classic cinching strap of the Concept2 BikeErg or a plain velcro strap would be more user-friendly. 

Further, the step-through area is just too cramped for my liking. It’s so small that you must angle your foot to pass it through the step-through area. As a result, I could see this being a tripping hazard for anyone with mobility or weight challenges. I’m surprised to see this area redesigned because the Schwinn 270 Recumbent — the model that the 290 has replaced — featured a much larger area for you to step through. Because of this safety oversight, I’d recommend the Horizon 5.0R over this recumbent for seniors.

Sadly, you won’t get a great labor warranty with the 290. The parts are free if anything breaks on this exercise bike within the first two years. However, the labor warranty is only 90 days — ridiculously short. This means you’ll have to figure out how to replace the part(s) yourself or pay a technician out-of-pocket to repair your bike.

All the above considered, we rank this 3.5 out of 5 stars for its JRNY® + ZWIFT apps, Bluetooth speakers and connectivity, and convenient accessories.

Best Folding Exercise Bike: Marcy Foldable Upright Exercise Bike

Marcy Foldable Recumbent Exercise Bike
4.3
  • Dimensions: 39" L x 22" W x 48.5" H
  • Resistance levels: Seven
  • Available programming: No
  • Weight capacity: 250 pounds
  • Type: Recumbent (foldable)
Check Price

Pros

  • Folds away to save space 
  • Relatively portable, if required
  • Multiple surprising features
  • Two-year warranty

Cons

  • Console is basic
  • No programming or connectivity

This foldable upright bike collapses inward to a compact 21.5-inch depth, and the backrest folds down, so the height is only 47 inches. This means it can easily be tucked away in a closet when not in use. Although it didn’t make our top choice list, a Marcy upright bike can fold. While snagging the best upright exercise bike overall spot is unlikely, the folding feature is underrated if you work out in a small space.

Marcy’s folding bike is relatively portable. It features transport wheels, making it easy to move from one corner to another without lifting and carrying the entire bike. Depending on your strength, you could carry it up or down a flight of stairs if needed because it only weighs 37 pounds — making it one of the lightest exercise bikes featured in this article.

The features of this folding exercise bike surprised me. It boasts a 250-pound weight capacity, which is great for its lightweight frame. When folded out, the 14-gauge steel feels sturdy, so I’m confident it’ll hold up to its listed weight limit. The pedals have foot straps like the Horizon 5.0R Recumbent Bike, and they’re also weighted, which makes getting your feet inserted much easier. The two-year warranty was higher than expected for a budget-friendly folding bike like this.

One downside is that the  Marcy foldable bike’s console is pretty barebones, displaying only the distance, time, speed, odometer, and burned calories. It has no built-in programming, meaning you’re stuck with the manual mode and might need a subscription to vary your workout. Unsurprisingly, the console also lacks Bluetooth or ANT+ connectivity, so no apps or fitness devices will pair or sync with it. If tracking your workout data is crucial, find an alternative method or bike.

All the above considered, we rank this 3.5 out of 5 stars for its folding feature to save space, portability, and multiple surprising features like sturdiness, pedals, and warranty.

Best Exercise Bike for Small Spaces: Cubii Move

Cubii Move
3.8
  • Dimensions: 21.7" L x 19.7" W x 9.7" H
  • Resistance levels: Eight
  • Available programming: No
  • Weight capacity: Not listed
  • Type: Under desk
Check Price

Pros

  • Low impact with good metrics
  • The Cubii app is free
  • Small, compact footprint
  • Lightweight and portable

Cons

  • No programming
  • Lacks intensity
  • Might not work for all surfaces or desks

The Cubii Move has six adjustable resistance levels using the knob in the center of the machine, so you can customize your workout intensity and challenge yourself as you progress. 

The LCD screen displays the metric you’ve selected, and this under-desk exercise bike can track a surprising number of metrics, from stride count and mileage to duration and calories burned. The reset button is large enough to press it with your toe without bending down and using your finger.

This under-desk machine is free and compatible with the Cubii app, which lets you manually add your data, join challenges, and access 300+ expert-guided workout classes. Through it, you can connect with other Cubii users and share your achievements and goals.

The Cubii is lightweight and portable, weighing only 18 pounds. Thanks to its glass-filled nylon construction, you can quickly move it from room to room. This means it’s not difficult to bring it home from your office, so you can continue to use it while watching TV after your workday — storing it under your bed or in a closet when not in use.

This under-desk elliptical isn’t suitable if you’re looking for a high-intensity or full-body workout. It only targets your lower body muscles: quads, hamstrings, glutes, and calves. However, the range of motion is significantly smaller compared to a recumbent exercise bike. It also doesn’t provide much cardiovascular or calorie-burning benefits compared to other exercise machines.

The Cubii may not work well on thick carpets as the rubber feet might sink, causing the unit to wobble and shift out of place. Also, it might not fit under some desks or chairs, depending on the height and clearance. You may need to adjust your chair or desk height to avoid hitting your knees on the underside of your desk. Lastly, you may also need to wear comfortable shoes or socks to prevent blisters or discomfort on your feet.

All the above considered, we rank this 3.5 out of 5 stars for its low impact, good metrics, free app, and portable build.

Best Exercise Bike With a Screen: Peloton Bike+

Peloton Bike+
4.4
  • Dimensions: 59" L x 22" W x 59" H
  • Resistance levels: 100
  • Available programming: Yes
  • Weight capacity: 297 pounds
  • Type: Spin
Check Price

Pros

  • Outstanding quality console
  • High-tech screen
  • Massive range of classes and music

Cons

  • Premium cost of over $2,000
  • Requires monthly subscription
  • You won’t jive with every instructor

The screen on the Peloton Bike+ is amazing. It is a 23.8-inch HD (1080p) touchscreen that rotates 360 degrees, so you can easily switch between your cycling workouts and exercising off the bike. The screen also has a high-fidelity sound system, a front-facing camera, and a microphone so that you can interact with other riders and instructors with crystal-clear quality. The camera even has a privacy cover, which many camera-shy people can appreciate.

I like the screen’s responsiveness and how easy it is to navigate. It displays all the metrics you need to track your performance, like cadence, resistance, output, heart rate, and calories burned. It even features a reduced-reflective and anti-smudge coating, so your fingerprints won’t end up all over the touchscreen.

Peloton offers various live and on-demand classes to suit your preferences and goals. I love the availability of classes and the huge selection of music choices like pop, hip hop, rock, R&B, the 80s, 90s, 2000s, and Broadway. The classes range from five to 75 minutes, though from what I’ve seen, most classes fall in the 20- to 30-minute range. Sometimes, if I’m in the mood for a longer workout but can’t find a 45-minute class that interests me, I’ll “stack” two shorter classes together. 

I particularly enjoy the Power Zone classes, where different parts focus on staying within a certain heart rate zone, and the climb or HIIT rides, where the intensity is slightly higher than regular classes. There are also many beginner classes, and even though I consider myself more advanced in fitness, I enjoy the beginner classes occasionally for active recovery.

Unfortunately, the bike is expensive. The Peloton Bike+ costs $2,495, a lot of money for an exercise bike. 

You also have to pay for the accessories, such as the shoes, the mat, the weights, and the heart rate monitor, which can add up to another few hundred dollars. The bike also requires a monthly subscription of $39 to access the classes and features, another recurring cost you must factor in. If you are on a tight budget, the Peloton Bike+ might not be your best option.

The Peloton Bike+ only works with the Peloton app and the Apple Watch, which means you cannot use it with other fitness apps or devices you might already have or prefer. 

For example, you can’t use the bike with Zwift, Strava, Garmin, Fitbit, or any other third-party app or device. You also can’t export your workout data to other platforms unless you use a workaround involving screenshots or third-party apps. This can be frustrating if you want to integrate your Peloton workouts with your other fitness activities or track your progress on other platforms.

It’s also important to realize that you won’t jive with every instructor. As you ride the bike more and familiarize yourself with their personalities and styles, you learn who you connect best with. 

For example, I’m not a big fan of over-the-top cheerleading or motivational talk when exercising, so I avoid the instructors who tend to lean that way during their classes. Several instructors were once competitive cyclists or Ironman/triathlon athletes. They provide a lot of insight into the mindset of an athlete, which I like a lot better, so I take their classes more often. The key is to test out many instructors and stick with who you enjoy most.

All the above considered, we rank this 4.25 out of 5 stars for its outstanding quality console, high-tech screen, and massive range of classes and music.

What Are the Benefits of Exercise Bikes?

Low-Impact Training

Unlike running or jumping, cycling places less stress on your joints, bones, and muscles. This reduces injury risk and makes exercise bike training suitable for all ages and fitness levels, especially seniors and those struggling with excessive weight.

Improved Cardiovascular Conditioning

Cycling increases your heart rate and blood circulation, strengthening your heart, lungs, and blood vessels over time. This allows them to handle higher cardio demands than they could have previously tolerated. Additionally, improved cardiovascular conditioning can lower blood pressure and cholesterol, reducing the risk of heart disease and stroke.

Can Support Weight Loss Goals

Depending on the intensity and duration of your workout, you can burn anywhere from a couple hundred to nearly a thousand calories per hour on an exercise bike. This can help you create a calorie deficit essential for losing weight.

Reduced Stress

Using an exercise bike can help you reduce stress and anxiety, as it releases endorphins and serotonin, which are natural chemicals that make you feel happier and more relaxed. 

Lower Body Strengthening

Exercise bikes work out your lower body muscles, such as your glutes, quads, hamstrings, and calves. This can improve your muscle strength and endurance, as well as your balance and coordination. Stronger lower body muscles can also prevent or alleviate lower back pain, knee pain, and other common ailments.

What to Consider When Buying an Exercise Bike

Exercise Bike Type

There are four exercise bike types: upright, recumbent, spin, and air.

  • Upright: An upright bike allows you to sit upright with the pedals directly below you. The handles are elevated and are closer to you than on a spin bike, and the seat is usually wider and more comfortable. This conventional riding position is great if you like longer rides that focus on your legs, but it’s less effective for high-intensity training than an air bike.
  • Recumbent: This style of bike has a seat with a back pad to support your middle and lower back, placing you in a reclined riding position. Unlike other styles, the pedals are at the front on a recumbent bike. The recumbent style distributes your weight evenly between the seat and the back pad, making it excellent for longer rides. Since you can relax your upper body more than an upright bike, it’s great for riders with back and joint issues. This style is also lower to the ground, so getting on and off the bike is easier — a major selling point if you struggle with mobility.
  • Spin: A spin bike, also known as an indoor cycling bike, is the closest style to outdoor cycling. The narrower seat and lower bring your upper body forward, giving your upper body a workout instead of just your legs. This style is less comfortable than an upright and recumbent bike but offers better performance, which is vital for those wanting to train at higher intensities.
  • Air bike: This fan-based bike style is sometimes called “dual-action.” Air bikes feature moving handlebars that you can operate separately or simultaneously with the pedals and provide resistance by the fan blades displacing air. The seat tends to be broader, and the pedals are below it, like on an upright bike. An air bike isn’t the best for long rides because it’s harder to maintain consistent resistance, but this style is unmatched for high intensity.
The Assault Fitness AssaultBike Pro X in a studio garage gym
The Assault Fitness AssaultBike Pro X is an example of an air bike.

Cost

Exercise bikes can range from hundreds to a few thousand dollars. Generally, the higher-priced bikes include more features like high-tech consoles, more resistance levels, and better build quality. If you go too cheap, you can miss out on key features that prevent an enjoyable and safe cycling experience.

Dimensions

You want to ensure the bike fits comfortably in your room and doesn’t obstruct your movement or other furniture. You also want to check the weight and portability of the bike in case you need to move it around or store it away.

Remember, you’ll likely need one to two feet of open space on either side of your bike to get on and off and not feel cramped while riding.

A young man tilting the Diamondback 1260Sc bike to wheel it around his garage
Transport wheels, like the ones on the Diamondback 1260Sc, make an exercise bike easier to move around your gym.

Build Quality

The overall build quality of an exercise bike should be top of mind when shopping. Look for a steel frame over aluminum — it’ll be more robust and sturdier. High-quality exercise bikes often feature a higher weight capacity, so you can usually use the bike’s total capacity as a proxy for its build quality.

Noise 

If you’ll be using your exercise bike at home, you’ll want to be mindful of how noisy the bike will be, especially if you’ll be working out when kids or neighbors might be sleeping. Noise level depends mainly on the resistance type of the bike. 

Air bikes are by far the loudest because they’re fan-based, followed by mechanical-tension bikes since they apply resistance using friction pads. The quietest exercise bikes will be those that use electromagnetic resistance due to magnets applying tension to the flywheel.

You’ll also want to consider whether you’ll be watching live exercise classes or follow-along workouts on your console. These will project sound with speakers, but you can usually use headphones or earbuds to minimize the noise from any tech you use.

Seat and Handlebar Adjustability

The adjustability of your seat and handlebars is paramount to avoid injury, even more so if you’re taller or shorter than average.

Typically, you’ll want a bike that lets you adjust the seat in four ways: up, down, forward, and back. Seats with upward and downward angling are also beneficial for a more customized fit. Look for two-point adjustability at a minimum for the handlebars, which means they can be adjustable forward and back.

A woman adjusting the seat height on the NordicTrack S22i Studio Bike
Adjusting the seat height on the NordicTrack Studio S22i

Console

Like all of the best cardio machines, exercise bikes vary widely in design, so it’s no surprise that consoles can be ultra-basic, high-tech, or even lacking altogether. Although rare, some exercise bikes don’t have a console.

The key is that not every console will show your revolutions per minute (rpm), distance traveled, heart rate, or calories burned — all of which aren’t mandatory for a workout but can be highly motivating for your long-term adherence and progress. Just remember that more detailed displays tend to come with a higher price.

Pedals

Typically, you’ll find three main types of pedals on exercise bikes: flat, cage, and clip-in.

  • Flat: This is your classic type of pedal, also known as the “platform” pedal in the cycling world. Flat pedals are precisely as they sound — flat. You just put your feet against them and pedal, making them incredibly easy to use. Unfortunately, they’re harder to control on the ascent of each revolution when you’re pedaling fast, and if your feet slip, you can bang your ankles or scrape your shins against the pedals. 
  • Cage: This type of pedal is a flat pedal with toe clips attached to the front, which are flexible “cages”  that slide over the toe box of your shoes. Toe clips hold your feet in place and make biking more efficient because you can apply force upwards without having your foot come off the pedal — allowing you to transfer that force back into the downward stroke. Since you can pull up on the pedal and push down, you can work your legs more to burn more calories.
  • Clip-in: Lastly, there are clip-in pedals. Exercise bikes built for serious cyclists will tend to feature clip-in pedals connecting to cyclists’ special shoes. Not to worry though, you can upgrade the pedals of most bikes to clip-in pedals if you like the bike itself, but they only have flat or cage pedals.

Available Programming

Exercise bikes with consoles can have all kinds of built-in workouts. The most popular are hill climbing, cardio, fat burning, and strength training. 

Some bikes don’t include programming, like the Diamondback 1260sc. If you’re using your smartphone or tablet, a console lacking programming might be fine. If not, make sure the bike has Bluetooth connectivity at a minimum.

Bluetooth connectivity is the most popular connectivity method, allowing you to use apps like Peloton and Zwift. AMP+ is another type of connectivity, but it’s mostly limited to heart rate monitors, so I’d recommend using Bluetooth instead. It’s a bit more money upfront but opens up the available connections for apps, workouts, and more.

Available Conveniences

Exercise bikes can come with several convenient accessories to make your workouts more comfortable and enjoyable. Not all bikes include these, but you can often buy them separately to customize your exercise bike later.

  • Phone/tablet holder: If you have an exercise bike with a console lacking in streaming service and classes, then a media shelf is a convenient plus. A media shelf is just a hard plastic ridge that sticks out from the console to lay your device without it falling off. Without one, you’ll have to hold your device for the duration of your workout.
  • Water bottle holder: Having a water bottle holder is seriously underrated whether you’ll be doing shorter HIIT classes or longer endurance rides. The last thing you want is to interrupt your workout just because your water bottle isn’t within reach. One of our Breaking Muscle staff members runs into this problem every workout — they have an upright bike without a water bottle holder. While it’s possible to buy the holder separately, its absence from the stock version of the bike is an annoying omission by the manufacturer.
  • Built-in fans: Built-in fans are more common on the best treadmills than on exercise bikes, but some bikes, like the NordicTrack S22i Studio Bike, include them. If you sweat heavily, live in a hot or humid climate, or enjoy the added comfort of built-in airflow, it can be a convenient add-on for your bike. Remember, if your bike doesn’t include this feature, you can buy and mount a mini fan separately.
  • Weight rack: Some riders like combining bike rides with weight lifting using the best dumbbells. Similar to the water bottle holder, having a small weight rack to keep them within reach will save you from getting off your bike whenever you need to use them.
  • Wheels: If you’ll be moving your bike often, having wheels built into the bike is a nice feature. It means you don’t have to drag your bike and risk ruining your floor, making it easier to transport bikes over 100 pounds. 
  • Heart rate handles: Most bikes are compatible with heart rate monitors, but it’s even more convenient to have handles with heart rate reading capability. Unfortunately, you’ll tend only to see these on upright or recumbent bikes in the premium price range.

Resistance Types

There are three types of resistance for exercise bikes: fan-based, electromagnetic, and mechanical. 

  • Fan-based: An air bike is fan-based and creates resistance by the fan blades displacing air. This style offers a (theoretically) unlimited amount of resistance because the harder you pedal and push, the more air the blades will displace, causing greater resistance. 
  • Electromagnetic: These bikes work with magnets on either side of the flywheel. As the magnets get closer to the flywheel, they apply more resistance. Because they use magnets, these bikes are smoother, quieter, have lower maintenance, and are easier to select during workouts but more expensive. 
  • Mechanical: This style uses mechanical resistance in the form of friction pads made from wool or rubber. Most are designed so that you physically twist the resistance knob to add or remove the tension placed on the flywheel. Because of the friction, these bikes are noisier and often need more maintenance as pads wear out and become misaligned with heavy use — however, they are cheaper as a result.

Drive Type

When you turn the pedals on an exercise bike, the “drive” is connected to the flywheel; when that moves, you’ll feel resistance. There are two types of drives: chain and belt. 

A chain-driven exercise bike will be more durable because the chain is metal, which makes maintenance cheaper in the long run. Unfortunately, it requires regular lubrication to ensure metal parts glide smoothly along each other. Also, chains are noisier than belts and feel rougher, so they’re often in fan-based and mechanical bikes.

Belt drives are quieter and smoother, so they’re usually in magnetic resistance bikes. The downside to a belt-drive bike is that the belt can loosen over time with heavy use and won’t last nearly as long as a chain — costing you more over time.

Resistance Levels

Exercise bikes have a vast range of resistance levels. Because there are also different types of resistance, there’s no universal standard or comparison method.

While knowing how many resistance levels there are on the exercise bike is helpful, the best way to see whether it offers the rate resistance range is to test it in person.

Once you have an exercise bike in mind, look for a local store where you can test it out in their showroom. Remember to bring your athletic attire and cycling shoes if you have them.

Warranties 

There’s a massive range of warranties for exercise bikes, from as little as 30 days to as long as 15 years. I wouldn’t recommend settling with any less than a one-year warranty. 

Based on the exercise bikes included in this article, ten years on the frame, three years on parts, and one year on labor is a solid warranty to look for if you value peace of mind from your purchase.

Weight Capacity

Weight capacity is an essential factor that affects the safety and durability of the bike because it reflects the craftsmanship and quality of the materials and parts used to build it. Choosing a bike with a higher weight capacity usually means getting a more robust frame and more durable parts like the pedals and flywheel. 

Exercise bike weight capacities range from 200 pounds to over 400 pounds. 

If you’re a heavier user, I’d recommend choosing a bike with a weight limit of at least 125 percent of your body weight. The closer you are to the bike’s weight capacity, the higher the risk of damaging it or injuring yourself. The bike can also become unstable, noisy, or shaky, reducing the quality of your workout.

Flywheel Weight 

If you’re investing in the best exercise bike overall, flywheel weight should be one of the top things you consider. The flywheel is the heavy wheel at the front or back of the bike that spins when you pedal to create momentum. It’s linked to the pedals by a chain or a belt, similar to one in your car’s engine.

Flywheel weights can vary widely, from as little as six pounds to as much as 50 pounds. Most people will have a better biking experience with a heavier flywheel because it closely simulates riding a bike outside. I recommend looking for a flywheel between 14 and 20 kilograms (about 30 to 44 pounds). Typically, a heavier flywheel offers a smoother ride. 

Suppose you’re working with a tight budget. In that case, I encourage you to sacrifice some bells and whistles like a sleek built-in tablet or a monthly class subscription because the flywheel weight is crucial for an enjoyable riding experience.

As a caveat, one Breaking Muscle staff member has used the Keiser M3i Bike extensively, with a flywheel weight of just eight pounds. It’s positioned at the bike’s rear to provide a different feel, but it can still offer an intense workout.

Final Thoughts

Exercise bikes have transformed home fitness, offering amazing exercise variety and adjustability in a small space.

The best exercise bikes combine interactive tech and powerful metric tracking without going overboard on the price.

At the end of the day, the best exercise bike for you depends on your budget, the size of your workout space, and the exercise bike features you value most.

Best Exercise Bikes: Side-by-Side Comparison

Best Exercise Bike Overall
Best
Air Bike
Best Exercise Bike With Classes
Best Exercise Bike for Seniors
Best Spin
Exercise Bike
Best Portable Exercise Bike
Best Exercise Bike for Weight Loss
Best Magnetic Exercise Bike
Best Affordable Exercise Bike
Best Recumbent Exercise Bike
Best Folding Exercise Bike
Best Exercise Bike for Small Spaces
Best Exercise Bike With a Screen
Description:
  • Dimensions: 60" L x 22" W x 63" H
  • Resistance levels: 24
  • Available programming: Yes (requires iFIT subscription)
  • Weight capacity: 350 pounds
  • Type: Spin
Description:
  • Overall dimensions: 51.73” L x 24.52” W x 52.51” H
  • Weight: 125 pounds
  • Weight capacity: 330 pounds
  • Display: High-contrast LCD screen
Description:
  • Dimensions: 59" L x 23" W x 65" H
  • Resistance levels: 32
  • Available programming: Yes
  • Weight capacity: 300 pounds
  • Type: Spin
Description:
  • Dimensions: 66" L x 25.2" W x 52.2" H
  • Resistance levels: 100
  • Available programming: Yes
  • Weight capacity: 300 pounds
  • Type: Recumbent
Description:
  • Overall dimensions: 59” L x 23” W x 50” H
  • Weight: 130 pounds
  • Weight capacity: 300 pounds
  • Display: LCD monitor to track workout metrics
Description:
  • Overall dimensions: 48” L x 24” W; seat to pedal height ranges from 31" to 40.5"
  • Weight: 68 pounds
  • Weight capacity: 350 pounds
  • Display: PM5 monitor
Description:
  • Dimensions: 45.5" L x 22" W
  • Resistance levels: Not listed
  • Available programming: Yes
  • Weight capacity: 330 pounds
  • Type: Spin
Description:
  • Dimensions: 59.8" L x 24.1" W x 55.3" H
  • Resistance levels: 100
  • Available programming: Yes
  • Weight capacity: 325 pounds
  • Type: Spin
Description:
  • Dimensions: 40.16" L x 21.65" W x 46.06" H
  • Resistance levels: 100
  • Available programming: No
  • Weight capacity: 270 pounds
  • Type: Spin
Description:
  • Dimensions: 66.4" L x 28" W x 47" H
  • Resistance levels: 25
  • Available programming: Yes
  • Weight capacity: 330 pounds
  • Type: Recumbent
Description:
  • Dimensions: 39" L x 22" W x 48.5" H
  • Resistance levels: Seven
  • Available programming: No
  • Weight capacity: 250 pounds
  • Type: Recumbent (foldable)
Description:
  • Dimensions: 21.7" L x 19.7" W x 9.7" H
  • Resistance levels: Eight
  • Available programming: No
  • Weight capacity: Not listed
  • Type: Under desk
Description:
  • Dimensions: 59" L x 22" W x 59" H
  • Resistance levels: 100
  • Available programming: Yes
  • Weight capacity: 297 pounds
  • Type: Spin
Best Exercise Bike Overall
Description:
  • Dimensions: 60" L x 22" W x 63" H
  • Resistance levels: 24
  • Available programming: Yes (requires iFIT subscription)
  • Weight capacity: 350 pounds
  • Type: Spin
Best
Air Bike
Description:
  • Overall dimensions: 51.73” L x 24.52” W x 52.51” H
  • Weight: 125 pounds
  • Weight capacity: 330 pounds
  • Display: High-contrast LCD screen
Best Exercise Bike With Classes
Description:
  • Dimensions: 59" L x 23" W x 65" H
  • Resistance levels: 32
  • Available programming: Yes
  • Weight capacity: 300 pounds
  • Type: Spin
Best Exercise Bike for Seniors
Description:
  • Dimensions: 66" L x 25.2" W x 52.2" H
  • Resistance levels: 100
  • Available programming: Yes
  • Weight capacity: 300 pounds
  • Type: Recumbent
Best Spin
Exercise Bike
Description:
  • Overall dimensions: 59” L x 23” W x 50” H
  • Weight: 130 pounds
  • Weight capacity: 300 pounds
  • Display: LCD monitor to track workout metrics
Best Portable Exercise Bike
Description:
  • Overall dimensions: 48” L x 24” W; seat to pedal height ranges from 31" to 40.5"
  • Weight: 68 pounds
  • Weight capacity: 350 pounds
  • Display: PM5 monitor
Best Exercise Bike for Weight Loss
Description:
  • Dimensions: 45.5" L x 22" W
  • Resistance levels: Not listed
  • Available programming: Yes
  • Weight capacity: 330 pounds
  • Type: Spin
Best Magnetic Exercise Bike
Description:
  • Dimensions: 59.8" L x 24.1" W x 55.3" H
  • Resistance levels: 100
  • Available programming: Yes
  • Weight capacity: 325 pounds
  • Type: Spin
Best Affordable Exercise Bike
Description:
  • Dimensions: 40.16" L x 21.65" W x 46.06" H
  • Resistance levels: 100
  • Available programming: No
  • Weight capacity: 270 pounds
  • Type: Spin
Best Recumbent Exercise Bike
Description:
  • Dimensions: 66.4" L x 28" W x 47" H
  • Resistance levels: 25
  • Available programming: Yes
  • Weight capacity: 330 pounds
  • Type: Recumbent
Best Folding Exercise Bike
Description:
  • Dimensions: 39" L x 22" W x 48.5" H
  • Resistance levels: Seven
  • Available programming: No
  • Weight capacity: 250 pounds
  • Type: Recumbent (foldable)
Best Exercise Bike for Small Spaces
Description:
  • Dimensions: 21.7" L x 19.7" W x 9.7" H
  • Resistance levels: Eight
  • Available programming: No
  • Weight capacity: Not listed
  • Type: Under desk
Best Exercise Bike With a Screen
Description:
  • Dimensions: 59" L x 22" W x 59" H
  • Resistance levels: 100
  • Available programming: Yes
  • Weight capacity: 297 pounds
  • Type: Spin

FAQs

What is the best exercise bike for home use?

The best exercise bike for home use is the NordicTrack S22i Studio Bike due to its excellent iFIT classes, smooth flywheel with incline/decline capability, and convenient add-ons.

How do I choose a good exercise bike?

To choose a good exercise bike, consider the type of bike, flywheel weight, adjustability, display, and convenient features. You also need to compare different models based on your budget, space, fitness goals, and personal preferences.

How long should you ride a stationary bike to get a good workout?

To get a good workout on a stationary bike, you should ride for 10 to 60 minutes. The exact duration depends on your goals, your fitness level, and the intensity of your ride.

How much does the best exercise bike cost?

The best exercise bike cost depends on what you consider to be the “best.” The best affordable exercise bike costs about $300, whereas the best exercise bike with a screen is roughly $2,500.

What are the best exercises for a stationary bike?

The best exercises for a stationary bike are light dumbbell-based exercises because they can fit on your exercise bike’s storage tray and be within reach without you needing to get off the bike.

The post 13 Best Exercise Bikes for Home Gyms (2024) appeared first on Breaking Muscle.

]]>
Best NMN Supplement: Fountain of Youth in a Bottle? (2024) https://breakingmuscle.com/best-nmn-supplement/ Mon, 04 Dec 2023 15:23:05 +0000 https://breakingmuscle.com/?p=201811 What exactly is the big deal with NMN? It all starts with NAD (nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide). Think of NAD as cellular currency in your body. It’s required for things like energy production, DNA repair, and regulating gene expression. All of these processes sustain cell life and resist aging. As we age, our NAD levels drop, leading to a...

The post Best NMN Supplement: Fountain of Youth in a Bottle? (2024) appeared first on Breaking Muscle.

]]>
What exactly is the big deal with NMN? It all starts with NAD (nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide). Think of NAD as cellular currency in your body. It’s required for things like energy production, DNA repair, and regulating gene expression. All of these processes sustain cell life and resist aging.

As we age, our NAD levels drop, leading to a decline in these functions. Not surprisingly, this contributes to the aging process. This is why people are trying to maintain or boost their NAD levels. Experts believe maintaining higher levels of NAD can potentially slow down aging and promote longevity. (18)

One of the ways to increase NAD levels is with NMN supplements. Nicotinamide mononucleotide (NMN) is a precursor to NAD, meaning it’s a substance that the body can convert into NAD. It’s like a raw material that cells can use to create more of the NAD ‘currency’ they need to function optimally.

With two decades of experience as a personal trainer and fitness nutrition specialist, I’ve witnessed a shift in client inquiries from how to get six-pack abs to a desire for longevity and improved quality of life. People don’t just want to live longer; they want to feel better too. While exercise and diet are important, NMN supplements offer a promising way to naturally boost NAD levels. For my review, I tested several options to help you find the best NMN supplement.

Medical disclaimer: This article is intended for educational and informational purposes only. It is not intended as a substitute for medical advice. For health advice, contact a licensed healthcare provider.

How We Chose the Best NMN Supplements

I’d argue that choosing the best NMN supplement is more difficult than most other supplements because it hasn’t been on the market for very long. With limited time for rigorous scrutiny, finding products that truly align with the science can be a challenge.

Here at Breaking Muscle, there are several factors that we consider to ensure you get the best NMN supplements for your budget and lifestyle.

Science-Based Formulas

We give priority to products featuring ingredients backed by proven scientific evidence. 

Ingredients such as NMN, resveratrol, and vitamin D have consistently demonstrated anti-aging benefits in studies. (5)(8) (14)

What’s more, we evaluate the dosage of each ingredient, aiming to closely align it with the quantities shown in these studies for maximum effectiveness.

Third-Party Verification

Let’s face it: Supplements that undergo third-party testing instill greater confidence. 

We’ve favored products that have been through legitimate testing by independent laboratories, assuring purity and potency.

Real-World User Feedback

Real-life experiences offer invaluable insights. We’ve conducted a thorough review of user feedback, meticulously examining reports of effectiveness, benefits, and any potential drawbacks to provide you with a comprehensive assessment.

Company Reputation

The track record of a brand matters. We’ve chosen companies with a reputation for integrity, transparency, and a commitment to customer satisfaction.

Balancing Value

Our aim is to recommend supplements that strike the right balance between cost and effectiveness, ensuring you receive the best value for your investment.

Safety

Above all, your well-being is our top concern. We’ve focused on supplements that incorporate proven, safe ingredients without unnecessary additives or fillers. 

Naturally, products associated with a long history of adverse effects have been excluded from our list.

Our Top Picks for the Best NMN Supplement

Best NMN Supplement Overall: Lifeforce Peak NMN

Lifeforce Peak NMN
4.5
  • Daily dose: Three capsules
  • Cost per serving: One-time purchase: $3.00 per serving / Monthly subscription: $2.33 per serving
  • NMN per serving: 375 milligrams
  • Key ingredients: Nicotinamide mononucleotide, berberine HCl, white mulberry extract, spermidine, lithium
  • Third-party testing: No
Check Price

Pros

  • HPLC-tested NMN with 99 percent purity 
  • 24 months’ stability
  • Naturally support healthy blood sugar levels

Cons

  • Difficult to find reviews
  • Price point for a one-time purchase is expensive
  • Only available through the official website

I’ve been a big fan of Lifeforce since I tried the brand in my search for the best testosterone booster. Once again, they didn’t disappoint. In fact, the team and I were so impressed with Peak NMN that we assigned it as our best NMN supplement overall.

What clinched it for us? 

A combination of science-backed ingredients at doses that work, all without breaking the bank. Plus, Peak NMN targets something special: it not only supports long-term cellular health but also takes on blood sugar — a key factor in aging. Consistently elevated blood sugar can damage mitochondria or cellular ‘powerhouses’ and contribute to age-related diseases. (1)

Lifeforce tackles this with two key ingredients: Berberine HCl (660 milligrams) and White Mulberry Extract (200 milligrams), both proven to support healthy blood sugar levels. It also includes spermidine, which helps with cellular growth and renewal. It’s known for aiding in autophagy, the body’s way of cleaning out old cellular junk to make way for new, healthier cells. (2)(3)(4)

Naturally, Lifeforce’s star ingredient is NMN, which has been shown to boost NAD levels, helping to keep your cells strong. NAD plays a significant role in all cellular processes, most notably, energy production, DNA repair, and the regulation of cellular aging. (5)

For me, one of the features of Peak NMN that stands out from other NMN supplements is its quality and stability. It contains HPLC-tested NMN boasting 99 percent purity and a 24-month shelf life. 

Not only are you getting the highest quality form of NMN but it’s also going to last much longer than most other NMN supplements. For context, most brands of NMN have a three-month shelf life when stored at room temperature. To get around this, simply put your NMN supplement in the refrigerator.

Finally, one of my favorite features of Lifeforce supplements is the option to add a specialized home blood test that evaluates dozens of biomarkers focusing on aging and longevity. This test, supported by telehealth consultations and individualized guidance from a healthcare professional, aims to provide insights into biological age, cellular health, and factors influencing lifespan. Taking these tests before and several months after consistently using the supplement (and following the advice of the telehealth experts) can showcase how your cellular health is improving.

One of the team members at Breaking Muscle went through this Lifeforce Diagnostics test, and he was amazed at the professionalism of the team as well as the preciseness and quality of the information he received from it. He especially liked the convenience factor of having a phlebotomist come to the location of his choice. It’s very easy to schedule and the whole process takes less than 10 minutes from the comfort of your home.

Why didn’t Peak NMN get a perfect score? My only gripe with the supplement is the dosage of NMN. Sure, it provides 375 milligrams per serving, which may be enough if you’re new to NMN and want to avoid potential side effects like digestive issues and skin irritation. But what happens when your body adjusts, and you want to take a dosage closer to 1,000 milligrams (the higher end of the recommended daily dose)? 

Compare the 375 milligrams of NMN in Peak NMN to the 900 milligram serving in Wonderfeel Youngr NMN – A huge difference. If you want to get close to this when taking Peak NMN, you’ll have to either double the dose or take a separate NMN supplement. If you choose the latter, I’d recommend going with our choice for the best budget NMN supplement, Genuine Purity Liposomal NMN+, to save some cash.

Best Anti-Aging NMN Supplement: Wonderfeel Youngr NMN

Wonderfeel Youngr NMN
4.5
  • Daily dose: Two capsules
  • Cost per serving: Introductory monthly subscription: $2.43 per serving / Regular monthly subscription: $2.76 per serving / One-time purchase: $2.93 per serving
  • NMN per serving: 900 milligrams
  • Key ingredients: Nicotinamide mononucleotide, vitamin D3, trans-resveratrol, olive fruit extract, ergothioneine
  • Third-party testing: Yes
Check Price

Pros

  • Earth-friendly packaging
  • Highest dosage of NMN on our list
  • Includes vitamin D3, a known longevity vitamin

Cons

  • Confusing monthly subscription service
  • Contains vitamin D3 but doesn’t include vitamin K2
  • No money-back guarantee

On a list of NMN supplements all claiming to reduce the impacts of aging, how does one stand above the rest as the best anti-aging NMN supplement?

For us, it’s all about a multi-targeted approach to fight the signs of aging. In other words, we want to see a supplement with multiple ingredients known for longevity benefits. And that’s what sets Wonderfeel Youngr NMN apart from the rest.

NMN is one of several anti-aging ingredients in Wonderfeel Youngr NMN. Let’s break down the ingredient list, starting from the top with vitamin D3. This is one of my favorite vitamins and one that I believe most people are lacking in.

Vitamin D3 is often associated with bone health, but it does so much more than that. When it comes to anti-aging benefits, vitamin D3 enhances immune function, supports cardiovascular health, and staves off cognitive decline. (14)

For men, vitamin D3 is especially important for hormonal health as it acts as a building block for testosterone. Low levels of testosterone are associated with weight gain, muscle loss, mood swings, and fatigue – All things that are pro-aging. (15)

Most importantly for our purposes, vitamin D3 is particularly useful because it seems to help stop the build-up of certain proteins that are commonly found in older people. Also, taking extra vitamin D3 may help reduce signs of aging at the cellular level, which suggests it might help to slow down how quickly we age biologically. (14)

There is one issue with the inclusion of vitamin D3 and it’s the exclusion of vitamin K2. When you take supplements, you want to try to pair or group ingredients that have a synergistic effect. In this case, vitamin K2 improves the bioavailability of vitamin D3. I’m not saying your body won’t see any benefit from the vitamin D3 in Wonderfeel Youngr NMN, but some level of bioavailability and potential benefit could be lacking thanks to the absence of vitamin K2.

NMN is the next ingredient on the list. What I love about Wonderfeel Youngr NMN is that it provides a dosage level that’s on the higher side at 900 milligrams per serving. As mentioned above, this is close to what David Sinclair takes on a daily basis.

Next up, we have trans-resveratrol. Again, this is another homerun ingredient. Trans-resveratrol is better than traditional resveratrol because it is the more bioavailable and biologically active form of the compound. While it is the preferred form of resveratrol, it is lacking in dosage at only 100 milligrams per serving. For reference, the standard dosage starts at 250 milligrams.

The next ingredient is olive fruit extract, which contains hydroxytyrosol, a powerful antioxidant that supports cardiovascular health by promoting healthy cholesterol levels and blood flow (circulation). It also has a lot of polyphenols and these compounds offer protective effects against oxidative stress—a key factor in aging—and inflammation, contributing to overall longevity. (16)

Finally, the ingredient list caps off with a super antioxidant known as ergothioneine, offering benefits for anti-aging, vascular health, and neuroprotection. It combats oxidative stress and inflammation, which reduces age-related cellular damage. It’s also thought to preserve telomeres, the chromosome endcaps that typically shorten with age. (17)

Cementing its place as the best anti-aging NMN supplement, is there anything that could make this supplement better? 

You bet! It is the first supplement on our list that focuses on earth-friendly packaging. Your first order will arrive in a durable and refillable glass bottle. After that, you’ll receive your supplement in completely recyclable and biodegradable pouches. Simply refill the glass bottle and recycle the pouch. Even if the pouch winds up in the garbage, it will break down within six to 42 months, leaving behind no trace of microplastics.

Do something positive for yourself while doing something productive for the environment.

Best NMN and Resveratrol Supplement: Omre NMN + Resveratrol

Omre NMN + Resveratrol
4.5
  • Daily dose: Two capsules
  • Cost per serving: One-time purchase: $1.99 per serving / Monthly subscription: $1.89 per serving
  • NMN per serving: 500 milligrams
  • Key ingredients: NMN powder, resveratrol, BioPerine 
  • Third-party testing: Yes
Check Price

Pros

  • Addition of BioPerine for better absorption
  • Plenty of positive reviews
  • 30-day money-back guarantee

Cons

  • No real savings with the Subscribe-and-Save option
  • Only available through the official website
  • Some of the reviews are questionable

When the longevity trend started, the abbreviations “NMN” and “NAD” were virtually unheard of. Instead, everyone was talking about resveratrol. Just because NMN is now taking center stage within the cellular health and longevity movement doesn’t mean resveratrol is obsolete. In fact, we recommend taking them both together. And that’s why our pick for the best NMN and resveratrol supplement is Omre NMN + Resveratrol.

What exactly is resveratrol?

A type of antioxidant known as a polyphenol, resveratrol is found in the skin of red grapes and berries as well as cocoa. Antioxidants fight against oxidative stress in your body, which is caused by an excess of free radicals. These are molecules that can damage cells and they are linked to several chronic diseases along with aging.

And this is where resveratrol comes in as an all-around longevity supplement. 

From a cardiovascular standpoint, resveratrol has been shown to support heart health by improving blood flow and reducing inflammation. Some research even suggests it can support healthy blood sugar levels. (Remember what we said above about blood sugar levels and aging?) (6)(7)

For our purposes, the most important benefits of resveratrol are its anti-aging properties, which include:

  • DNA repair: Activates proteins called sirtuins, aiding in DNA repair and cellular health. (8)
  • Antioxidant properties: Protects cells against oxidative stress, which contributes to aging. (9)
  • Cognitive protection: Offers neuroprotective effects that may slow neurodegenerative diseases. (10)
  • Cellular health: Improves mitochondrial function, leading to increased energy production and cellular vitality. (11)

Combining resveratrol with NMN may offer synergistic benefits. Most notably, the antioxidant activity of resveratrol complements the role of NMN in supporting mitochondrial (cellular) function.

I love the idea of combining two longevity heavy hitters. This is something you don’t see in many NMN supplements. And the fact that Omre uses trans-resveratrol earns it extra points. Why? Trans-resveratrol is the more bioavailable form of resveratrol meaning your body can properly ingest and assimilate the ingredient.

What’s more, both ingredients are dosed at 500 milligrams per serving, well within the same range used in studies and research. If you are interested in gradually building up to a higher dose, you can simply double your dose and you’ll be within the same range as longevity expert, David Sinclair.

Best Budget NMN Supplement: Genuine Purity Liposomal NMN+

Genuine Purity Liposomal NMN+
3.5
  • Daily dose: One capsule
  • Cost per serving: Annual: $0.49 per serving / Semi-annual: $0.55 per serving / One-time purchase: $1.17 per serving
  • NMN per serving: 250 milligrams
  • Key ingredients: Nicotinamide mononucleotide
  • Third-party testing: No
Check Price

Pros

  • Very budget-friendly, especially the annual plan
  • 67-day money-back guarantee
  • Good for newcomers to NMN supplements

Cons

  • Low dosage of NMN
  • No additional ingredients for bioavailability
  • Shelf stability could be a problem

If there’s one thing that you’ll quickly notice about NMN supplements, it’s the price tag. The sticker shock is going to naturally lead to the question of whether the best budget NMN supplement exists and if it’s worth buying. Thankfully, that can be answered with a double “yes.”

Introducing Genuine Purity Liposomal NMN+.

There are three major differences between Genuine Purity NMN and the rest of the options on this list: price, dosage, and bioavailability.

Let’s start with the obvious one: price. Even if you purchase a single bottle of Genuine Purity, you’re only paying $1.17 per serving, which is half of what some of the other brands are charging. If you want an insanely good deal for inexpensive supplements, you can’t beat buying one year’s worth upfront.

But there’s a reason for the lower price point and it has to do with ingredients and dosage. The only ingredient you’ll find in Genuine Purity is NMN. So, if you want those other ingredients that support longevity and cellular health, you’ll have to buy them separately and build your own stack. This is something I highly recommend. Not only can it be more cost-effective, but you’re guaranteed to get the proper dosage.

Speaking of dosages, you’ll see that it’s on the lower end of what the major studies used. Most of the studies mentioned above used anywhere from 250 milligrams to 1,250 milligrams. Genuine Purity provides 250 milligrams of NMN, which is among the lowest on our list. It isn’t bad if you’re just starting out and you want to see how your body responds to NMN, but for the long term, you’ll need to double or triple the dosage. 

Here’s the thing about that: At this price point, that’s still a good deal! If you buy a year upfront, you can easily triple your dosage and it’ll still end up being cheaper than most of the other NMN supplements out there.

Finally, let’s talk about bioavailability, which might be a double-edged sword for Genuine Purity. On one hand, it uses liposomal delivery technology, which can significantly enhance the absorption of NMN into the bloodstream. Liposomal delivery means that the NMN is encased in a sort of protective bubble made from lipids (fats). As a result, the NMN can bypass the harsh acids in the digestive system and get delivered directly into the cells where it’s needed most. (12)

On the other hand, not all liposomal products are created equal. The quality and size of the liposomes, as well as the stability of the liposomal structure, can greatly affect the uptake of NMN. Luckily, Genuine Purity claims to use high-quality liposomal encapsulation to ensure that you’re getting the most out of each serving.

One final point about bioavailability involves the shelf stability of the product. NMN supplements are notorious for having a poor shelf life. Yes, brands do spend the extra cash to ensure a longer shelf life like Lifeforce: Peak NMN. However, Genuine Purity doesn’t mention anything about an extended shelf life. As I mentioned above, if your aim is to take double or triple the serving size, shelf life isn’t something you’ll need to worry about.

Best Pure NMN Supplement: partiQlar Pure NMN

partiQlar Pure NMN
4.0
  • Daily dose: One capsule
  • Cost per serving: Annual: $0.71 per serving / Semi-annual: $0.90 per serving / One-time purchase: $1.20 per serving
  • NMN per serving: 500 milligrams
  • Key ingredients: Nicotinamide mononucleotide
  • Third-party testing: Yes
Check Price

Pros

  • Great dosage
  • Third-party tested
  • 60-day money-back guarantee

Cons

  • Nothing to ensure bioavailability
  • Questionable shelf stability
  • Lack of reviews

It should come as no surprise that the quality of supplements can range drastically. Take protein supplements as an example. If you buy whey protein concentrate, you might be getting a product that’s only 60% protein. If you buy whey protein isolate, you’ll get a hyper-filtered product that can deliver over 99% protein per serving. Both are protein supplements, but one is vastly superior to the other in terms of purity.

And the same goes for NMN supplements.

Purity or how much NMN you’re getting in every serving can vary wildly depending on the brand. On our list, we made sure to find products that had no less than 96% purity, which is the minimum you should always look for when shopping for an NMN supplement. With a product that pure, does it really matter which one you choose? 

Absolutely. Those last few purity points can really make a difference especially if it’s paired with a bioavailability delivery system ensuring optimal uptake.

When it comes to the best pure NMN supplement, partiQlar Pure NMN gets our vote for three reasons: a pure product, a knack for transparency, and an awesome team.

partiQlar’s NMN boasts an industry-leading purity that exceeds 99% and that’s a huge deal. This isn’t just some marketing ploy, it’s a claim that’s backed up by independent third-party laboratory testing. If you visit the official website, you’ll see that all the test results are right there on the homepage. (13)

Aside from the absurdly high purity of partiQlar’s NMN, one of the factors that I noticed is how transparent they are about the team behind the product. Not only is this pretty uncommon for NMN supplements, but you’d be hard-pressed to find this transparency with any supplement.

Knowing who is making your product means you can become a Google investigator and do your research for your own peace of mind (and to appease your supplement OCD). Very long story short: partiQlar sources their NMN from Effepharm. According to the official website, they are supposedly renowned for their research and development team of U.S. specialists along with their rigorous testing process.

Continuing with the idea of transparency and testing, partiQlar upholds rigorous standards to align with USP (United States Pharmacopeia) quality benchmarks. Also, the production facilities responsible for crafting partiQlar’s NMN are recognized by the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) and Underwriters Laboratories (UL), reflecting adherence to the stringent Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP) guidelines.

Now, with that said, adhering to GMP guidelines is commonplace even if a supplement doesn’t specifically mention it on their website. Supplement manufacturers in the United States must adhere to GMP standards in order to operate. So, while it’s not exactly unique, it is nice to know that your supplements are in good hands.

In short, with an elite team, production facilities, and third-party testing, partiQlar is serious about the purity and effectiveness of its NMN.

What Is NMN?

Aside from being almost impossible to pronounce correctly on the first try, nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide (NAD) has an essential role in all cellular functions. 

The catch is that NAD levels naturally decline as you get older. This can lead to a variety of age-related health issues like slowing metabolism and cellular dysfunction. In a vicious cycle, the less NAD you have, the worse these issues get and the faster you age.

Enter nicotinamide mononucleotide, or NMN, a precursor to NAD. 

Put simply, NMN is what your body uses to make more NAD. Recent studies and praise from longevity experts like David Sinclair have sparked interest in NMN supplements to naturally boost NAD levels. 

The goal? To fight back against age-related decline in cellular health while improving overall longevity.

Benefits of Taking NMN

As a precursor to NAD, research suggests several potential health benefits associated with NMN supplementation:

Anti-Aging and Longevity 

NMN has exhibited numerous potential benefits against aging in different animal studies, including better metabolism and protection against diseases that come with age. Research suggests it may boost energy management within the body and enhance the body’s response to insulin as well as overall blood fat levels. (19)

Increased Energy Metabolism and Physical Activity

Supplementation with NMN has been suggested to improve energy expenditure and physical activity. A study indicated that NMN supplementation enhances neuronal function and physical activity, suggesting it may prevent the decline in energy metabolism associated with aging​​. (20)

Enhanced Physical Endurance and Metabolism

Continuing with the point above, research has found that NMN supplementation can improve endurance capacity, particularly in amateur runners, by enhancing oxygen delivery to muscle tissue and bringing energy to cells that are depleted during exercise​​. (20)

Cognitive and Cardiovascular Health

NMN supplementation has been linked to improved neuronal function in the brain and is suggested to have preventive and therapeutic potential in vascular cognitive impairment. (21)

How Long Does It Take for NMN to Start Working?

The one thing that I can’t stress enough is that NMN supplements are not like your favorite pre-workout supplements. You’re not going to feel them kick in with a bang after 20 minutes.

While several prominent biohackers suggest that you can use NMN as a nootropic (cognitive focus) supplement, I don’t agree with this. I believe the idea with NMN supplements is to promote improved cognitive function over the long term.

Besides, most nootropic-focused NMN supplements also contain other fast-acting ingredients that you’ll feel right away like caffeine and theobromine. Be sure not to confuse longevity supplements with nootropics.

It’s important to keep in mind that NMN is a long-term investment in your cellular health and overall longevity. So, don’t get discouraged if you don’t see immediate results. Stay consistent with your NMN supplement. The best way to determine if NMN is working for you is to take a biological age test once every several months and compare the differences. As mentioned above, we highly recommend Lifeforce Diagnostic, which measures more than 40 biomarkers and includes a personalized plan to optimize your health.

What Is the Best Way to Take NMN?

Hands down, the gold standard of absorption is intravenous. If you have the money and the time, you can find NAD drips at your local health spa. The results are immediate with many people citing a difference in how they feel the same day and throughout the week. The catch? NAD drips are notorious for making you nauseous. They are also extremely pricey. 

The simpler and more affordable way is with the NMN supplement.

NMN can be a bit finicky when it comes to how it’s best absorbed. The consensus is that sublingual (under the tongue) absorption is the way to go. This method allows NMN to bypass your digestive system and head straight into your bloodstream for faster results.

How Much NMN Should I Take Per Day?

This really depends on how comfortable you are with taking a “David Sinclair dose.” Some people jump right into taking 1,000 milligrams per day. 

But if you want to play it safe, many beginners start with around 250 milligrams to 500 milligrams per day. This is a good baseline to see how your body responds. As you continue to take the NMN supplement, you can gradually increase the dosage, but only if it makes sense for your goals and budget. 

What To Consider When Looking for an NMN Supplement

When shopping for an NMN supplement, here are some of the key factors to keep in mind:

Your Goals

When looking for an NMN supplement, I suggest asking yourself, “What do I want to accomplish by taking this?” 

  • Do you want to support long-term longevity in your body and brain? 
  • Are you looking to lower your biological (cellular) age?
  • Or are you looking for something fast-acting that can help you focus?

If the first two goals sound like what you’re after, then an NMN supplement can be a great complement to a healthy diet and exercise program.

If you’re more interested in that third goal, an NMN supplement isn’t going to give you what you’re after. As I mentioned above, although NMN is sometimes marketed as a nootropic, it’s not going to give you a feeling comparable to caffeine. Only stimulants will do that and NMN is not a stimulant.

So, before you buy an NMN supplement, make sure it aligns with what you’re trying to accomplish in your health journey.

The typical dosage for NMN supplements ranges between 250 milligrams and 1,250 milligrams. 

Should you start with a lower dosage? That really depends on your comfort level. 

Plenty of people jump right into taking 1,000 milligrams per day without any issues. If you’re someone who is new to NMN or supplements in general, consider starting out with 250 milligrams. If your body responds well to this dosage for a few weeks, gradually increase it. You can do that by simply doubling the serving that you’re currently taking.

With all that said, always consider speaking with a healthcare provider to help tailor your choice of the proper dosage based on your medical history and goals.

Ingredients and Ingredient Quality

You know you want to take an NMN supplement and you’re confident about the dosage. Now it’s time to make sure you’re getting quality ingredients. 

Here are several factors to look for when buying an NMN supplement:

  • Purity: Buy an NMN supplement that contains at least 96 percent purity.
  • Third-party testing: Look for products that have been third-party tested for quality assurance.
  • Certifications: Certifications such as GMP or NSF signify a product’s high-quality manufacturing.
  • Complementary ingredients: Check that added ingredients enhance efficacy and offer additional health benefits.
  • Additives and fillers: Avoid supplements with unnecessary additives, fillers, or any low-quality ingredients.
  • Product reviews and company reputation: Research the manufacturer’s reputation and read customer reviews to gauge the effectiveness and reliability of the product.

Safety

NMN supplements shouldn’t be a gamble. You should be able to confidently take your choice of supplement without worrying about your safety. 

Here are some tips to keep yourself safe when shopping for NMN supplements:

  • Check for interactions with medications. If you are currently taking medication, it’s crucial to understand how NMN might interact with those medications. Consult with a healthcare provider to ensure there are no potential negative interactions.
  • Ensure the supplement is backed by clinical research. Look for supplements that have been supported by clinical research. While research on NMN is still emerging, some products may have more scientific backing than others.
  • Ensure the brand adheres to safe manufacturing standards. Check to see if the supplement is produced in facilities that follow high safety standards, such as GMP-certified facilities. This ensures that the product is made with a high degree of consistency and control.

Potential Side Effects

NMN supplements are usually very safe and easy to handle. Still, some side effects have been reported, including the following:

  • Digestive issues such as nausea, vomiting, diarrhea, and abdominal pain
  • Gastrointestinal discomfort, including bloating and indigestion
  • Skin irritation and allergic reactions
  • Flushing and headaches

If you experience any of these, reducing the dosage or discontinuing use may be necessary. Either way, I’d recommend speaking with your doctor. Also, be sure to check the ingredient label to ensure the side effects are coming from the NMN and not another ingredient.

If you’re concerned about the potential side effects of NMN supplements, start with a lower dosage like 250 milligrams, and gradually increase it to gauge your body’s tolerance. Keep a close watch on your body’s reactions after starting NMN supplementation. Any new or unexpected symptoms should be taken seriously and discussed with a healthcare provider.

How To Get the Best Results from an NMN Supplement

There’s more to throwing a supplement capsule in your mouth and going about your day. If you want to get the most from your NMN supplement, here are several tips to consider:

Be Consistent

Above all, if you want to see results, you need to be consistent with taking your supplement. When taken at the same time each day, NMN supplements can help maintain stable levels of NAD in the body. 

In addition to consistency, the timing of your NMN dose might play a role in its efficacy. (And I stress the word “might.”)

There’s some evidence to suggest that taking NMN in the morning could align with your body’s natural rhythms for producing NAD. 

On the other hand, I’ve read that some experts recommend taking NMN at night to help with sleep. 

Does it matter? Overall, I’d recommend finding a time that works best for you and sticking with it. Better to be consistent with taking the supplement than trying to time it perfectly amidst a chaotic schedule and missing doses.

Remember That Diet and Exercise Come First 

Don’t forget, supplements are just part of the equation. As I always say to my clients, “Supplements are supplemental.” They should never be the star of the show – That privilege belongs to diet and exercise.

Eating right and staying active are essential if you want to see the best results. Before considering supplements, I’d suggest reviewing your current fitness and meal plan. Could they use some work? If so, then focus your time, energy, and money on those first.

Once your foundations with food and fitness are solid, then you can bring supplements into the mix.

Consider Synergistic Supplements

Assuming your diet and exercise program are all taken care of, you can look at longevity supplements beyond NMN.

While incredible on its own, NMN can be part of a broader supplement strategy. For example, combining NMN with resveratrol, a compound that also supports cellular health, may enhance the effects of NMN.

This isn’t a requirement but something to consider if your goal is to optimize anti-aging benefits and longevity.

Monitoring Progress and Adjust

Finally, I’d recommend keeping track of how you feel before and after starting the NMN supplement. Use the notepad on your phone and track any changes in energy levels, cognitive function, and overall wellness to gauge the supplement’s effectiveness.

Outside of noting how you feel, if you’re serious about tracking your results, I’d suggest a biomarkers panel test like the one Lifeforce offers. Doing this every quarter or every six months will give you the best idea of how you’re progressing and the changes you might need to make, especially if you’re chatting with a longevity expert.

Final Thoughts

I’m glad that longevity is finally a big focus in the industry. I’m ecstatic when clients ask me questions about living a longer life AND feeling better during those extended years.

Most importantly, I believe that NMN supplements have the potential to play an important role in achieving those anti-aging goals.

However, I’m still a big believer in the basics. 

There’s no “magic pill” that’s going to keep you young forever — at least, not yet there isn’t. Until that day arrives, I can’t stress this enough: Focus on mastering your nutritional choices, get consistent with an exercise program, and consider mental health exercises like meditation so you can live a well-balanced, healthy life. Once these are in order, you can complement your lifestyle with NMN supplements.

Best NMN Supplement: Side-by-Side Comparison

Best NMN Supplement Overall
Best NMN and Resveratrol Supplement
Best Budget NMN Supplement
Best Pure NMN Supplement
Best Anti-Aging NMN Supplement
Description:
  • Daily dose: Three capsules
  • Cost per serving: One-time purchase: $3.00 per serving / Monthly subscription: $2.33 per serving
  • NMN per serving: 375 milligrams
  • Key ingredients: Nicotinamide mononucleotide, berberine HCl, white mulberry extract, spermidine, lithium
  • Third-party testing: No
Description:
  • Daily dose: Two capsules
  • Cost per serving: One-time purchase: $1.99 per serving / Monthly subscription: $1.89 per serving
  • NMN per serving: 500 milligrams
  • Key ingredients: NMN powder, resveratrol, BioPerine 
  • Third-party testing: Yes
Description:
  • Daily dose: One capsule
  • Cost per serving: Annual: $0.49 per serving / Semi-annual: $0.55 per serving / One-time purchase: $1.17 per serving
  • NMN per serving: 250 milligrams
  • Key ingredients: Nicotinamide mononucleotide
  • Third-party testing: No
Description:
  • Daily dose: One capsule
  • Cost per serving: Annual: $0.71 per serving / Semi-annual: $0.90 per serving / One-time purchase: $1.20 per serving
  • NMN per serving: 500 milligrams
  • Key ingredients: Nicotinamide mononucleotide
  • Third-party testing: Yes
Description:
  • Daily dose: Two capsules
  • Cost per serving: Introductory monthly subscription: $2.43 per serving / Regular monthly subscription: $2.76 per serving / One-time purchase: $2.93 per serving
  • NMN per serving: 900 milligrams
  • Key ingredients: Nicotinamide mononucleotide, vitamin D3, trans-resveratrol, olive fruit extract, ergothioneine
  • Third-party testing: Yes
Best NMN Supplement Overall
Description:
  • Daily dose: Three capsules
  • Cost per serving: One-time purchase: $3.00 per serving / Monthly subscription: $2.33 per serving
  • NMN per serving: 375 milligrams
  • Key ingredients: Nicotinamide mononucleotide, berberine HCl, white mulberry extract, spermidine, lithium
  • Third-party testing: No
Best NMN and Resveratrol Supplement
Description:
  • Daily dose: Two capsules
  • Cost per serving: One-time purchase: $1.99 per serving / Monthly subscription: $1.89 per serving
  • NMN per serving: 500 milligrams
  • Key ingredients: NMN powder, resveratrol, BioPerine 
  • Third-party testing: Yes
Best Budget NMN Supplement
Description:
  • Daily dose: One capsule
  • Cost per serving: Annual: $0.49 per serving / Semi-annual: $0.55 per serving / One-time purchase: $1.17 per serving
  • NMN per serving: 250 milligrams
  • Key ingredients: Nicotinamide mononucleotide
  • Third-party testing: No
Best Pure NMN Supplement
Description:
  • Daily dose: One capsule
  • Cost per serving: Annual: $0.71 per serving / Semi-annual: $0.90 per serving / One-time purchase: $1.20 per serving
  • NMN per serving: 500 milligrams
  • Key ingredients: Nicotinamide mononucleotide
  • Third-party testing: Yes
Best Anti-Aging NMN Supplement
Description:
  • Daily dose: Two capsules
  • Cost per serving: Introductory monthly subscription: $2.43 per serving / Regular monthly subscription: $2.76 per serving / One-time purchase: $2.93 per serving
  • NMN per serving: 900 milligrams
  • Key ingredients: Nicotinamide mononucleotide, vitamin D3, trans-resveratrol, olive fruit extract, ergothioneine
  • Third-party testing: Yes

FAQs

What is the best form of NMN to take?

The best form of NMN to take typically depends on individual preferences and absorption rates; however, sublingual (under the tongue) tablets or powders are often recommended because they can bypass the digestive system and go directly into the bloodstream, potentially offering more immediate and effective absorption.

Which brand of NMN does David Sinclair take?

David Sinclair, a prominent researcher in the field of genetics and longevity, has mentioned using NMN supplements in his regimen, but due to promotional guidelines and the potential for conflict of interest, he does not endorse a specific brand.

Is it better to take NMN or an NAD supplement?

I find that choosing between NMN and NAD supplements comes down to time, energy, and cost. Nothing beats an intravenous NAD drip, but these are expensive, and they are guaranteed to make you feel nauseous. They could also be tricky to find depending on where you live.
If you want to avoid the hassle and cost of an NAD drip, I’d opt for NMN supplements. NMN is a precursor to NAD, meaning it converts into NAD in the body.

Does NMN work without resveratrol?

NMN can function and provide benefits independently of resveratrol; however, the combination of NMN and resveratrol may have a synergistic effect, potentially enhancing each other’s efficacy in supporting cellular health and longevity.

Is NMN safe to take?

NMN can function and provide benefits independently of resveratrol; however, the combination of NMN and resveratrol may have a synergistic effect, potentially enhancing each other’s efficacy in supporting cellular health and longevity.

Research

  1. Rungratanawanich, W., Qu, Y., Wang, X. et al. Advanced glycation end products (AGEs) and other adducts in aging-related diseases and alcohol-mediated tissue injury. Exp Mol Med 53, 168–188 (2021). https://doi.org/10.1038/s12276-021-00561-7.
  2. Liang Y, Xu X, Yin M, Zhang Y, Huang L, Chen R, Ni J. Effects of berberine on blood glucose in patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus: a systematic literature review and a meta-analysis. Endocr J. 2019 Jan 28;66(1):51-63. doi: 10.1507/endocrj.EJ18-0109. Epub 2018 Nov 3. PMID: 30393248.
  3. Thondre, P.S., Lightowler, H., Ahlstrom, L. et al. Mulberry leaf extract improves glycaemic response and insulaemic response to sucrose in healthy subjects: results of a randomized, double blind, placebo-controlled study. Nutr Metab (Lond) 18, 41 (2021). https://doi.org/10.1186/s12986-021-00571-2.
  4. Kiechl S, Pechlaner R, Willeit P, Notdurfter M, Paulweber B, Willeit K, Werner P, Ruckenstuhl C, Iglseder B, Weger S, Mairhofer B, Gartner M, Kedenko L, Chmelikova M, Stekovic S, Stuppner H, Oberhollenzer F, Kroemer G, Mayr M, Eisenberg T, Tilg H, Madeo F, Willeit J. Higher spermidine intake is linked to lower mortality: a prospective population-based study. Am J Clin Nutr. 2018 Aug 1;108(2):371-380. doi: 10.1093/ajcn/nqy102. PMID: 29955838.
  5. Igarashi, M., Nakagawa-Nagahama, Y., Miura, M. et al. Chronic nicotinamide mononucleotide supplementation elevates blood nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide levels and alters muscle function in healthy older men. npj Aging 8, 5 (2022). https://doi.org/10.1038/s41514-022-00084-z.
  6. Tomé-Carneiro J, Gonzálvez M, Larrosa M, Yáñez-Gascón MJ, García-Almagro FJ, Ruiz-Ros JA, García-Conesa MT, Tomás-Barberán FA, Espín JC. One-year consumption of a grape nutraceutical containing resveratrol improves the inflammatory and fibrinolytic status of patients in primary prevention of cardiovascular disease. Am J Cardiol. 2012 Aug 1;110(3):356-63. doi: 10.1016/j.amjcard.2012.03.030. Epub 2012 Apr 19. PMID: 22520621.
  7. Zhu X, Wu C, Qiu S, Yuan X, Li L. Effects of resveratrol on glucose control and insulin sensitivity in subjects with type 2 diabetes: systematic review and meta-analysis. Nutr Metab (Lond). 2017 Sep 22;14:60. doi: 10.1186/s12986-017-0217-z. PMID: 29018489; PMCID: PMC5610395.
  8. Baur JA, Sinclair DA. Therapeutic potential of resveratrol: the in vivo evidence. Nat Rev Drug Discov. 2006 Jun;5(6):493-506. doi: 10.1038/nrd2060. Epub 2006 May 26. PMID: 16732220.
  9. Leonard SS, Xia C, Jiang BH, Stinefelt B, Klandorf H, Harris GK, Shi X. Resveratrol scavenges reactive oxygen species and effects radical-induced cellular responses. Biochem Biophys Res Commun. 2003 Oct 3;309(4):1017-26. doi: 10.1016/j.bbrc.2003.08.105. PMID: 13679076.
  10. Jang JH, Surh YJ. Protective effect of resveratrol on beta-amyloid-induced oxidative PC12 cell death. Free Radic Biol Med. 2003 Apr 15;34(8):1100-10. doi: 10.1016/s0891-5849(03)00062-5. PMID: 12684095.
  11. Lagouge M, Argmann C, Gerhart-Hines Z, Meziane H, Lerin C, Daussin F, Messadeq N, Milne J, Lambert P, Elliott P, Geny B, Laakso M, Puigserver P, Auwerx J. Resveratrol improves mitochondrial function and protects against metabolic disease by activating SIRT1 and PGC-1alpha. Cell. 2006 Dec 15;127(6):1109-22. doi: 10.1016/j.cell.2006.11.013. Epub 2006 Nov 16. PMID: 17112576.
  12. Gopi S, Balakrishnan P. Evaluation and clinical comparison studies on liposomal and non-liposomal ascorbic acid (vitamin C) and their enhanced bioavailability. J Liposome Res. 2021 Dec;31(4):356-364. doi: 10.1080/08982104.2020.1820521. Epub 2020 Oct 6. PMID: 32901526.
  13. “Quality.” partiQlar, 6 Jan. 2023, partiqlar.com/quality/.
  14. Fantini C, Corinaldesi C, Lenzi A, Migliaccio S, Crescioli C. Vitamin D as a Shield against Aging. Int J Mol Sci. 2023 Feb 25;24(5):4546. doi: 10.3390/ijms24054546. PMID: 36901976; PMCID: PMC10002864.
  15. Pilz S, Frisch S, Koertke H, Kuhn J, Dreier J, Obermayer-Pietsch B, Wehr E, Zittermann A. Effect of vitamin D supplementation on testosterone levels in men. Horm Metab Res. 2011 Mar;43(3):223-5. doi: 10.1055/s-0030-1269854. Epub 2010 Dec 10. PMID: 21154195.
  16. D’Angelo C, Franceschelli S, Quiles JL, Speranza L. Wide Biological Role of Hydroxytyrosol: Possible Therapeutic and Preventive Properties in Cardiovascular Diseases. Cells. 2020 Aug 21;9(9):1932. doi: 10.3390/cells9091932. PMID: 32825589; PMCID: PMC7565717.
  17. Paul BD. Ergothioneine: A Stress Vitamin with Antiaging, Vascular, and Neuroprotective Roles? Antioxid Redox Signal. 2022 Jun;36(16-18):1306-1317. doi: 10.1089/ars.2021.0043. Epub 2021 Dec 7. PMID: 34619979; PMCID: PMC9221166.
  18. Shade C. The Science Behind NMN-A Stable, Reliable NAD+Activator and Anti-Aging Molecule. Integr Med (Encinitas). 2020 Feb;19(1):12-14. PMID: 32549859; PMCID: PMC7238909.
  19. Mills KF, Yoshida S, Stein LR, Grozio A, Kubota S, Sasaki Y, Redpath P, Migaud ME, Apte RS, Uchida K, Yoshino J, Imai SI. Long-Term Administration of Nicotinamide Mononucleotide Mitigates Age-Associated Physiological Decline in Mice. Cell Metab. 2016 Dec 13;24(6):795-806. doi: 10.1016/j.cmet.2016.09.013. Epub 2016 Oct 27. PMID: 28068222; PMCID: PMC5668137.
  20. Liao B, Zhao Y, Wang D, Zhang X, Hao X, Hu M. Nicotinamide mononucleotide supplementation enhances aerobic capacity in amateur runners: a randomized, double-blind study. J Int Soc Sports Nutr. 2021 Jul 8;18(1):54. doi: 10.1186/s12970-021-00442-4. PMID: 34238308; PMCID: PMC8265078.
  21. Tarantini S, Valcarcel-Ares MN, Toth P, Yabluchanskiy A, Tucsek Z, Kiss T, Hertelendy P, Kinter M, Ballabh P, Süle Z, Farkas E, Baur JA, Sinclair DA, Csiszar A, Ungvari Z. Nicotinamide mononucleotide (NMN) supplementation rescues cerebromicrovascular endothelial function and neurovascular coupling responses and improves cognitive function in aged mice. Redox Biol. 2019 Jun;24:101192. doi: 10.1016/j.redox.2019.101192. Epub 2019 Apr 10. PMID: 31015147; PMCID: PMC6477631.

The post Best NMN Supplement: Fountain of Youth in a Bottle? (2024) appeared first on Breaking Muscle.

]]>
Best Wrist Wraps for Powerlifting, CrossFit, Bench Pressing, and More (2024) https://breakingmuscle.com/best-wrist-wraps/ Sun, 19 Nov 2023 12:55:27 +0000 https://breakingmuscle.com/?p=201439 If you want to improve your performance and protect your wrists from injury, you should consider investing in a pair of wrist wraps. Wrist wraps are a type of support gear that wraps around your wrists to provide extra stability and support. The best wrist wraps can even help you lift heavier weights and improve your technique! But...

The post Best Wrist Wraps for Powerlifting, CrossFit, Bench Pressing, and More (2024) appeared first on Breaking Muscle.

]]>
If you want to improve your performance and protect your wrists from injury, you should consider investing in a pair of wrist wraps. Wrist wraps are a type of support gear that wraps around your wrists to provide extra stability and support. The best wrist wraps can even help you lift heavier weights and improve your technique!

But not all wrist wraps are created equal. Depending on your goals, preferences, and type of training, you’ll need a different style of wrist wrap. Some wraps are longer and stiffer, while others are shorter and more comfortable. Whether you’re into bodybuilding, powerlifting, weightlifting, or CrossFit, you’ll find the ideal pair of wrist wraps on this list for you.

How We Chose the Best Wrist Wraps

We’re a diverse team of certified fitness experts, exercise enthusiasts, and knowledgeable product testers. We have dozens of years of combined experience using wrist wraps for various activities and sports, and we tried out more than a dozen different pairs of wrist wraps specifically for this guide.

To help you choose the best wrist wraps for your needs, we’ve compiled a list of the eight top-rated wrist wraps on the market. We’ve reviewed their features, benefits, pros, and cons and compared them. During testing, we judged wrist wraps on their materials and construction, length and stiffness, closure mechanism, price, and more — rating each wrist wrap with a score between 1 to 5.

Our Top Picks for the Best Wrist Wraps

Best Wrist Wraps Overall: Iron Bull Strength Classic Wrist Wraps

Iron Bull Strength Classic Wrist Wraps
4.5
  • Material: Cotton-elastic blend
  • Length: 18 inches
  • Closure type: Velcro
  • IPF-approved: No
Check Price

Pros

  • Comfortable and solid wrist support
  • Easy-to-use Velcro closure system
  • Multi-purpose design
  • 30-day money-back guarantee
  • Ten colors available

Cons

  • 18-inch length might be too short for some
  • Not IPF-approved

The Iron Bull Strength Classic Wrist Wraps offer great wrist support. They’re 18 inches long, which gives you at least two wraps around your wrist if you have an average build. I find the 18-inch length to be just right; it’s not so long that there’s a ton of bulk on my wrists due to the extra material, and their support is adequate for most weight training exercises.

Their three-inch width provides plenty of wrist coverage, covering enough of the base of your hand and wrist area for the wrap to do its job. Also, the cotton-elastic blend gives enough stretch for solid compression and wrist support in your workouts. I especially like the blended material of these wraps  — they’re soft, and the cotton breathes enough to help avoid excess sweating in the first place.

Moreover, the Velcro closure system of the Classic Wrist Wraps is intuitive and easy to use. The thumb loop offers an excellent anchor point to help put them on tightly, and, unlike other brands, the double-stitching is high quality. I especially like how the Velcro section is sticky and well-sized. Some brands use such a long strip that can cause the extra material to hang off the end, which can get caught on things and unravel your wraps. Plus, the thumb loop makes it easy to hang over a hook to dry between workouts. 

One of my favorite features of the Iron Bull wraps is their multi-functionality. They’re suitable for various training styles, from bodybuilding and Olympic weightlifting to CrossFit and powerlifting.  Their 18-inch length and cotton-elastic blend make them lightweight on your wrists for the dynamic workouts of CrossFit and supportive enough for heavier powerlifting. This means that you can continue using them when you want to switch up your training styles without having to buy a different pair of wrist wraps.

Unfortunately, the Iron Bulls aren’t perfect. The 18-inch length is a solid general length, but most people with average wrists will only be able to get two revolutions of the wraps around their wrists. This means you’ll have less support on heavier lifts, which might be noticeable if you’re at an advanced level in powerlifting.

On that note, these wrist wraps are USPA, IPL, IWF, and USAW-approved… but they aren’t approved for use in the International Powerlifting Federation (IPF). Suppose you’re a competitive powerlifter or aspire to compete in the highest level of powerlifting in the future and want to use wrist wraps in competition. In that case, this means you’d have to buy a separate pair that’s approved for IPF use — you might want to consider the SBD Wrist Wraps instead if that applies to you.

All the above considered, we rank these 4.5 out of 5 stars for their great wrist support, easy-to-use Velcro closure system, and multi-functionality for different training styles. 

RELATED: Best Home Gym Equipment Essentials for Cardio, Strength Training, and More

Best Wrist Wraps for Powerlifting: SBD Wrist Wraps

SBD Wrist Wraps
4.5
  • Material: 70% polyester/30% rubber (flexible), 56% rubber/44% polyester (stiff)
  • Length: 15.7 inches (S), 23.6 inches (M), or 39.4 inches (L)
  • Closure type: Velcro
  • IPF-approved: Yes
Check Price

Pros

  • Approved for IPF and USPA use
  • Excellent build and durability for powerlifting
  • Various lengths and stiffnesses available
  • Manufactured in Great Britain
  • SBD brand is world-renowned in strength sports

Cons

  • Might be uncomfortable for some
  • More expensive

The standout feature of the SBD Wrist Wraps is that they’re IPF-approved. Investing in a pair of wrist wraps that you can practice with allows you to push your training harder, so you can (hopefully) get even stronger while getting comfortable using them before a competition. This way, you’ll step on the platform confidently in your support wear — letting you focus entirely on executing your attempts instead of worrying about your gear and how it’s fitting.

If you live and breathe powerlifting, these wrist wraps will not disappoint. They’re designed specifically for excellent wrist support; the thumb loop is heavy-duty and attached along industrial-grade fastening. But they didn’t stop there. 

SBD crafted them to match the maximum allowable width of 8 centimeters/3.15 inches, so you’ll get the best coverage between your hand and wrist for a solid cast-like level of support. They even have proprietary wide elastics in these wraps. One customer who bought the stiff mediums said they took a few times to break in, but after that, they give you the best protection from heavy weights. I’m seriously impressed and confident that whether you’re pushing new bench press PRs or back squat records, these wraps will help you hit them safely.

What surprised me the most about the SBDs is their range of lengths and stiffnesses. On their product page, they have three different lengths available: small (15.7 inches long), medium (23.6 inches long), or large (39.4 inches long). Combined with their detailed sizing chart, this means that whether you have small, average, or large wrists, you can find a wrist wrap length that will work great for you. 

Their two stiffness options, flexible or stiff, are built with varying amounts of polyester and rubber (elastic). For example, the flexible wraps have a 70% polyester-30% rubber blend that allows some wrist flexion and improved comfort due to the higher amount of polyester. The stiff wraps are woven with significantly more rubber, giving them more stretch and compression to fully immobilize your wrists. SBD mentions that most athletes will prefer the medium-length flexible wraps, but use their size guide to determine the ideal length for you.

These wrist wraps might be uncomfortable, especially if you choose their “stiff” option. One reviewer mentioned that their large-sized stiff wraps are excellent but can get really tight and start to cut off blood circulation to their wrists. 

When I didn’t see the material specs on their product page, a Breaking Muscle staff member reached out through their live chat and discovered that the stiff wrist wraps are 56 percent rubber (elastic) and 44 percent polyester blend. With over half the wraps’ material being elastic and zero cotton included, it’s no surprise these can be a tad uncomfortable.

It should come as no surprise that excellent quality comes at a price. At the time of writing, the SBDs retailed for $42.50. This makes them the most expensive wrist wraps out of all those featured in this article and possibly out of the budget of financially constrained lifters.

All the above considered, we rank these 4.5 out of 5 stars for their IPF approval, excellent build quality and durability, and various length and stiffness options available.

Best Wrist Wraps for Weightlifting: DMOOSE Wrist Wraps

DMoose Fitness Wrist Wraps
4.0
  • Material: Cotton-elastic blend
  • Length: 12 or 18 inches
  • Closure type: Velcro
  • IPF-approved: No
Check Price

Pros

  • Quality construction for Oly lifting
  • Flexible material allows for wrist mobility 
  • Two lengths available
  • 30-day money-back guarantee
  • 12 color options

Cons

  • 12 inches is too short for average wrists
  • Not approved for weightlifting federations

Despite their affordable price, the DMOOSE Wrist wraps have a solid quality construction. The thumb loop features double stitching, so it will stand up to the rigorous Olympic lifts you’ll be performing with them. I found the Velcro fastening strip to be of good quality, so it won’t wear down within a couple of months as the poor-quality wrist wraps do.

These wrist wraps from DMOOSE are the best for weightlifting because, unlike other wrist wraps featured in this article, these have no polyester included. When woven with elastic, cotton is more flexible compared to polyester, and this pays off big time for the Olympic lifts

This lack of restriction allows you enough wrist mobility for your wrists to rotate freely in the snatch and to extend fully in the front rack portion of the clean and jerk. Despite its flexibility, the cotton-elastic blend still gives noticeable wrist support when the bar is extended overhead in the final step of both exercises.

I appreciate that these wrist wraps are offered in a 12-inch and an 18-inch option. The latter will fit and work well for average-sized wrists, but the former is still useful. Even though they’ll outgrow them, 12-inch long wrist wraps would be the ideal length for most teenagers because their bones are still growing, and the wrist wrap length they need is significantly smaller than that of the average adult. 

However, you might also find the 12-inch length useful if you are petite and/or have extremely small wrists – make sure to use the sizing chart before ordering a 12-inch size just to be sure it’s the right fit.

Although the 12-inch length is an option, I wouldn’t recommend it if you have average-sized wrists. 12 inches won’t give you enough length on the wraps to get an adequate number of revolutions for the wraps to provide significant support.

Sadly, it doesn’t look like these wrist wraps are approved for any weightlifting federations. This means that if you want to wear wrist wraps in a future weightlifting competition, you’ll have to invest in a separate pair to use them in both your training and your competitions.

All the above considered, we rank these 4 out of 5 stars for their Olympic lifting-friendly design, two length options, and comfortable material.

Best Wrist Wraps for CrossFit: 2POOD Wrist Wraps

2POOD Wrist Wraps
4.0
  • Material: Cotton-elastic-polyester blend
  • Length: 12 inches
  • Closure type: Velcro
  • IPF-approved: No
Check Price

Pros

  • Lightweight and supportive for long CrossFit workouts
  • Hook and loop closure is secure, easy-adjusting
  • Official wrist wraps of the NOBULL CrossFit Games

Cons

  • Some reports of poor Velcro
  • Not IPF-approved

These are the best wrist wraps for CrossFit due to their lightweight, supportive design. Out of all the wrist wraps in this round-up article, this pair of 12-inch wraps is the shortest we’ve featured, but that’s good for CrossFit. 

The typical WOD can be up to 30 minutes of continuous movement, so the last thing you want to do is constantly tighten, loosen, and otherwise fiddle with your 18 to 24-inch wrist wraps. Thanks to their 12-inch length, you can’t apply the 2POODs super tight in the first place, so they’ll stay comfortable and non-constricting during the entire workout. 

Plus, the secure hook and loop closure means these wrist wraps won’t randomly fly off during your WOD, whether you’re crushing some dumbbell power snatches or butterfly pull-ups. One of our product testers explained that they could see these being an asset because you can set and forget them. 

Their cotton-polyester-elastic material is great for exercises like thrusters, where some extra wrist support can be helpful, but they won’t hamper the wrist mobility needed for handstand walks. Further, the Velcro part of the fastening system is easy to apply and adjust, so using these for the first time is a piece of cake even for beginners.

Sponsorships aren’t always an indicator of quality, but it’s hard to deny the influence that the 2POOD wrist wraps have on the CrossFit community. After all, these wrist wraps became the official wrist wraps of the NOBULL CrossFit Games. This means that they got a large amount of publicity from the athletes, who presumably ended up wearing them during the events, and the fans who attended in person or those who watched online.

Surprisingly, some customers have left reviews about how the Velcro isn’t quite what they had hoped for. Instead of the Velcro strip being higher quality and sticky, several customers mention that it didn’t last more than a month on their wrist wraps before it began deteriorating and losing its adhesiveness. For example, one customer left a note saying that the wrist wraps perform great, but they’ve been experiencing Velcro issues with one of them, so it’s not gripping as it should and is leaving them slightly disappointed.

Finally, the 2POOD wrist wraps aren’t IPF-approved, but I don’t think that matters much. Unlike the SBD wrist wraps, these aren’t designed to help you excel at powerlifting — they were made to assist your CrossFit performance.

All the above considered, we rank these 4 out of 5 stars for their lightweight support, security, and easy-adjustability tension system.

Best Wrist Wraps for Benching: Gymreapers Wrist Wraps

Gymreapers Wrist Wraps
4.0
  • Material: 30% Elastic and 70% Polyester blend 
  • Length: 18 inches
  • Closure type: Velcro
  • IPF-approved: Yes
Check Price

Pros

  • Durable materials and construction
  • IPF, IPL, and USAPL-approved
  • Lifetime replacement guarantee
  • Nine color options

Cons

  • Not supportive enough for serious benchers
  • Stiffer materials are less comfortable

The Classic Wrist Wraps from Gymreapers are excellent for benching. They feature a heavy-duty thumb loop, so you can use your thumb to anchor the wrap down before cinching it tight. I especially appreciate the 30/70 elastic-polyester blend; this is stiffer than a cotton-elastic blend. The former is what you want when trying to bench press as much weight as possible because the more rigid polyester material will provide more stiffness. 

One customer said that these wraps have a lot of elasticity, which helps provide better support on heavy pushing movements because they’ll offer better support due to the amount of stretchiness in the material. Also, the three-inch width is generous and offers plenty of hand & wrist coverage for maximal support. 

Gymreapers has made a serious push to get their support wear certified by well-known federations, and it shows. Their wrist wraps are IPF, IPL, and USAPL-approved, which means that if you’re competing in any of these federations, you can practice with the same gear in your training as you’ll compete with on the platform for a competitive edge.

I’m blown away by their warranty, which offers a lifetime replacement — this is practically unheard of for wear-and-tear items. The benefit is that whether they fail due to a factory defect or regular old wear and tear, you have total peace of mind about getting a replacement for free. 

One commenter explained that even when they had a small issue with one of their wrist wraps, Gymreapers just sent another set. So, if you want complete peace of mind, I think these are worth it. Another reviewer mentioned that they used them all the way up to a 385-pound bench press, and they did the job. If they can hold up to a near-400-pound bench press, they can hold up to almost anything.

It’s great that they’re approved in multiple federations, but seriously strong bench pressers might not find the Gymreapers wrist wraps supportive enough. Due to their 18-inch length, these will only wrap around average-sized wrists twice instead of the three revolutions you’ll get with a 24-inch wrist wrap. Because you get one less revolution, these wraps will feel less supportive. On an elite bench press attempt, that lack of stability is not something you’ll typically want.

Compared to cotton wrist wraps, the elastic-polyester blend of the Classics is noticeably less comfortable. If you have sensitive skin or you bruise easily, you might not enjoy using these as much as you would a cotton-elastic wrist wrap like the DMOOSE Wrist Wraps.

All the above considered, we rank these 4 out of 5 stars for their durable materials and construction, their approval for the IPF, IPL, and USAPL federations, and their lifetime replacement guarantee.

Best Premium Wrist Wraps: SBD Wrist Wraps

SBD Wrist Wraps
4.5
  • Material: 70% polyester/30% rubber (flexible), 56% rubber/44% polyester (stiff)
  • Length: 15.7 inches (S), 23.6 inches (M), or 39.4 inches (L)
  • Closure type: Velcro
  • IPF-approved: Yes
Check Price

Pros

  • Excellent quality and size options
  • Manufactured in Great Britain
  • SBD brand is world-renowned in strength sports
  • IPF-approved

Cons

  • Shipping fees aren’t waived
  • Wrist wraps are in metric sizing

This is the second time we’ve featured the SBD Wrist Wraps in this article. Compared to the Best Wrist Wraps for Powerlifting section, we’ve included why they’re also our top choice for premium wrist wraps below.

First, the build quality of the SBD Wrist Wraps is excellent. From the extra-thick thumb loop with commercial-grade stitching to their proprietary wide elastics, these wrist wraps live up to the hype. That’s why we’ve named them twice on this list—their quality makes them worth the premium price point.

I’m impressed that they took note of the maximum allowable width from the IPF rules on wrist wrap dimensions and matched it. The 3.15-inch width means that your hands and wrists will get the most robust support on the market. But the story is far from over; SBD offers their wraps in three sizes (small, medium, and large) to fit as many lifters as possible while even catering to their wrap stiffness preferences. 

Yes, that’s right — they offer two stiffnesses to their wraps: “flexible” to allow more wrist movement and “stiff” to immobilize your wrist completely. With this quality and range of choice, it’s clear that they’re the premium wrist wrap option.

Many brands source their products from developing countries because it’s cheaper. Unfortunately, these savings often come at the expense of worse workers’ rights and unsafe manufacturing processes. The SBDs are designed and manufactured in Great Britain, so you’re supporting local manufacturing and jobs, which adds to the list of reasons these are the best premium wrist wraps.

Regarding support wear, SBD is the cream of the crop. Even though “SBD” means “Squat, Bench, Deadlift”, which refers to the power lifts themselves, the quality and workmanship that backs this brand could be why many of the top athletes in powerlifting, Olympic weightlifting, and Strongman/Strongwoman decide to sport this gear. 

With that in mind, it’s hard to go wrong with these wrist wraps when the SBD brand is trusted by many athletes at the top of their sport. Oh, and being approved by the most stringent powerlifting federation in the world (the IPF) is a nice touch, too.

For how well-made these are, I’m amazed at their affordability. The SBDs retail at just $42.50 and they have everything you expect in a premium wrist wrap: a sturdy yet flexible material with a secure closure system — all of which is manufactured in Great Britain. Coupled with their IPF approval, two stiffness options, and three lengths, they’re the ultimate choice for anyone who wants the best wrist wraps on the market.

Unfortunately, shipping fees are not waived. I wasn’t expecting the shipping to be free, but considering the premium price and small packaging compared to larger home gym equipment items, shipping could disappoint some shoppers. Full disclosure: I did a mock checkout with these wraps, and the 3-6 business day option with USPS was only $5.00 — nothing to get worked up about.

Lastly, these wrist wraps from SBD are all in metric sizes only. For instance, the lengths are 40, 60, and 100 centimeters for the small, medium, and large wraps — respectively. This may seem trivial, but as the premium wrist wrap option in this article, it would be great to see imperial sizes offered as well for American shoppers.

All the above considered, we rank these 4.5 out of 5 stars for their excellent quality, sizing, and stiffness options, local manufacturing, and brand trust.

Best Stiff Wrist Wraps: Gymreapers Stiff Wrist Wraps

Gymreapers Stiff Wrist Wraps
4.0
  • Material: Stiff cotton with reinforced elastic
  • Length: 12, 18, 24, or 36 inches
  • Closure type: Velcro
  • IPF-approved: Yes
Check Price

Pros

  • Stiff, heavy-duty construction
  • Multiple length options
  • Lifetime replacement guarantee
  • Three color choices

Cons

  • Can be uncomfortable
  • Not IPF-approved
  • Higher priced at $42

These wrist wraps from Gymreapers are your ticket if you want a stiff level of wrist support. First, they’re made from more rigid cotton that’s less flexible than the Iron Bull Strength Classic Wrist Wraps. There’s also a reinforced elastic material woven into the cotton that strengthens the main body of the wraps. The end features a longer, flexible area with the Gymreapers logo in silicone so that maximal compression can be applied to your wrist. Even the thumb loop is thicker and has more durable stitching to avoid tears and maximize durability. 

I’m glad there are multiple length options offered for these wrist wraps. Four sizes are available: 12-inch, 18-inch, 24-inch, and 36-inch. This means that whether you have a petite wrist, an average-sized wrist, or a larger wrist thickness, you can find an ideal fit for your wrist wraps. 

However, the extra-long 36-inch wrap also allows regular lifters to size up if they want. Doing so would let you get one or two additional revolutions around your wrists with the wraps, making them even tighter and maximizing their stiffness.

Similar to the Gymreapers Classics, the stiff wraps are backed by an impressive warranty — the lifetime replacement guarantee. This warranty stipulates that you can get a free replacement for your wrist wraps throughout their life. Defect issues are also covered at no cost.

The major downside to these wraps is that they’re simply not as comfortable as standard cotton wrist wraps because of the specific cotton and reinforced elastic materials. Discomfort is just the beginning, though. In the worst-case scenario, an over-zealous wrapping job could cause bruising or minor cuts in your skin.

Honestly, I’m shocked that these aren’t IPF-approved. The Classics from Gymreapers are certified for competition use in the IPF and have less robust specs than these, so I thought for sure the same would go for their stiff wrist wraps. Their compression and material would be ideal for competitive powerlifting, warranting a submission to the IPF-approved gear application process… maybe next year?

Lastly, these wrist wraps aren’t the most affordable. They retail closely to the other most expensive pair of wrist wraps in this list, around $30 at the time of writing, but you do appear to be able to save 10 percent on your order by entering your email address into the pop-up window on their website.

All the above considered; we rank these 4 out of 5 stars for their stiff, heavy-duty construction, four length options, and lifetime replacement guarantee.

Best Budget Wrist Wraps: Harbinger Red Line Wrist Wraps

Harbinger Red Line Wrist Wraps
3.5
  • Material: Not listed
  • Length: 18 inches
  • Closure type: Velcro
  • IPF-approved: No
Check Price

Pros

  • Highly affordable support wear
  • Amazon Prime perks and customer approval
  • Solid wrist wrap features
  • Five colors

Cons

  • Construction material not listed
  • Not IPF-approved

These Harbinger wrist wraps are the best budget option I found. It should come as no surprise that they’re widely affordable, roughly $16 at the time of publishing. Compared to the most expensive pair of wrist wraps on our list, the SBD Wrist Wraps, these budget-friendly ones cost you about a third of their price — before shipping fees. 

Speaking of shipping fees, these wrist wraps are sold on Amazon, which means that if you’re a Prime member, you can save even more! Two-day (or faster shipping) is often available to Prime members while shopping through Amazon, giving you access to their generous and convenient return policies.

For how well-priced these are, I’m pleasantly surprised with the features they have. They have what appears to be a decent-quality thumb loop, a durable elastic body, Velcro that looks like it will work for at least a few months, and an 18-inch length that will be suitable for most weight-lifting activities.

What caught my eye on the product page was the amount of praise these wrist wraps have received from customers. Harbinger is a well-known brand that’s been in business for years, but it’s comforting to know that most customers are happy with the quality of these wrist wraps. For example, they achieved a 4.7 out of 5 stars on Amazon with over 4,400 reviews. 

One Breaking Muscle staff member also saw a special notice when viewing the page that said, “Customers usually keep this item” and explained that compared to similar products, the Harbinger wrist wraps had fewer returns than average. Perhaps that’s a testament to their excellent quality.

Unfortunately, I had no luck finding their construction material on the product listing. While I wouldn’t be surprised if these were made with an extra-cheap material to cut costs even further to generate a profit, they look like a cotton-elastic blend like many wrist wraps in this list. I think it’s pretty far-fetched to expect these to be IPF-approved, considering their budget-friendly price, so don’t expect to step on a competition platform with them any time soon.

All the above considered, we rank these 3.5 out of 5 stars for their budget-friendly price, inclusion of useful wrist wrap features, and availability of Amazon perks for Prime members.

Benefits of Using Wrist Wraps for Lifting

Wrist Stability and Support

The main benefit of using wrist wraps is stability. When worn correctly around the base of your hand and wrist, the stiffness and compression from the wrist wrap material prevent your wrist from moving — similar to how a cast immobilizes an injured limb. This effect is most noticeable in free-weight pressing exercises like the barbell bench press or barbell overhead press, where they limit wrist flexion and extension even when the weight is heavy.

However, wrist wraps will continue to support your wrists even if they flex or extend under load. For example, some lifters use wrist wraps to keep the wrists extended on their low-bar back squat, holding the barbell in the correct spot across their rear delts. Despite being bent backward with hundreds of pounds pushing down on them, powerlifters continue to set world records with extended wrists while squatting — and their wraps continue to keep their wrists safe even under these extreme loads.

Additional Support After Injury

Injuries to the hand, wrist, or forearm can sometimes prevent you from holding a barbell or dumbbell correctly, even after you’ve healed. In extreme cases, even a slight deviation from a neutral wrist position under heavy weight could cause severe pain and/or further injury. In these situations, wrist wraps may provide enough wrist stability, compression, and support for you to continue to exercise. Always consult your medical doctor to ensure you can train safely after an injury.

After breaking their wrist years ago, one of our Breaking Muscle staff members finds it still bothers them when they perform the barbell overhead press, even though it’s technically healed. Using wrist wraps on their heavier sets allows them to push the movement hard without wrist pain. 

Weight May Feel Lighter in Your Hands

The weight of a barbell in your hands can feel lighter or heavier depending on how tight you grip it. This is because of proprioception, which is how your body senses itself and the world around it. Proprioception is triggered by receptors in your skin, muscles, tendons, and joints that send signals to your brain. The more you squeeze the barbell, the more signals you send, and the more aware you are of the weight and body position. 

When applied tightly, the compression on your forearm muscles from wrist wraps can make your fingers curl inward, making your grip stronger than usual. This is why some elite deadlifters use wrist wraps when they deadlift. They make you feel more confident and strong — so wrist wraps can provide a psychological benefit that might encourage you to lift heavier or push for more reps than you would without them.

When Should You Use Wrist Wraps?

Generally, you’ll want to wear wrist wraps on exercises where force pushes down into your wrist joint — the most common examples are below.

Pressing exercises

Bench presses and overhead presses are the most popular lifts to use wrist wraps for. During these exercises, maintaining a neutral wrist position is helpful to transfer force more efficiently into the implement you’re lifting. Wrist wraps are often used with the free-weight variations of these pressing exercises, but they can still provide noticeable benefits when used on their machine variations, too.

Back squats

Surprisingly, wrist wraps can also be an asset on back squats — particularly low-bar back squats. Since the low-bar position requires the barbell to be placed lower on your back across your rear delts, this style sometimes forces lifters to hold their wrists in extension to keep the bar in place. Unfortunately, this position can be painful with hundreds of pounds pushing downward — wrist wraps can help absorb the load and make the position painless.

Olympic lifts 

You should also consider wearing wrist wraps on Olympic lifts like snatches and clean & jerks. Although the first part of each lift is a pull from the floor, both movements finish overhead in a position that will put downward pressure on your wrists. The issue is that both exercises, especially the clean and jerk, require a significant amount of wrist mobility during the initial parts of the movement. For this reason, consider using a shorter wrist wrap and/or experiment with the tightness and technique of how you put them on.

Deadlifts

As mentioned previously, some elite deadlifters use wrist wraps when they deadlift. This is because the compression on your finger-flexing muscles can cause your hand to close, which can trick you into thinking you have a stronger grip. The key is to make a fist and wrap the wrist wraps as tightly as you can.

Most of the time, you’ll find lifting straps more helpful on deadlifts than wrist wraps. However, they might be worth practicing with and using if your federation allows them to be used in competition — because wrist straps almost certainly won’t be permitted. 

What to Consider When Buying Wrist Wraps

Materials and Construction

Wrist wraps are usually made of a thumb loop on one end, an elastic body, and a Velcro closure system on the other end. The thumb loop helps to secure the wrap around your wrist, while the elastic body provides support and stability for your wrist joint. The Velcro closure system allows you to adjust the tightness and fit of the wrap according to your preference and comfort.

There are different types of materials used for wrist wraps, such as a cotton-elastic blend or a tri-blend of elastic, polyester, and cotton. Cotton and elastic wraps are softer and more breathable, but they may stretch over time and lose their elasticity. Elastic, polyester, and cotton blends are more durable and resistant to stretching, but they may be less comfortable and more prone to causing skin irritation.

Another important factor to consider is the construction of the wrist wraps, especially the seams. Since wrist wraps are subjected to a lot of pulling and tension during use, they should have strong and sturdy seams that can withstand the stress. Double-stitched seams are recommended at a minimum, especially for the thumb loop, the anchor point that gets the most tension when you put on the wrist wraps. You should also check the quality of the Velcro and make sure it is not too rough or too weak.

Similar to knee sleeves, there’s a significant amount of pulling and tension involved in using wrist wraps. They should have double-stitched seams at a minimum, especially for the thumb loop, because that’s the anchor point that gets the most tension when the wrist wraps are being put on.

Length

The length of wrist wraps can range from 12 inches up to 36 inches long. Here are the most common lengths.

  • Twelve inches is a good length for teenagers due to their still-developing bones and for adults with extremely small wrists. Additionally, 12-inch lengths are suitable for CrossFit because they provide lightweight support without compromising the high degree of wrist mobility needed in the sport.
  • Eighteen inches can be great for those with smaller wrists and Olympic weightlifting; because of the shorter length, they won’t wrap around your wrists as many times, which can give you more mobility in your snatches and cleans while still giving some support for your jerks.
  • Twenty-four inches is the sweet spot for most people because this length allows for about three wraps around the average person’s wrist, which is just right for providing a noticeable level of support.
  • Thirty-six inches is starting to get excessively long. Ordinary people will find these wrap around your wrists a lot, which can add too much bulk to your wrist area. That said, some folks with large wrists may find that the 36-inch length gives enough revolutions to provide adequate support. Also, experienced powerlifters can sometimes prefer four to six wraps around their wrists than the standard two to three that 20-inch wraps will offer.

Stiffness

One of the main factors to consider when buying wrist wraps is stiffness, which depends on two things: the material and the length. 

Wrist wraps with a blend of cotton, elastic, and polyester will provide more tension than those only made from cotton and elastic. This means they will support your wrists better and prevent injuries, but they will also limit your range of motion and flexibility. 

Longer wraps also allow you to perform more wraps around your wrist, increasing stiffness and stability. However, too many wraps can cut off blood circulation and cause discomfort. Therefore, you should choose the stiffness level that suits your goals and preferences.

Type of Training

Different types of training will require different types of wrist wraps. Depending on your goals and preferences, choose wrist wraps that suit your specific needs. Here are some common types and the corresponding wrist wraps that may work best for them:

  • General fitness: If you’re doing general fitness exercises, such as push-ups, dumbbell presses, or kettlebell swings, you won’t need heavy or stiff wrist wraps. You can opt for lighter and more flexible wrist wraps that provide enough support that you’d find in a 12-inch length.
  • Powerlifting: If you’re doing powerlifting exercises, such as the back squat and bench press, you’ll need more rigid and supportive wrist wraps to handle heavy loads and prevent wrist injuries. You should opt for thicker and stiffer wrist wraps with more elasticity and less give. 24-inch is a great length or 36-inches for advanced powerlifters.
  • Olympic lifting: If you’re doing Olympic lifting exercises, such as snatch, clean, or jerk, you’ll need more flexible and dynamic wrist wraps that can allow you to move your wrists freely and quickly. Opt for thinner and softer wrist wraps made from a cotton-elastic blend and are no longer than 18 inches.
  • CrossFit: If you’re doing CrossFit exercises, such as thrusters, burpees, and pull-ups, you’ll need shorter and less compressive wrist wraps that can handle different movements and extended workout periods. You should opt for lightweight wrist wraps that are made from cotton and are between 12 to 18 inches long.
  • Strongman/Strongwoman: If you’re doing strongman/strongwoman exercises, such as atlas stones, farmer’s walk, or log press, you’ll need durable and resilient wrist wraps that can withstand extreme pressure and abrasion. Choose stiff wrist wraps made from a tri-blend for high elasticity and low give — the 24 to 36-inch length is ideal for this sport.

Competition Approval

If you plan to compete in powerlifting meets, you may need to check if the governing bodies approve your wrist wraps for those sports. Different federations may have different rules and regulations regarding the specifications and usage of wrist wraps.

For example, the IPF (International Powerlifting Federation) is the world’s leading powerlifting federation that organizes international events like the World Powerlifting Championships. The IPF has strict rules on the size, material, design, and brand of wrist wraps that can be used in competitions. The maximum length of wrist wraps is one meter (39 inches), and the maximum width is eight centimeters (three inches). The IPF also has a list of approved brands that can be used in its competitions.

You should always check with the competition organizers before using wrist wraps to ensure they comply with their rules.

Final Thoughts

Wrist wraps are a valuable accessory for anyone who wants to improve their performance and protect their wrists from injury. They come in different sizes, colors, styles, and stiffness levels. When buying wrist wraps, you should consider the material and the length of the wrap, as they affect the tension and support the wrap provides.

Best Wrist Wraps: Side-by-Side Comparison

Best Wrist Wraps Overall
Best Wrist Wraps for Powerlifting
Best Wrist Wraps for Weightlifting
Best Wrist Wraps for CrossFit
Best Wrist Wraps for Benching
Best Stiff
Wrist Wraps
Best Budget Wrist Wraps
Description:
  • Material: Cotton-elastic blend
  • Length: 18 inches
  • Closure type: Velcro
  • IPF-approved: No
Description:
  • Material: 70% polyester/30% rubber (flexible), 56% rubber/44% polyester (stiff)
  • Length: 15.7 inches (S), 23.6 inches (M), or 39.4 inches (L)
  • Closure type: Velcro
  • IPF-approved: Yes
Description:
  • Material: Cotton-elastic blend
  • Length: 12 or 18 inches
  • Closure type: Velcro
  • IPF-approved: No
Description:
  • Material: Cotton-elastic-polyester blend
  • Length: 12 inches
  • Closure type: Velcro
  • IPF-approved: No
Description:
  • Material: 30% Elastic and 70% Polyester blend 
  • Length: 18 inches
  • Closure type: Velcro
  • IPF-approved: Yes
Description:
  • Material: Stiff cotton with reinforced elastic
  • Length: 12, 18, 24, or 36 inches
  • Closure type: Velcro
  • IPF-approved: Yes
Description:
  • Material: Not listed
  • Length: 18 inches
  • Closure type: Velcro
  • IPF-approved: No
Best Wrist Wraps Overall
Description:
  • Material: Cotton-elastic blend
  • Length: 18 inches
  • Closure type: Velcro
  • IPF-approved: No
Best Wrist Wraps for Powerlifting
Description:
  • Material: 70% polyester/30% rubber (flexible), 56% rubber/44% polyester (stiff)
  • Length: 15.7 inches (S), 23.6 inches (M), or 39.4 inches (L)
  • Closure type: Velcro
  • IPF-approved: Yes
Best Wrist Wraps for Weightlifting
Description:
  • Material: Cotton-elastic blend
  • Length: 12 or 18 inches
  • Closure type: Velcro
  • IPF-approved: No
Best Wrist Wraps for CrossFit
Description:
  • Material: Cotton-elastic-polyester blend
  • Length: 12 inches
  • Closure type: Velcro
  • IPF-approved: No
Best Wrist Wraps for Benching
Description:
  • Material: 30% Elastic and 70% Polyester blend 
  • Length: 18 inches
  • Closure type: Velcro
  • IPF-approved: Yes
Best Stiff
Wrist Wraps
Description:
  • Material: Stiff cotton with reinforced elastic
  • Length: 12, 18, 24, or 36 inches
  • Closure type: Velcro
  • IPF-approved: Yes
Best Budget Wrist Wraps
Description:
  • Material: Not listed
  • Length: 18 inches
  • Closure type: Velcro
  • IPF-approved: No

FAQs

What is the best brand of wrist wraps?

The best brand of wrist wraps is Iron Bull Strength because their Classic Wrist Wraps have great wrist support, feature an easy-to-use Velcro closure system, and are functional for different training types. 

Who makes the best wrist wraps for powerlifting?

SBD makes the best wrist wraps for powerlifting due to their IPF approval, excellent build quality and durability, and various length and stiffness options.

What kind of wrist wraps should I get?

Most people should get wrist wraps that are 18 to 24 inches long. If you have smaller wrists or use them for Olympic weightlifting, get a 12 to 18-inch length. If you have large wrists, are an experienced powerlifter, or like Strongman/Strongwoman training, consider a 36-inch length instead.

How long should I wear my wrist wraps?

You should only wear wrist wraps for the time it takes to complete your set. To properly support your wrist, they need to be uncomfortably tight and must be removed or loosened after your set. 

What are the best wrist wraps for CrossFit?

The best wrist wraps for CrossFit are the 2POOD Velcro Wrist Wraps because of their lightweight support, secure and easy-adjusting tension system, and being the official wrist wraps of the NOBULL CrossFit Games.

The post Best Wrist Wraps for Powerlifting, CrossFit, Bench Pressing, and More (2024) appeared first on Breaking Muscle.

]]>
Best Lifting Straps for Powerlifting, Olympic Weightlifting, and More (2024) https://breakingmuscle.com/best-lifting-straps/ Wed, 15 Nov 2023 14:32:47 +0000 https://breakingmuscle.com/?p=201042 From protecting your hands to lifting heavier weights, the solution to finding the best lifting straps is to just randomly pick a pair and get back to your workout, right?  Wrong. Straps are way more complicated than they appear. From weight capacity to color and material, each of the five different styles has its own best use cases....

The post Best Lifting Straps for Powerlifting, Olympic Weightlifting, and More (2024) appeared first on Breaking Muscle.

]]>
From protecting your hands to lifting heavier weights, the solution to finding the best lifting straps is to just randomly pick a pair and get back to your workout, right? 

Wrong.

Straps are way more complicated than they appear. From weight capacity to color and material, each of the five different styles has its own best use cases. We’re here to help you decide which ones will suit you best.

How We Chose the Best Lifting Straps

The Breaking Muscle team features a roster of powerlifters, Olympic weightlifters, CrossFitters, strength and conditioning coaches, and certified personal trainers. Across the board, we’ve tested over a dozen lifting straps from various brands and evaluated their durability, grippiness, and how connected we felt to the bar when lifting. Down below, you’ll find our top choices to help you figure out which straps are the best fit for you and your training style.

Our Top Picks for the Best Lifting Straps

Best Lifting Straps Overall: Iron Bull Strength Unleash Lifting Straps

Iron Bull Strength Unleash Lifting Straps
4.5
  • Material: Nylon
  • Style: Traditional
  • Length: 24 inches
  • Padding: 5mm neoprene
Check Price

Pros

  • Heavy-duty nylon construction
  • Adjustable to any wrist size
  • Soft neoprene padding for wrists
  • Three colors available: black, green, and red

Cons

  • Less comfortable and absorbent than cotton
  • Using traditional straps takes practice

The Iron Bull Strength Unleash Lifting Straps are our top pick overall. They’re made from high-quality nylon, a durable and resilient material that doesn’t stretch or tear easily. This means they can withstand heavy loads and intense workouts. And unlike cotton or leather straps, nylon straps don’t tend to fray or rot over time. These straps will last you for years of lifting without losing their shape or strength.

Thanks to their traditional “lasso” design, you can tighten or loosen them as you wish, depending on the thickness of your wrists and the diameter of the bar. This ensures a secure and comfortable grip on the bar, preventing any slippage or movement. 

The Unleash Lifting Straps have soft and thick neoprene padding that cushions your wrists and prevents any abrasion or irritation. Neoprene is a synthetic rubber, the same material in almost all the best knee sleeves, that is flexible and supportive. It provides a smooth and soft surface for your wrists, reducing some of the pressure while distributing the weight more evenly. 

Unfortunately, the Unleash straps are less comfortable than cotton straps, especially in hot and humid conditions. They’re made from nylon, a synthetic material that doesn’t breathe well, which traps heat and moisture. They also have poor absorption, which can cause a layer of sweat to build up on your wrists and affect the placement of your straps and comfort. Sweat can cause bacteria and odor to build up on your straps, which can be unpleasant and unhygienic. You’ll need to wash your nylon straps regularly to keep them clean and fresh.

These straps are traditional (lasso) lifting straps, so you loop them around your wrists and then wrap them around the bar several times to create a tight and secure connection. However, this process requires some skill and practice. At first, it will be awkward and time-consuming, but after a while, you should get the hang of it. 

RELATED: Weight Lifting Straps: What They Are, When and Why to Use Them

Best Figure 8 Lifting Straps: DMOOSE Figure 8 Lifting Straps

DMoose Figure 8 Lifting Straps
4.2
  • Material: Cotton
  • Style: Figure 8
  • Length: Length isn’t listed, but they are 6 to 7.5 inches wide
  • Padding: None
Check Price

Pros

  • Easy-on and easy-off the bar
  • Comfortable cotton material
  • Three sizes available: S, M, and L
  • Five colors available: black, red-black, navy blue, green, American (red-blue)

Cons

  • No padding for wrists
  • Using Figure 8’s can feel unnatural
  • Require correct size to function correctly

The main advantage of Figure 8 straps is that they’re easy to use. Simply loop one end around your wrist, bring your hand close to the bar, and feed your hand through the other loop. Bring your hands inwards to grab the bar for the straps to become tight, creating a secure grip that won’t slip or loosen during lifts. To remove them, just reverse the process and slide them off your wrists — no need to fumble with long straps again!

The DMOOSE Figure 8 Lifting Straps are made of high-quality cotton that’s soft and durable. Cotton is breathable and doesn’t irritate your skin or cause excessive sweating, so you’ll have a better grip whether you’re lifting a barbell, kettlebell, or axle bar. 

They’re also machine-washable, so you can keep them clean and fresh. The DMOOSE Figure 8 Lifting Straps offer three sizes (small, medium, or large) to suit your wrist and hand size. The size chart on their website is clear and will help you find the right fit.

The DMOOSE Figure 8 Lifting Straps don’t have any padding or cushioning for your wrists. This means they might dig into your skin and cause discomfort or bruising, especially if you lift heavy weights or use them for high-rep sets. I’ve even seen some elite-level lifters end up with small skin tears because they’re deadlifting massive weights. If you have sensitive wrists or prefer more comfort, you may want to look for straps with wrist padding, like the Element 26’s.

Remember how they’re easy to use? Well, that’s after you learn how to use them. Most beginners find figure 8 straps awkward to use at first due to incorrect use. Even when used properly, they can still feel unnatural as the load is held outside your hands instead of in line with them. As a result, you may need some time to get used to them, especially if you’re accustomed to traditional straps. 

Finally, figure 8 straps aren’t a one-size-fits-all. They require the correct size to function correctly, so you won’t get the optimal grip and support from the straps if you choose a size that is too big or too small. Make sure to measure your wrist and hand size carefully and follow the size chart on their website before buying.

Best Lifting Straps for Deadlifts: Jerkfit Death Grips

Jerkfit Death Grips
4.3
  • Material: PVC rubber
  • Style: Grips
  • Length: Not listed
  • Padding: Neoprene
Check Price

Pros

  • Fast to apply and remove
  • Offers a strong grip
  • Durable PVC rubber material
  • Three sizes available: S, M, and L

Cons

  • Thickness can take getting used to
  • Higher risk of loose threads
  • More expensive

Our Breaking Muscle product tester found the Jerkfit Death Grips fast and easy to use. Unlike other straps that require you to wrap them around the bar multiple times, the Death Grips attach to your wrist with a velcro strap, and then you wrap the rubber flap around the bar — trapping the bar between the grips and your palms. When used on deadlifts, they avoid the hassle of fiddling with a longer strap during your setup. They also save time, especially when used for deadlifts in timed workouts like those seen in CrossFit.

When they tried them in a workout, our team member was impressed by the grip. They felt connected to the bar during their deadlifts and pulled heavy weights that they would have felt slipping without them. When used on pull-ups and dumbbell exercises, they found the grips held up well without slipping. This is due to their unique PVC rubber construction and neoprene padding. During the entire test, their comfort surprised our product tester, and they loved how intuitive they were to use.

One of the drawbacks of the Jerkfit Death Grips is that they can take some time to get used to, especially if you’re not familiar with using lifting straps. The Death Grips are a little bulky because of the neoprene pad, so they can initially feel awkward. Compared to traditional lifting straps, the pad size is larger with more stitching, resulting in a higher risk of loose threads than other straps. You may need to trim or burn off any loose threads that you notice on your straps to prevent them from getting worse.

The other downside of the Jerkfit Death Grips is the cost. At the time of writing, the Death Grips cost $39.95 per pair. This price is more than double that of other quality straps in this article, like the DMOOSE budget-friendly straps. While the Death Grips offer a lot of value and quality for their price, they may not be affordable or worth it for everyone.

RELATED: Best CrossFit Shoes for Flat Feet, Wide Feet, and More (2023)

Best Lifting Straps With Hooks: DMOOSE Weightlifting Hooks

DMoose Weight Lifting Hooks
3.8
  • Material: Rubber-coated stainless steel hooks, nylon strap
  • Style: Hooks
  • Length: 3.7 inches
  • Padding: 8mm neoprene
Check Price

Pros

  • Extremely easy and quick to use
  • Hooks fit barbells, pull-up bars, cable machines and more
  • Wide and deep hooks for secure lifting
  • Thick padding for wrist comfort
  • Six colors available: black, red, blue, green, pink, grey
  • About $30

Cons

  • 600-pound weight limit
  • Thick wrist padding might cause sweating
  • Fixed hook won’t fit all hand sizes

Unlike other lifting straps that require you to wrap them around the bar multiple times, these hooks are nearly effortless to apply. Put them on your wrists, tighten the velcro strap, hook them onto the bar, and voilà! 

Straps this easy to use saves you time and avoids the hassle of resetting your straps, especially when switching between different exercises or weights. For ease and speed, I find hooks are better than any other strap type while not interfering much with your grip or wrist mobility.

These hooks are versatile and can be used for various types of implements. They’re suitable for barbell lifts such as deadlifts, shrugs, or rows, as well as using them on pull-up bars. They play nice with cable machine attachments, and one customer even mentioned they use them on their rowing machine handles to combat grip fatigue. 

RELATED: Best Rowing Machines for Beginners, Small Spaces, Seniors, and More

I’m pleasantly surprised by their construction. The actual hooks of the Weightlifting Hooks are made from reinforced stainless steel with a non-slip rubberized coating. This means they should have no problem handling weights up to the listed capacity. 

They’re 3.3 inches wide and have a deep curve that ensures a stable and secure grip on the bar. Unlike narrow or shallow hooks, the DMOOSEs will prevent the bar from tipping or slipping out of your hands, which could cause injuries or, at the very least, compromise your form.

These hooks have a maximum weight capacity of 600 pounds, which might be a limitation for some advanced lifters who want to lift heavier weights. If you exceed this limit, you risk damaging the hooks or injuring yourself — consider the best lifting straps for powerlifting from Iron Bull Strength instead.

The Weightlifting Hooks might cause your wrists to sweat more than usual, especially in hot or humid conditions. The thick neoprene padding is extra-wide to cover your wrist area and the lower part of your palm, but this results in a large non-breathable area of skin. Further, the velcro strap must be cinched extra tight to avoid getting pulled off from heavy weights resting in the hooks. While it’s unlikely that either of these will cause a structural issue with the hooks, the excessive sweat can make them uncomfortable or unhygienic unless you wash them often.

Unfortunately, the hooks are fixed in place and don’t have any adjustment options. This means that they might only fit average hand sizes correctly. For those with extra small or large hands, the hooks might be too close to your fingertips or wrists, respectively. In turn, this can negatively affect your grip strength or comfort level.

Best Lifting Straps for Small Wrists: Element 26 Weightlifting Straps

Element 26 Weight Lifting Straps
3.5
  • Material: Cotton
  • Style: Traditional
  • Length: 23 inches
  • Padding: 5mm neoprene
Check Price

Pros

  • Lasso-style is great for small wrists
  • 23-inch length for secure lifting
  • Comfortable neoprene padding for wrists
  • Left and right side indicators

Cons

  • Left and right indicators are technically redundant
  • Cotton is weaker than nylon
  • Straps only come in black

The defining feature of the Element 26 Weightlifting Straps is the traditional lasso style, meaning they have a closed loop at one end where the free end feeds into them. This strap style is great for small wrists because it allows you to adjust the size until the strap matches your preference. You can also easily switch between different exercises without re-adjusting them. Overall, lasso-style straps are more secure and stable than other straps, such as Olympic lifting or hooks.

Another pro of the Element 26 Weightlifting Straps is that they’re 23 inches long. This length is ideal for lifting straps for a couple of reasons. First, it makes it easier to wrap the straps with a single hand, especially your non-dominant side. Second, the 23-inch length is compatible with a wider range of barbells; axle bars have a noticeably larger diameter than Olympic barbells, so the longer material gives you get more wraps around the bar for a more secure grip — this is helpful for those with smaller wrists and hands that would otherwise struggle with thicker bars.

The Element 26 Weightlifting Straps have comfortable neoprene padding inside the loop around your wrist. Neoprene is a soft and flexible material that provides cushioning and support for your wrist, reducing the pressure that can cause discomfort and pain to your wrists during heavy lifting.

One of the cons of the Element 26 Weightlifting Straps is that they have left and right indicators on the loop around your wrist. These indicators are supposed to help you put on the straps correctly, but they’re actually redundant and unnecessary. Lasso-style straps have a closed loop on one end, and whether the free end is fed through the left or right side determines which hand they belong on. Since there is no difference between the left and right straps, except for the indicator, this feature is basically just a gimmick that adds little value to the straps.

Another con of the Element 26 Weightlifting Straps is that they are made of cotton, which is weaker than nylon. Nylon is a synthetic material with higher tensile strength and durability than cotton, so it can withstand more weight and stress without breaking or tearing. Cotton straps, on the other hand, can fray or snap after prolonged use or exposure to moisture. Cotton straps are also more prone to shrinking or stretching after washing or drying, affecting their fit and performance.

Finally, the Element 26s only come in black. Black is the standard color for lifting straps, but it can also be dull. Some lifters may prefer colorful or vibrant options to match their personality or style. Black straps can also be more challenging to identify in a crowded gym or locker room because they all look similar. More color choices would make the product more appealing and attractive to a broader range of customers.

Best Lifting Straps on Amazon: Harbinger Padded Cotton Lifting Straps

Harbinger Padded Cotton Lifting Straps
4.0
  • Material: Cotton
  • Style: Traditional
  • Length: 21.5 inches
  • Padding: “Neotek” (neoprene)
Check Price

Pros

  • 4.7/5 rating from over 27,000 customers 
  • Excellent price & perks for Amazon members
  • Comfortable and soft material

Cons

  • Loose threads upon receiving
  • Straps can be a little stiff
  • Higher risk of tearing on aggressive bars

The Harbinger Padded Cotton Lifting Straps have a 4.7 out of 5 rating from over 27,000 customers on Amazon, and they’re also rated #2 in the “Exercise Straps” category. That means tens of thousands of people have tried and loved these straps, so you can trust their quality and performance. But let’s not forget about their price. At the time of publishing, they cost only $9.97 — a steal compared to other lifting straps on the market. Plus, if you’re an Amazon Prime member, you can enjoy free shipping and an excellent return policy. 

They impressed our Breaking Muscle team member with their softness and comfort. Being made from cotton, the straps felt soft in the hands and offered extra wrist cushioning with their “Neotek” padding (essentially just neoprene). Our tester also noticed that the padding helps absorb sweat and moisture, so your hands will stay drier during your workouts, and it’ll be easier to keep a better grip.

Unfortunately, when our product tester opened the bag, they were surprised that the Harbingers had some loose threads and burs. The straps performed without any issues for a few weeks during barbell workouts, but these imperfections made our tester a bit concerned about how the straps would do after a year.

According to a few customers, the straps can sometimes feel stiff when first using them, making it harder to wrap them around the bar and tighten them around your wrist. However, we didn’t find this to be the case. If you run into this issue, the problem will subside as the straps are used because they’ll become more flexible and pliable.

Lastly, some users reported that the straps broke with heavy weights, which was extremely rare. This might be due to a combination of the straps being 100 percent cotton and being used on barbells with aggressive knurling. Cotton is a weaker material than nylon, so these straps are more prone to fraying or snapping over time — especially if they’re used in humid conditions. While the risk of these straps breaking is extremely low, and our product tester (who lifted 315 pounds with them) didn’t experience any issues, consider more robust nylon straps if you’ll be lifting serious weights.

Best Leather Lifting Straps: Rogue Treated Leather Straps

Rogue Treated Leather Straps
3.5
  • Material: Leather
  • Style: Traditional
  • Length: 24 inches
  • Padding: None
Check Price

Pros

  • Made in the USA
  • Extra-strong stitching
  • Classic look and feel
  • Top-tier Rogue Fitness quality

Cons

  • Less comfortable initially
  • Leather can stain
  • Slippier than cotton or nylon

The Rogue Treated Leather Straps are our top leather choice because it’s hard to beat the quality and craftsmanship of products made in the USA. These straps are crafted from 100 percent genuine premium belly leather, known for its balance of soft pliability and reliable durability. With the local manufacturing, product material, and brand, you can trust that these straps will last a long time and perform well in any lifting situation.

One of the most critical features of any lifting strap is the stitching. If the stitching is weak or poorly done, the strap can tear or unravel quickly. Double-stitching used to be a step above and an excellent way to increase the longevity of sewn products, but Rogue has used box-stitching on these straps, a technique that reinforces the seams and minimizes fraying. The stitching is also done with heavy-duty nylon thread, which adds to the strength and durability of the straps.

In terms of material, leather is an all-time classic. One of our product testers at Breaking Muscle has similar lifting straps made from genuine leather. They’re a few years old and are much loved. They’ve found that the feel of leather is second to none, and as you use them, they’ll mold to the shape of your hands and wrists — giving you a truly bespoke pair of straps. The leather also has a natural texture and color that gives these straps a timeless and elegant appearance.

All leather products take some time to break in, and these straps are no exception. When you first receive them, they might feel stiff and rough on your skin — this is normal. You can roll them up and unroll them a few times to help the break-in process, but we’ve found they take a couple of weeks of regular use to soften for maximum comfort on the back of your hands. Remember, good things take time!

One downside of leather is that it can absorb sweat, dirt, and other lovely substances over time. This can cause the leather to change color or develop marks that might look unappealing. Our staff member noticed some stains on theirs but appreciated the added character to the leather. If you care about the aesthetics of your straps, consider cleaning and treating them regularly or avoiding them altogether and going for a nylon strap instead.

Lastly, leather can be slippier than cotton or nylon. This can affect your grip on the bar, especially if your hands are sweaty or oily. Just place the rough side of the leather straps against the bar. This texture will dig better into the knurling and give more friction for the best grip possible.

Best Olympic Lifting Straps: Gymreapers Olympic Lifting Straps

Gymreapers Olympic Lifting Straps
3.8
  • Material: Cotton
  • Style: Olympic lifting
  • Length: 8.5 inches
  • Padding: None
Check Price

Pros

  • Tear-drop design for Olympic weightlifting
  • Reinforced triple-stitching
  • Lifetime replacement guarantee
  • Four colors available

Cons

  • No padding for wrists
  • Less secure than traditional straps

The main benefit of the Gymreapers Olympic Lifting Straps is that they’re specifically designed in a tear-drop shape for Olympic weightlifting. They’re shorter than traditional straps, so they wrap around the bar less. This means they help with your grip, but if you need to bail a snatch or clean and jerk, they’ll release in time to safely separate yourself from the bar. This can prevent devastating injuries from longer straps that wouldn’t detach from the bar in time.

Another benefit of these straps is their reinforced stitching. The seams of most straps are only double-stitched, resulting in a weaker area that could start to unravel over time. However, these Olympic lifting straps from Gymreapers are triple-stitched — making loose threads extremely unlikely to ever happen. This means you can get a secure grip around the bar, with the peace of mind that your straps will endure over time.

One of the best things about these straps is that they come with a lifetime replacement guarantee. If your straps ever break or wear out, Gymreapers claims you can get a new pair for free. This is a rare and generous offer that shows how confident the company is in its product quality and customer satisfaction. With these Olympic Weightlifting Straps, you can rest assured that you’re getting a reliable and long-lasting training tool to help you achieve your Oly lifting goals.

However, these straps also have some drawbacks, such as a lack of padding on the wrist area, making them less comfortable. As a result, you might experience chafing or bruising on your wrists until you get used to them. If you prefer more cushioning and comfort, consider looking for padded straps instead, like the Iron Bull Strength Unleash Lifting Straps.

Another downside of these straps is that they’re less secure than traditional straps. Of course, this is intentional because they’re made for Oly lifting — but it’s still worth noting. Since they are shorter, they can come undone more easily than traditional lasso straps. This is done on purpose to allow for quick release in case of emergency, but it also means that you might lose your grip if you’re not careful.

Best Budget Lifting Straps: DMOOSE Lifting Straps

DMoose Fitness Wrist Straps
3.5
  • Material: Cotton
  • Style: Traditional
  • Length: 24 inches
  • Padding: 4mm neoprene
Check Price

Pros

  • Budget-friendly price
  • Fits all wrist sizes
  • Comfortable to use
  • Nine colors available (Black, American, Black Silicon, Emerald Green, Military Green, Red-Black, Magenta Pink, Red Silicon, Navy Blue)

Cons

  • Grippy silicone texture isn’t for everyone
  • Double-cross stitching only
  • No weight capacity listed

The standout feature of the DMOOSE Lifting Straps is the price. At the time of writing, these retail for $15 after being marked down from $17 — not quite as cheap as the Harbinger Padded Cotton Lifting Straps, but close.

One of the best features of these straps is that they fit all wrist sizes. The straps have a closed-loop design, so you can tighten them like a lasso around your wrists. This allows you to adjust the fit according to your wrist size and comfort level. You don’t have to worry about the straps permanently being too loose or tight, as you can easily adjust them to your liking.

These straps are also incredibly comfortable, featuring a 4mm padding on the inside for cushion and to prevent chafing. The cotton material is also soft and breathable, which keeps your hands cool and dry. At 24 inches long and 1.5 inches wide, they give you enough length and width to wrap around the bar securely.

However, these straps aren’t perfect—one of their main cons is the grippy silicone texture. When a Breaking Muscle team member used a nearly identical pair of these straps from another brand, they found it hard to tighten and loosen the straps due to the sticky nature of the silicone texture. Our product tester also disliked the feeling of the raised texture in their hands when they gripped the bar with the straps on. This is a matter of personal preference, though, and some people may actually prefer the silicone bumps.

Another downside of these straps is that they only have double-crossed stitching, which is weaker than box stitching. Box-stitching is a more secure method of stitching that creates a square-shaped pattern on the strap with an “x” through the box. This makes the strap more resistant to tearing and fraying. The DMOOSE Lifting Straps have double-crossed stitching, which is better than single stitching but still not as sturdy as box stitching.

Sadly, these straps don’t have a weight capacity listed on their website or product page. This means you don’t know how much weight these straps can safely handle. It would be helpful if the company provided details on how much weight these straps can support. Can they hold 200 pounds, 500 pounds, or 1,000 pounds? This would give customers more transparency when considering these straps and ensure they aren’t asking the world from budget-friendly lifting straps.

Best Lifting Straps for Powerlifting: Iron Bull Strength Premium Lifting Straps

Iron Bull Strength Premium Lifting Straps
4.0
  • Material: Nylon
  • Style: Traditional
  • Length: 25 inches
  • Padding: None
Check Price

Pros

  • Extra-strong nylon material 
  • Powerlifting-tailored design
  • No padding
  • Reputable brand

Cons

  • Less comfortable on wrists
  • No weight capacity listed
  • Doesn’t absorb sweat well

If you’re looking for a pair of lifting straps that can handle the heaviest weights and the most demanding workouts, consider the Iron Bull Strength Premium Lifting Straps. 

These straps are made of extra-strong nylon material, which is ideal for powerlifting because nylon is one of the most robust materials for lifting straps, beating out cotton any day. Robust, heavy-duty nylon improves grip strength on every pulling movement and can be used on barbells, dumbbells, kettlebells, or any cable machine. 

Iron Bull Strength claims these are “Level 4” strength, but I couldn’t find a scale or explanation of what this actually means on their website. In contrast, their Figure 8 straps, which are also a Level 4 strength, have a 1,000+ pound capacity.

Iron Bull Strength is well known in the powerlifting and strength training communities for reputable products, so I doubt these straps will fail with regular use. However, I was surprised to see that as their premium lifting straps, they do not have a weight capacity listed. This makes it hard to compare them with other brands or models and also raises some questions about their durability and safety.

The design of these straps is well-suited for powerlifting. They have a two-inch width, so those elite powerlifting records you’ll be lifting with them will be dispersed better across your hands — resulting in less bruising and skin tears. I was delighted they have double-stitching to ensure the likelihood of loose threads is as low as possible, a must for straps that will be pushed to the limit.

One thing that sets these straps apart is that they have zero padding. This is done intentionally to guarantee a maximum grip and authentic feel during your most intense lifts. 

Some lifters prefer this style of straps, believing that padding reduces the contact between the hand and the bar and thus compromises the grip. However, this also means these straps are less comfortable on the wrists and will take some getting used to. If you have sensitive skin or are prone to bruising, consider looking for another option.

Unlike cotton, nylon does not absorb sweat as well, which can make the straps slippery and uncomfortable after a long session. This can also affect the hygiene and odor of the straps, as sweat can accumulate and cause bacteria growth. To prevent this, wash your straps regularly and let them air dry completely before using them again.

Different Types of Lifting Straps

There are many kinds of lifting straps available on the market, each with its advantages and disadvantages. Here are some of the most common ones:

Traditional/Lasso Straps

These are the simplest and most widely used types of lifting straps. Consisting of a long piece of fabric with a closed loop, the free end is fed through the loop, around your wrist, and then wraps around the bar several times. This makes them easy to use and adjust, and they provide a secure grip on any bar because they act like a lasso. However, they can also be challenging to release quickly, which can be problematic if you need to bail out of a lift or switch between exercises.

Olympic Lifting Straps

These are similar to traditional straps, but they have a shorter length and a closed tear-drop shape. They’re designed for Olympic weightlifting, where you need to quickly release the bar after completing a snatch or a clean and jerk. They are also suitable for explosive movements like high pulls or power cleans

Figure 8’s

These straps form a figure-eight shape. They are straightforward to put on and take off, and they provide a very tight grip on the bar — so much so that you can let go completely and they should stay on. They’re ideal for heavy deadlifts or shrugs, where you don’t need to worry about dropping the bar or changing your grip. However, they’re often misused by beginners so they can take some practice to use correctly.

Hooks

Attached to a wrist strap, these metal hooks grab onto the bar to take pressure off your grip and allow you to focus entirely on your working muscles. They’re great for people with weak or injured hands or wrists, or who want to lift very heavy weights without ever taxing their grip strength. However, they can also be more expensive, bulky, and unsafe if they break or slip off the bar.

Grips

These are rubber or silicone pads that stick to your palms and create friction with the bar. They are similar to gloves, but they only cover your palm. Grips are ideal for people who don’t like the feeling of straps or hooks or who want to make their setup fast. However, they can also wear and lose their stickiness quickly compared to other types of straps.

What Are the Benefits of Using Lifting Straps?

Lifting straps can help you in several ways when you’re working out. Here are some of the main benefits:

Reduced Grip Fatigue

One of the most significant limitations when lifting heavy weights is your grip strength. Your hands and forearms can tire before your target muscles do, preventing you from completing more reps or adding more weight. Lifting straps can help you overcome this by taking some of the load off your hands and transferring it to your arms and shoulders.

RELATED: The Best Shoulder Workouts for More Muscle, For Strength, For Beginners, and More

Ability to Hold More Weight

Another benefit of lifting straps is that they allow you to hold more weight than you usually could with your bare hands. This can help you break through plateaus and challenge yourself with heavier loads. Lifting more weight can also stimulate muscle growth and strength gains since your grip no longer limits you.

Protection Against Rips and Tears

Lifting heavy weights can damage your skin, especially if you have rough, dry, or heavily calloused hands. Lifting straps can protect your hands from getting ripped or torn by creating a barrier between your skin and the bar. This can also prevent infections and reduce pain and inflammation.

When Should You Use Lifting Straps?

Lifting straps can be a valuable tool for enhancing your training, but they shouldn’t be used all the time or for every exercise. Here are some guidelines on when to use them:

  • Use them sparingly: Lifting straps should not replace your baseline grip strength. You should still train your grip regularly using the warm-up sets of your exercises. Avoid using straps for every set or every workout, and only use them when you really need them, like when you’re going for a personal record, doing high-rep sets, or working on weak points.
  • Use them strategically: Lifting straps shouldn’t be used for every exercise. Use them only for exercises that involve pulling movements, such as deadlifts, rows, pull-ups, etc. You shouldn’t use them for exercises that involve pushing movements, such as the bench press, the overhead press, or dips — that’s what wrist wraps are for. 
  • Use them correctly: Lifting straps should be used properly to avoid injury and maximize performance. Ensure the straps are tight enough to secure your grip, but not so tight that they cut off your blood circulation or cause numbness. You should also make sure that the straps are wrapped around the bar in the right direction so that they don’t unravel or slip off during the lift. You should also practice releasing the straps quickly and safely in an emergency.

What to Look For in Lifting Straps

Materials

Lifting straps can be made of different materials, such as nylon, cotton, or leather. Each material has pros and cons regarding durability, comfort, grip, and price. Nylon straps are usually the most durable and affordable, but they can also be slippery and harsh on your skin. Cotton straps are generally the most comfortable and breathable, but they can also be less durable and more prone to stretching. Leather straps are traditionally the most classic, but they can also be more expensive and harder to clean.

Type

As we mentioned before, there are different types of lifting straps, such as traditional, Olympic, figure 8’s, hooks, and grips. Each type has its advantages and disadvantages in terms of ease of use, security, versatility, and comfort. You should choose the type that suits your goals, preferences, and experience level. 

For example, if you’re a beginner or an intermediate lifter who wants to improve your grip strength and technique, you might want to start with hooks or grips. If you’re an advanced or a competitive lifter who wants to lift as much weight as possible and focus on your other muscles, you might want to try Olympic lifting straps or traditional straps.

Length

Lifting straps can also vary, from four inches to 25 inches. The strap length affects how many times you can wrap it around the bar and how much slack you have left. A longer strap will allow you to wrap it more times and create a tighter grip, but it will also take more time and effort to put on and take off. A shorter strap will allow you to wrap it fewer times and create a looser grip, but it will also be faster and easier to use. 

The ideal length for you depends on your hand size, wrist size, bar diameter, and personal preference. A good rule of thumb is to choose a strap that is about 24 inches long. This will give you enough length to wrap it around most bars at least twice and still have some slack left. If the strap is too long for you, you can always cut it slightly and burn the ends to prevent fraying.

Padding

Some lifting straps have padding on the wrist area to provide extra comfort and cushioning. The padding can be made of different materials, but it’s almost always neoprene. Padding can help prevent chafing, bruising, or digging into your skin when lifting heavy weights. 

However, padding can also add bulkiness and weight to the strap, affecting your wrist mobility and grip feel. Some people prefer to have no padding at all for a more natural and direct contact with the bar. The choice of padding is mostly a matter of personal preference and comfort level.

Final Thoughts

Lifting straps are a great accessory for anyone who wants to improve their strength and performance in the gym. They can help you lift more weight, reduce grip fatigue, protect your hands from injury, and overcome plateaus. 

However, they should not be abused or relied on too much. Train your grip strength regularly and use straps only when necessary and appropriate. You should also choose the right strap type for your goals and preferences.

Best Lifting Straps: Side-by-Side Comparison

Best Lifting Straps Overall
Best Figure 8 Lifting Straps
Best Lifting Straps for Deadlifts
Best Lifting Straps With Hooks
Best Lifting Straps for Small Wrists
Best Lifting Straps on Amazon
Best Leather Lifting Straps
Best Olympic Lifting Straps
Best Budget Lifting Straps
Best Lifting Straps for Powerlifting
Description:
  • Material: Nylon
  • Style: Traditional
  • Length: 24 inches
  • Padding: 5mm neoprene
Description:
  • Material: Cotton
  • Style: Figure 8
  • Length: Length isn’t listed, but they are 6 to 7.5 inches wide
  • Padding: None
Description:
  • Material: PVC rubber
  • Style: Grips
  • Length: Not listed
  • Padding: Neoprene
Description:
  • Material: Rubber-coated stainless steel hooks, nylon strap
  • Style: Hooks
  • Length: 3.7 inches
  • Padding: 8mm neoprene
Description:
  • Material: Cotton
  • Style: Traditional
  • Length: 23 inches
  • Padding: 5mm neoprene
Description:
  • Material: Cotton
  • Style: Traditional
  • Length: 21.5 inches
  • Padding: “Neotek” (neoprene)
Description:
  • Material: Leather
  • Style: Traditional
  • Length: 24 inches
  • Padding: None
Description:
  • Material: Cotton
  • Style: Olympic lifting
  • Length: 8.5 inches
  • Padding: None
Description:
  • Material: Cotton
  • Style: Traditional
  • Length: 24 inches
  • Padding: 4mm neoprene
Description:
  • Material: Nylon
  • Style: Traditional
  • Length: 25 inches
  • Padding: None
Best Lifting Straps Overall
Description:
  • Material: Nylon
  • Style: Traditional
  • Length: 24 inches
  • Padding: 5mm neoprene
Best Figure 8 Lifting Straps
Description:
  • Material: Cotton
  • Style: Figure 8
  • Length: Length isn’t listed, but they are 6 to 7.5 inches wide
  • Padding: None
Best Lifting Straps for Deadlifts
Description:
  • Material: PVC rubber
  • Style: Grips
  • Length: Not listed
  • Padding: Neoprene
Best Lifting Straps With Hooks
Description:
  • Material: Rubber-coated stainless steel hooks, nylon strap
  • Style: Hooks
  • Length: 3.7 inches
  • Padding: 8mm neoprene
Best Lifting Straps for Small Wrists
Description:
  • Material: Cotton
  • Style: Traditional
  • Length: 23 inches
  • Padding: 5mm neoprene
Best Lifting Straps on Amazon
Description:
  • Material: Cotton
  • Style: Traditional
  • Length: 21.5 inches
  • Padding: “Neotek” (neoprene)
Best Leather Lifting Straps
Description:
  • Material: Leather
  • Style: Traditional
  • Length: 24 inches
  • Padding: None
Best Olympic Lifting Straps
Description:
  • Material: Cotton
  • Style: Olympic lifting
  • Length: 8.5 inches
  • Padding: None
Best Budget Lifting Straps
Description:
  • Material: Cotton
  • Style: Traditional
  • Length: 24 inches
  • Padding: 4mm neoprene
Best Lifting Straps for Powerlifting
Description:
  • Material: Nylon
  • Style: Traditional
  • Length: 25 inches
  • Padding: None

FAQs

What brand of lifting straps is the best?

The best brand of lifting straps is the Iron Bull Strength Unleash Lifting Straps. They’re traditional lifting straps, so they can adjust to any wrist size. These straps are also built from heavy-duty nylon to resist tearing even at heavy weights while being comfortable on your wrists with their soft neoprene padding.

What type of lifting straps should I get?

The type of lifting straps you get depends on what you plan to use them for, but most will do well with a pair of traditional lifting straps. There are five different types (traditional straps, figure 8’s, Olympic lifting straps, hooks, and grips), each with strengths, weaknesses, and best use cases.

What are the best powerlifting deadlift straps?

The best powerlifting deadlift straps are the Iron Bull Strength Premium Lifting Straps. The Premiums are made from ultra-durable nylon to resist tearing on heavy weights. They’re two inches wide to help disperse the load and minimize the risk of bruising or skin tears and have no padding for that raw lifting experience.

The post Best Lifting Straps for Powerlifting, Olympic Weightlifting, and More (2024) appeared first on Breaking Muscle.

]]>
Best Knee Sleeves for Powerlifting, CrossFit, Running, and More (2024) https://breakingmuscle.com/best-knee-sleeves/ Sun, 12 Nov 2023 12:30:02 +0000 https://breakingmuscle.com/?p=201037 Whether you’re shopping for a brand new pair of the best knee sleeves or replacing your old, worn-out ones, you’re probably looking to maximize your squatting performance or minimize a chronic joint problem (hello there, creaky knees). Breaking Muscle has a passionate team of fitness enthusiasts that includes Olympic weightlifters, powerlifters, strength coaches, and personal trainers. Altogether, we’ve...

The post Best Knee Sleeves for Powerlifting, CrossFit, Running, and More (2024) appeared first on Breaking Muscle.

]]>
Whether you’re shopping for a brand new pair of the best knee sleeves or replacing your old, worn-out ones, you’re probably looking to maximize your squatting performance or minimize a chronic joint problem (hello there, creaky knees).

Breaking Muscle has a passionate team of fitness enthusiasts that includes Olympic weightlifters, powerlifters, strength coaches, and personal trainers. Altogether, we’ve tested over sixteen different knee sleeves. I personally have also been wearing knee sleeves for years during my squat sessions and, occasionally, for CrossFit Workouts of the Day (WODs). 

We chose the best knee sleeves by dishing out nearly a dozen of them to our experienced product testing team of Olympic weightlifters and had them give benefits and drawbacks on each. We combined their hands-on feedback with the knee sleeve specs and their IPF & IWF approval status to give each an overall ranking from 1 to 5.

Of course, part of choosing the best knee sleeves means getting the perfect fit for you. As knee sleeves have no universal sizing, we’ve only selected brands with a helpful size chart, so you can get the right fit on your first try.

Our Top Picks for the Best Knee Sleeves

Best Knee Sleeves Overall: DMOOSE Knee Sleeves

DMoose Fitness Knee Sleeves
4.5
  • Material: Neoprene
  • Thickness: Seven millimeters
  • Available sizes: S to XXL
  • IPF/IWF-approved: No
Check Price

Pros

  • Extra-supportive seven-millimeter thickness
  • Durable double-stitching
  • 30-day guarantee
  • Three colors
  • Five sizes

Cons

  • No XS size
  • No exchanges or returns after opening
  • Not IPF or IWF-approved

The DMOOSE knee sleeves are the best knee sleeves overall due to their supportive seven-millimeter thick neoprene material, build quality, and 30-day money-back guarantee.

Made from neoprene, these offer an incredible amount of stretch and support for your knees. Seven millimeters is the ideal thickness for lower-body strength training. While you’ll feel the most support on knee-focused exercises like squats, lunges, and step-ups, you’ll also feel the benefits of DMOOSE’s knee sleeves in posterior-chain movements, like deadlifts and good mornings. 

The double-stitching on these sleeves makes the seams much less likely to begin unraveling. It also adds an extra layer of durability, giving you greater peace of mind that they’ll last years of solid use.

DMOOSE offers a 30-day money-back guarantee, which is great for support products in general, and is one of the only companies out of all the knee sleeve options in this article that offers a money-back guarantee. While lower-quality knee sleeves may feature a lower price tag, they usually come without this assurance. If the DMOOSE knee sleeves don’t meet your standard, you can get your money back.

The sizes available for these knee sleeves are more limited than other brands, running from small to double extra-large. As a result, lifters with smaller or exceptionally large legs might have a more challenging time finding an ideal fit. If this concerns you, consider the SBD sleeves instead — they offer 11 different sizes.

DMOOSE’s return policy could be better. They offer free returns but don’t accept opened products, according to their return policy. This means that as soon as you physically open your knee sleeve’s package, you’ll lose the opportunity to exchange or return them if you got the wrong size. Because of this, ensure you correctly measure based on their sizing chart to maximize the chances of ordering the proper size. That said, you’d technically be eligible for a return under their 30-day guarantee if they don’t perform satisfactorily in that timeframe.

Unfortunately, these knee sleeves aren’t IPF or IWF-approved. For competitive powerlifters and weightlifters, you’ll have to look elsewhere for knee sleeves permitted for a meet under either of those federations.

All the above considered, we rank these 4.5 out of 5 stars for their extra-supportive seven-millimeter thickness, durable double-stitching, and 30-day guarantee.

Best Knee Sleeves for Squats: Gymreapers 7mm Knee Sleeves

Gymreapers 7MM Knee Sleeves
4.5
  • Material: Neoprene
  • Thickness: 7mm
  • Available sizes: S to XXL
  • IPF/IWF-approved: IPF
Check Price

Pros

  • Durable neoprene and reinforced stitching 
  • Approved for use in IPF
  • Backed by 1-year replacement warranty
  • Free returns from the United States 
  • Includes a free carrying bag
  • Three colors

Cons

  • Only five sizes are available
  • Return policy could be improved

I’ve owned the Gymreapers 7mm Knee Sleeves for over two years and use them at least once a week. Not only are the neoprene material and stitching quality impressive, but I love their 7mm thickness. It makes them supportive but not so restrictive that I have to take them off or roll them down between sets. Plus, they rarely slide down unless I wear a pair of slick leggings, and even then, it’s only minor adjustments between sets. Despite the consistent use I’ve put them through, the edges are all still intact, and there are no signs of framing in the seams — these get an A+ for durability in my books.

The Gymreapers 7mm knee sleeves are approved by the International Powerlifting Federation (IPF). This is great if you’re a competitive powerlifter or aspire to compete in one of the most recognized federations worldwide because you can train with the same gear you’ll be competing with. Practicing your squats with the exact same support gear you’ll be using in your meets can offer noticeable physical and psychological benefits that could give you an edge over your competitors.

A one-year replacement warranty also backs these knee sleeves. My knee sleeves from Gymreapers are still going strong after two years of consistent use, so I highly doubt you’ll ever need to use their warranty. But unlike a quality squat rack, support wear like knee sleeves will accumulate wear and tear above a cosmetic level. Even if you never need it, this policy is thoughtful and gives you peace of mind for an entire year in a product space where warranties are rare. 

Gymreapers’ return policy could be better for these knee sleeves. At the time of writing, their return policy claims that they don’t accept returns that have been worn or washed or have visible signs of use. However, I seriously doubt Gymreapers would reject a return because you tried on the knee sleeves, realized they don’t fit correctly, and either want an exchange or your money back. Leg proportions and design vary widely, so it can be challenging to get the ideal size, even with their size guide. So, if you want the ability to return or exchange them, keep this in mind before purchasing.

I found the size chart accurate and the fit excellent, but it would be helpful if they offered more sizes. Gymreapers features five sizes (S to XXL), which is standard for knee sleeves. That said, those who are more petite or have lean legs may find that even the small size is still too big to fit correctly.

All the above considered, we rank these 4.5 out of 5 stars for their durable neoprene, reinforced stitching, IPF approval, and one-year replacement guarantee.

Best Knee Sleeves for Powerlifting: SBD Powerlifting Knee Sleeves

SBD Powerlifting Knee Sleeves
4.2
  • Material: Neoprene
  • Thickness: 7mm
  • Available sizes: 3XS to 5XL
  • IPF/IWF-approved: IPF
Check Price

Pros

  • Approved for IPF & IWF use
  • Patented, world-renowned SBD construction
  • 11 sizes available: 3XS to 5XL
  • Manufactured in Great Britain
  • Great exchange policy

Cons

  • Challenging to put on
  • Expensive at $125 per pair

SBD is world-renowned in powerlifting circles as the top choice for knee sleeves because they’re incredibly supportive, are manufactured in Great Britain, and you’re almost guaranteed to find an ideal fit among their 11 sizes.

If you want the crème de la crème of knee sleeves for powerlifting, look no further than the SBD powerlifting sleeves. They’re approved by the International Powerlifting Federation (IPF), which makes them suitable for IPF-affiliated powerlifting competitions. Aspiring world-record-setting powerlifters trust this brand, so it’s hard to go wrong if powerlifting is important to you.

The SBD knee sleeves are built from high-density seven-millimeter neoprene, which SBD claims offers maximum compression and contact area for your knees as they bend. Their patented design also boasts a four-way stretch that allows them to keep the high compression they’re known for without gagging around your knees during your lift. A product tester from the Breaking Muscle team put the SBDs through squats, cleans, snatches, and split squats. He noticed that despite their high compression level, they didn’t feel super restrictive. This means that they’ll continue feeling comfortable during lengthy squat workouts. 

I was immediately impressed with the size range of the SBD knee sleeves. They carry a staggering 11 different sizes, from 3XS to 5XL! With this many sizes and a detailed fit guide, you’re practically guaranteed to find your ideal fit. If you don’t succeed on the first order, they offer a great exchange policy: the knee sleeves may be tried on but can’t be used for a workout, and you can request an exchange up to 30 days after receiving them. Regarding exchange policies, I think this is one of the fairest of all companies in this article.

The SBDs are manufactured in Great Britain (GB), which immediately sets them above most knee sleeve brands that import theirs from overseas manufacturers. There are higher manufacturing and worker standards in GB, so you can trust the high-grade neoprene and double stitching to hold firm as you hit new PRs.

Our product tester found the sleeves lived up to their hard-to-get-on reputation; they had to be folded in half and then dragged up his lower legs before being rolled over. Because they’re so grippy, you’ll get a mini arm workout to start your squatting session. Applying a bit of baby powder to your legs beforehand can make this experience noticeably easier.

The price of these knee sleeves is also one of the highest in this list at $125.00 per pair. Unless you’re a competitive powerlifter or want the best for your powerlifting-style squat sessions, there are more affordable options, like the Gymreapers 7mm Knee Sleeves. 

All the above considered, we rank these 4.2 out of 5 stars for their IPF & IWF approval, world-renowned construction, and 11 sizes available.

Best Knee Sleeves for Arthritis: IMAK Compression Arthritis Knee Sleeves

IMAK Compression Arthritis Knee Sleeve
4.0
  • Material: Cotton (92%) and spandex (8%)
  • Thickness: Not listed
  • Available sizes: XS to XL
  • IPF/IWF-approved: No
Check Price

Pros

  • Soft and stretchy cotton-spandex blend
  • Provides warmth and mild compression
  • Affordably priced at $17.99
  • Can be worn all day or all night

Cons

  • Might roll down over the day
  • Limited sizes

The IMAK Compression Knee Sleeves are made from soft cotton and stretchy spandex to offer comfort and mild compression all day (or night), making them the best knee sleeves for arthritis.

These compression sleeves are made from a soft and stretchy cotton-spandex blend. This material combo makes it easy for you to slide them on and off. Being 92% cotton, they’ll offer warmth while still being breathable, so they won’t cause your knees to sweat excessively.

The thickness of the knee sleeve wasn’t listed on their product page, but one customer mentioned the IMAKs are so lightweight that they forget they even have them on. It means they won’t be too compressive, so you can wear them all day or night without worrying about cutting off your circulation. For those with arthritis, this is a good thing. If they were super thick and bulky, they would be noticeable around the clock, and wearing them for long periods would be completely off the table. The cotton material can also help soothe some symptoms of arthritis by providing warmth to your knees. 

They’re pretty affordable, which is likely due to most of their material being cotton, a more economical option than neoprene. However, they’re also sold in singles, which is great, as you can purchase a single sleeve if your arthritis is in one knee only. If you need a pair of them, they’re still priced economically. Retailing at just $17.99 at the time of writing, they’re the most budget-friendly knee sleeves in this article, even when a pair is bought. As far as non-invasive treatments go for arthritic knees, these knee sleeves are a great low-cost option.

Unfortunately, the IMAK knee sleeves are only available in five sizes. If you’re extra petite or have extra-lean legs, you might find that the XS size isn’t small enough. Similarly, their sizes cap out at an XL — which may pose an issue if you or your knees are significantly larger than average.

The IMAKs may have trouble staying in place throughout the entire day. They have a stretchy tri-band, but due to their lighter compression material, they won’t be as resistant to movement at the knee. One reviewer mentioned that their knee sleeves kept rolling down on them, but other reviews didn’t mention this, so that may have been an issue of improper sizing.

All the above considered, we rank these 4 out of 5 stars for their cotton-spandex blend, warmth and compression, and affordable price.

RELATED: Got Knee Pain? Fix Your Tracking in the Squat and Lunge

Best Knee Sleeves for Weightlifting: Iron Bull Strength 7mm Knee Sleeves

Iron Bull Strength 7mm Knee Sleeves
4.5
  • Material: Neoprene
  • Thickness: 7mm
  • Available sizes: S to XXL
  • IPF/IWF-approved: Yes
Check Price

Pros

  • IWF- and IPF-approved
  • High-grade neoprene and double-stitched seams
  • 30-day money-back guarantee
  • Seven colors available

Cons

  • Return policy could be better
  • Shipping policy could be improved

Iron Bull Strength’s knee sleeves are approved by the International Weightlifting Federation (IWF). For actively competing veterans and beginner weightlifters just starting out, being able to train with the exact same equipment that you’ll be competing with is a distinct advantage. After training regularly with them, you’ll feel comfortable with the compression and support as you squat out of the hole on a heavy clean or snatch. Having practice with this before your competition makes the difference between them being a performance enhancer instead of a distraction.

What I’m most impressed about regarding the Iron Bull Strength knee sleeves is their dual approval. These sleeves are also approved for use in the IPF. Typically, knee sleeves are designed explicitly for powerlifting or weightlifting use — being certified for both sports at the highest level is a rarity. If you like to dabble in these strength sports or want to without sinking more money in support gear, these are the sleeves for you.

These knee sleeves are made from high-grade neoprene. They feature extra durable double-stitched welded seams that, according to Iron Bull Strength, are incredibly strong and significantly reduce the risk of failure. This is exactly what any serious weightlifter wants — gear they can trust when training and on the platform.

Iron Bull comes with a 30-day return policy, starting when you receive your knee sleeves. However, they must be in the same condition you received them in: unworn/unused, with the tags intact, and in the original packaging. In other words, they have to be brand new. That means you can’t even try them on without losing your ability to return or exchange them, which we don’t love.

Plus, if you do end up needing to return them, it’ll be at personal cost. Original shipping costs are non-refundable unless damaged, defective, or there’s a shipping error. Make sure to use their detailed sizing chart to minimize the risk of ordering the wrong size.

All the above considered, we rank these 4.5 out of 5 stars for their IWF and IPF approval, high-grade neoprene with double-stitched seams, and 30-day money-back guarantee.

RELATED: How to Train the Squat for Both Powerlifting and Weightlifting

Best Knee Sleeves for CrossFit: Element 26 Agility Knee Sleeves

Element 26 3mm Agility Knee Sleeves
3.5
  • Material: Nylon-elastic blend
  • Thickness: 3mm
  • Available sizes: S to L
  • IPF/IWF-approved: No
Check Price

Pros

  • Unrestricting three-millimeter thickness
  • Breathable & sweat-wicking material
  • Comfortable tapered shape
  • Lifetime warranty on manufacturing defects

Cons

  • Only three sizes are available
  • Not IPF/IWF approved
  • Only one color option

CrossFit is widely known for its exercise variety, from one-rep max squats to hour-long conditioning sessions. Because of this exercise range, finding knee sleeves for CrossFit can be a serious challenge. Three-millimeter sleeves are ideal when joint mobility and comfort are prioritized, like for longer cardio-focused WODs. Meanwhile, seven-millimeter knee sleeves offer the best support and compression for heavy strength training.

As a result, CrossFitters often resort to buying TWO separate pairs of knee sleeves and using the one that best aligns with the WOD they’ll be doing. This is a mistake that ends up costing them twice as much. 

Enter the Element 26 Agility Knee Sleeves.

The Element 26s are a lightweight sleeve, making them ideal for CrossFit. They’re only 3mm thick, offering excellent mobility for those longer endurance-focused WODs. Since they’re considerably thinner than 7mm knee sleeves, they’ll also be more comfortable and less restrictive for the conditioning components of your WODs like running, skipping, or rowing.

Contrary to what some CrossFitters think, they don’t need super thick knee sleeves because Crossfit isn’t just about lifting heavy — it’s about being an amazing all-round athlete. For this reason, a pair of 7mm sleeves often ends up being too thick and complete overkill. Ultimately, this means you can invest in and wear one pair of knee sleeves…no more flipping between two pairs or spending money you don’t have to!

The Element 26s are highly crafted to ensure they’re as breathable as can be. They’re built with a hybrid nylon-elastic blend, which is designed to absorb sweat and evaporate it to keep you more comfortable. For serious CrossFitters, every legitimate advantage can give you an edge in crushing your WODs with the best time possible — including effective sweat management, especially in hot gyms.

According to Element 26, these knee sleeves are anatomically designed. This likely means they’re made in a tapered shape to follow the natural contours of the average lifter’s leg, knee, and calf sizes. As such, they should stay in place without bunching behind your knees, which can be uncomfortable and cause your skin to rub.

For knee sleeves, this feature is seriously underrated — especially for CrossFit. The last thing you want in your WODs is to pull your knee sleeves up after every burpee because they’re sliding down or readjust them after every set of wall balls because they’re bunching up behind your knees and causing your skin to chafe. 

Only three sizes are available (S to L). CrossFit and other similar training styles are rising in popularity, so I’m disappointed that there isn’t a more extensive range of sizes.

The IPF or IWF doesn’t approve these for competition use. However, I don’t think that matters if you’re using them for CrossFit because they’re not designed to squeeze out every drop of your powerlifting or weightlifting performance — they’re made to help you perform better as a hybrid athlete.

All the above considered, we rank these 4.5 out of 5 stars for their unrestricting 3mm thickness, breathable & sweat-wicking material, and comfortable tapered shape.

RELATED: Best CrossFit Shoes for Flat Feet, Wide Feet, and More (2023)

Best Budget Knee Sleeves: DMOOSE Reversible Knee Sleeves

DMoose Fitness Knee Sleeves
4.0
  • Material: Neoprene
  • Thickness: 7mm
  • Available sizes: S to XXL
  • IPF/IWF-approved: No
Check Price

Pros

  • Budget-friendly price
  • Solid overall construction 
  • USPA-approved
  • Reversible 2-sided colors
  • Includes storage bag

Cons

  • Not IPF/IWF-approved
  • Main material not listed

At the time of writing, the DMOOSE Reversibles retail at $39.00 but were on sale at $35.00. For knee sleeves, this is an excellent price at the 7mm thickness. Great quality 7mm knee sleeves generally range between $50.00 and $70.00, with the higher-end coming from popular name brands. Being only 35% of the cost of the top-tier SBD Powerlifting knee sleeves, these are definitely within reach for the budget-conscious lifter.

I’m impressed with the quality of these sleeves despite their economical price. With lower prices, you’ll usually see obvious corners cut: no double-stitched seams, 3-5mm thickness, and poor fits. However, these Reversibles break the mold in each category. 

They share the same durable double-stitched seams of more expensive sleeves, which means you get the same reassurance from knee sleeve blowouts. They feature the same 7mm thickness as pricier brands, so you get the same extra-supportive fee on your squats. They’re even anatomically shaped to ensure they’ll fit correctly for most people.

I’m pleasantly surprised that these are approved by the United States Powerlifting Association (USPA). To offer the lowest price, companies usually cut costs wherever they can, and competition approval is often the first to be discarded because the approval process is expensive. It’s only a single powerlifting federation, but the fact that these are approved for in-competition use in the USPA — which claims they’re the largest powerlifting federation — is a big plus. 

Despite being USPA-approved, they aren’t permitted for competition use in the IPF or IWF, and it’s unlikely they ever will be. As the most prestigious federations for powerlifting and weightlifting in the world, respectively, approval costs for equipment are significantly higher. Seeing these are budget-friendly knee sleeves, I think the lack of certification is entirely understandable.

The product page doesn’t specify what material these reversible knee sleeves are made of. Quality knee sleeves are almost always made with neoprene because of its stretchy support and compression. However, cheap knee sleeves can be made with similar-feeling materials that are lower in quality and durability than neoprene. Unlike the DMOOSE knee sleeves that won our Best Knee Sleeves Overall, assuming neoprene is the primary material might not be wise considering they’re such a budget-friendly price.

All the above considered, we rank these 4 out of 5 stars for their budget-friendly price, solid overall construction, and USPA approval.

Best Knee Sleeves for Running: Rehband 3mm Knee Sleeves

Rehband Knee Sleeve 3mm Neoprene
4.0
  • Material: 70% SBR/30% neoprene
  • Thickness: 3mm
  • Available sizes: XXS to XXL
  • IPF/IWF-approved: No
Check Price

Pros

  • 3mm thickness is ideal for running
  • Reputably handmade in Europe
  • Seven sizes are available for an ideal fit
  • Fits left or right knee
  • Multiple colors

Cons

  • Not supportive enough for CrossFit
  • Partially made from lower-grade neoprene

When it comes to knee support while running, these Rehbands take the cake. They’re built with neoprene but in a lightweight 3mm thickness, which is just right as far as thickness goes. 

While great for weight lifting, 7mm is too much support and compression for running — even a thinner 5mm is still too thick. 3mm allows you to use your regular stride without modifying it unnaturally for your knee sleeve. The 3mm thickness keeps your knees warm while allowing for ample flexibility as you hit the road for miles, making it the best option for running.

Rehband has been around since 1955, and these knee sleeves are a testament to their reputation as a company. They’re handmade in Estonia, so they must adhere to higher manufacturing and working standards than other countries overseas, who might cut corners in their construction processes, or mistreat workers — resulting in lower-quality products. This means you can rely on knee sleeves from Rehband being higher quality than cheaper alternatives.

These knee sleeves for running come in seven sizes, from XXS to XXL. I’m happy to see this range of sizes because whether you have lean or heavily muscled legs, you can be reasonably sure you’ll find a size that will fit. More importantly, using their size chart to find an ideal size for your leg proportions will ensure your knee sleeves stay in place for your runs. 

These Rehbands aren’t ideal for CrossFit. The 3mm thickness is too thin to provide noticeable support for the heavier loads and impacts seen in strength-focused WODs from thrusters, box jumps, and barbell back squats. If you choose to use them for CrossFit anyway, they’ll still offer warmth and proprioception for your knees.

The Rehband 3mm’s are made from 70% SBR (styrene butadiene rubber). Compared to neoprene, SBR is lower quality because it has less compressive resistance. This would be a bigger concern if you needed to use them for weight lifting, so they’ll be just fine for running

All the above considered, we rank these 4 out of 5 stars for their ideal thickness for running, reputable manufacturing, and seven sizes available.

RELATED: Size Doesn’t Matter – But Your Technique Does (For Running, That Is)

Benefits of Knee Sleeves

Compression and Support

Knee sleeves offer a dual advantage of compression and support for your knees during lower body workouts, especially for exercises that involve bending and extending your knees. 

The compression they provide not only enhances blood circulation but also stabilizes the surrounding ligaments, tendons, and your kneecap. This added stability is a game-changer whether you’re an athlete or fitness enthusiast, allowing you to perform at your best while minimizing the risk of injury.

Increased Blood Flow

One of the often-overlooked benefits of knee sleeves is their ability to promote increased blood flow to the knee area. The compression from knee sleeves generates a gentle warmth, which feels comfortable and encourages better circulation.

Assistance “Out of the Hole” When Squatting 

For avid weightlifters, knee sleeves can be a lifeline for squats. They offer crucial assistance during the initial phase of a squat’s ascent, commonly called “coming out of the hole.” By providing additional support and stability, knee sleeves help lifters push through this challenging point in their squat, which can be a secret weapon in achieving new personal bests.

Increased Proprioception

Wearing knee sleeves can boost your proprioception, the body’s awareness of its position in space. With knee sleeves, you’ll have a heightened sense of where your knees are during squats, lunges, and step-ups. This increased awareness can make a significant difference, helping you maintain proper form and alignment. You’ll be more attuned to the way your knees bend and extend, potentially reducing the risk of improper movement that might lead to injury.

What to Consider When Buying Knee Sleeves

Materials and Construction

Knee sleeves are made from various materials, depending on their purpose. 

Sleeves for arthritis are often made with a cotton/spandex blend to ensure they’re breathable and comfortable to wear all day.

3mm to 7mm knee sleeves will almost exclusively be made with “neoprene,” a unique type of rubber-like foam material that’s also used as the primary material for wetsuits. Because of its stretchy form-fitting properties, it’s considered the gold standard for knee sleeves. 

Reinforced stitching is needed if you want a pair of knee sleeves that won’t unravel after a few months. This is commonly practiced by double-stitching, though cross-pattern double-stitching, like what’s used on the Element 26’s, is even better to reduce the chances of any threads coming loose.

Neoprene Quality

Neoprene comes in different qualities or grades, sometimes listed on knee sleeve product pages as SBR, SCR, and CR.

  • SBR (styrene-butadiene-rubber) is the lowest quality of neoprene because it has lower compression resistance and is cheaper overall. Companies who don’t want to disclose that they use this lower-quality SBR material may try to list it as “neoprene” without mentioning the quality or grade.
  • CR (chloroprene rubber) is the highest quality of neoprene. Despite its higher price, it has great elasticity and strength, making it an excellent choice for knee sleeves. Companies might mention using high-quality/high-grade neoprene when they use CR to demonstrate that their knee sleeves are genuinely made from premium neoprene.
  • SCR (styrene chloroprene rubber) is a medium-grade neoprene that combines the properties and qualities of SBR and CR. This is a suitable happy medium for knee sleeve material as far as quality and value go.

Thickness

Knee sleeves come in various thicknesses depending on the activity you need them for. 

  • 3mm is relatively thin and will only give light support and compression to your knees. Because of this, 3mm is best for cardio activities like running and endurance-focused CrossFit workouts, where you want warmth and lightweight support that won’t impair your joint flexibility.
  • 5mm to 6mm will offer a medium level of support and compression. Because of its thicker layer, it’s ideal for hybrid activities like resistance-focused CrossFit metcons and circuit training.
  • 7mm gives noticeably more support and compression for weight lifting. As a result, they’ll generally feel tighter, which makes them great for heavy squats, but they aren’t the most comfortable for longer workouts over two hours. 

Sizing

For starters, always use the brand’s fit guide to ensure you select the correct size of knee sleeves, providing a fit that’s not too tight or loose.

If you want more pop out of the hole, opt for a tighter pair of knee sleeves by sizing down. If you want them to be less compressive or restrictive, size up instead.

Sleeve Shape and Fit

There are no universal knee sleeve sizes or shapes, so the same knee sleeve size can feel and fit completely differently between two brands.

Generally, there are three knee sleeve shapes: straight, hourglass, and tapered. All of these shapes refer to the difference in widths between the top, middle, and bottom of the sleeve. 

  • Straight is precisely as it sounds and is best for people with the same size of thighs, knees, and calves.
  • Hourglass-shaped sleeves are smaller at the kneecap but are designed for larger thighs and calves.
  • Tapered is the most common, which follows the standard anatomical shape of most people’s legs. The thighs are largest above the knee, followed by the knees, with the calves being the smallest.

Competition Approval

As a competitive powerlifter or weightlifter, practicing like you play will give you an advantage come meet day. Competition-approved allow you to use them in your training and get every pound out of them in your meet.

Federation rules vary widely, so check to see what knee sleeves are permitted for your federation. However, powerlifters and weightlifters should consider the International Powerlifting Federation (IPF) and International Weightlifting Federation (IWF) approved equipment lists as the gold standards, respectively.

Competition-approved knee sleeves also tend to be more durable than their non-approved counterparts because the former must meet a specific standard for use in IPF and IWF meets.

Warranty

Warranties on support wear are underrated. I’d encourage you not to overlook one, just in case the knee sleeves don’t meet your performance standards or their threads unravel in a few short months. 

I’d recommend settling for no less than a six-month warranty. Support wear will inevitably wear and tear, so it’s unrealistic to expect them to endure forever. That said, a 1-year warranty is considered excellent for knee sleeves and will give you more peace of mind during your workouts.

Return Policy

To ensure you’re not stuck with a pair of ill-fitting knee sleeves, I recommend buying from a company that offers a fair return policy. That way, you can exchange them or get your money back if they don’t fit correctly.

At the bare minimum, they should allow you to return or exchange your knee sleeves within 14 days of receiving them, and you should be allowed to try them on to confirm the size you choose will work. Generous policies extend the return period to between 30 to 60 days.

Your Strength Level

Like any support wear, knee sleeves will experience wear and tear over time. However, this process will accelerate the stronger you are. 

As advanced or elite-level strength athletes lift significantly heavier weights than rank novices, their knee sleeves will take on more strain, wearing out faster. 

Colors

Not everyone loves the jet-black look. If you like color-coordinating your workout outfits, consider shopping with a brand that offers multiple colors. 

It’s a creative way to add some of your personality to your lifting gear. Plus, it’ll be hard to misplace your knee sleeves if they’re hot pink.

Final Thought

Knee sleeves are an excellent tool for supporting your knees and improving your squatting performance. When it comes down to it, though, picking the best knee sleeves for you depends on what you value regarding material, thickness, competition approval status, and more.

Best Knee Sleeves: Side-by-Side Comparison

Best Knee Sleeves Overall
Best Knee Sleeves for Squats
Best Knee Sleeves for Powerlifting
Best Knee Sleeves for Arthritis
Best Knee Sleeves for Weightlifting
Best Knee Sleeves for CrossFit
Best Budget Knee Sleeves
Best Knee Sleeves for Running
Description:
  • Material: Neoprene
  • Thickness: Seven millimeters
  • Available sizes: S to XXL
  • IPF/IWF-approved: No
Description:
  • Material: Neoprene
  • Thickness: 7mm
  • Available sizes: S to XXL
  • IPF/IWF-approved: IPF
Description:
  • Material: Neoprene
  • Thickness: 7mm
  • Available sizes: 3XS to 5XL
  • IPF/IWF-approved: IPF
Description:
  • Material: Cotton (92%) and spandex (8%)
  • Thickness: Not listed
  • Available sizes: XS to XL
  • IPF/IWF-approved: No
Description:
  • Material: Neoprene
  • Thickness: 7mm
  • Available sizes: S to XXL
  • IPF/IWF-approved: Yes
Description:
  • Material: Nylon-elastic blend
  • Thickness: 3mm
  • Available sizes: S to L
  • IPF/IWF-approved: No
Description:
  • Material: Neoprene
  • Thickness: 7mm
  • Available sizes: S to XXL
  • IPF/IWF-approved: No
Description:
  • Material: 70% SBR/30% neoprene
  • Thickness: 3mm
  • Available sizes: XXS to XXL
  • IPF/IWF-approved: No
Best Knee Sleeves Overall
Description:
  • Material: Neoprene
  • Thickness: Seven millimeters
  • Available sizes: S to XXL
  • IPF/IWF-approved: No
Best Knee Sleeves for Squats
Description:
  • Material: Neoprene
  • Thickness: 7mm
  • Available sizes: S to XXL
  • IPF/IWF-approved: IPF
Best Knee Sleeves for Powerlifting
Description:
  • Material: Neoprene
  • Thickness: 7mm
  • Available sizes: 3XS to 5XL
  • IPF/IWF-approved: IPF
Best Knee Sleeves for Arthritis
Description:
  • Material: Cotton (92%) and spandex (8%)
  • Thickness: Not listed
  • Available sizes: XS to XL
  • IPF/IWF-approved: No
Best Knee Sleeves for Weightlifting
Description:
  • Material: Neoprene
  • Thickness: 7mm
  • Available sizes: S to XXL
  • IPF/IWF-approved: Yes
Best Knee Sleeves for CrossFit
Description:
  • Material: Nylon-elastic blend
  • Thickness: 3mm
  • Available sizes: S to L
  • IPF/IWF-approved: No
Best Budget Knee Sleeves
Description:
  • Material: Neoprene
  • Thickness: 7mm
  • Available sizes: S to XXL
  • IPF/IWF-approved: No
Best Knee Sleeves for Running
Description:
  • Material: 70% SBR/30% neoprene
  • Thickness: 3mm
  • Available sizes: XXS to XXL
  • IPF/IWF-approved: No

FAQs

What is the best-rated knee sleeve?

The best-rated knee sleeves are the DMOOSE Knee Sleeves due to their supportive 7mm thick neoprene material, high build quality, and 30-day money-back guarantee.

What are the best weightlifting knee sleeves?

The best weightlifting knee sleeves are the Iron Bull Strength Knee Sleeves due to their supportive 7mm thick neoprene, double-stitched seams, and International Weightlifting Federation (IWF) approval.

Are knee sleeves worth it?

Yes, knee sleeves are worth it for the extra support, warmth, and awareness they give your knees while squatting.

The post Best Knee Sleeves for Powerlifting, CrossFit, Running, and More (2024) appeared first on Breaking Muscle.

]]>
Best Multivitamins for Men, Women, and More (2024) https://breakingmuscle.com/best-multivitamin/ Sat, 28 Oct 2023 18:31:38 +0000 https://breakingmuscle.com/?p=199825 Multivitamins are often associated with being healthy, but they’re not all created equally. Some dietary supplements become contaminated with harmful compounds, like arsenic, which can cause numerous health issues. Others may contain artificial coloring, preservatives, and sweeteners that cause GI symptoms and offer no nutritional value. We certainly want to avoid these things, but it’s not always clear...

The post Best Multivitamins for Men, Women, and More (2024) appeared first on Breaking Muscle.

]]>
Multivitamins are often associated with being healthy, but they’re not all created equally. Some dietary supplements become contaminated with harmful compounds, like arsenic, which can cause numerous health issues. Others may contain artificial coloring, preservatives, and sweeteners that cause GI symptoms and offer no nutritional value. We certainly want to avoid these things, but it’s not always clear that they’re included by just looking at the supplement facts list. 

As a public health professional, I aim to help individuals peel back the curtain so they can make an informed decision about what they consume. Today, hundreds of multivitamins sit on virtual and physical store shelves, making it challenging to pick the best one for you. At Breaking Muscle, we’ve decided to make this process easier by uncovering the eight best multivitamins on the marketplace today. Keep reading to find out which one is best for you and what you should pay attention to when reviewing the numerous options. 

How We Chose the Best Multivitamin

Coming up with a list of the best multivitamins was no easy feat. Nonetheless, we wanted to simplify the selection process for you, so we decided to put about two dozen multivitamins to the test. 

To narrow it down, the Breaking Muscle Team created a list of important factors that matter when picking a multivitamin. Those factors included assessing the ingredients, taste, smell, swallow-ability, side effects, third-party testing, and initial results. One by one, we tried and debriefed multivitamins and eliminated those that didn’t meet our standards. The result of this comprehensive testing process is the list you see below, with each multivitamin categorized based on the type of person it would benefit the most.  

Our Top Picks for the Best Multivitamin

Best Multivitamin Overall: Transparent Labs Multivitamin

Transparent Labs Multivitamin
4.0
  • Form: Capsule
  • Daily dose: Four capsules
  • Cost per serving: $1.00
  • Key vitamins and minerals: Vitamin D, calcium, thiamin, vitamin B12, vitamin A, vitamin C, zinc
  • Certifications: Informed Choice Certified
Check Price

Pros

  • High-quality ingredients 
  • Informed Choice certified (suitable for athletes) 
  • Provides therapeutic doses 
  • Free of unnecessary additives and fillers

Cons

  • Doesn’t include all B vitamins 
  • Not vegan-friendly

Whether you’re an athlete who has to watch the ingredients you consume or an individual who simply prefers premium ingredients, the Transparent Labs Multivitamin is a solid choice. Their formula consists of 19 essential vitamins and minerals that may reduce fatigue and support a healthy immune system. In addition, these nutrients are bioavailable, meaning they should be absorbed adequately so you can get the most out of them. The formula also includes supporting herbs and antioxidants, making it easily one of the best multivitamins overall. 

What’s impressive about this multivitamin is that it uses therapeutic doses, meaning that more of a nutrient is included than what’s needed in a day. Out of 19 vitamins and minerals, 11 of them provide more than 100 percent of the daily value. For example, there are 200 micrograms (mcg) of vitamin B12, which is 8,333 percent of the daily value. Although that sounds like a lot, taking more than the daily recommended dose isn’t considered harmful because the body doesn’t store excess B12. What’s not used will be passed through urine. 

Vitamin B12 assists with creating DNA and also keeps our nerves and blood cells healthy. Those deficient in Vitamin B12 often feel weak and tired, which might explain why some people taking this multivitamin feel more energetic. 

Transparent Labs’ formulation also includes four other B vitamins (B1, B5, B6, and B7) but lacks the other three (B2, B3, and B9). In particular, the inclusion of B9 (folate/folic acid) would have been nice, as one study revealed that it may help prevent cardiovascular disease when combined with B12. (1) Nonetheless, this formulation still includes many other vital nutrients in high doses, like vitamin C, vitamin D, vitamin K, and chromium. 

One 2017 study revealed that vitamin C supplementation can prevent and treat respiratory and systemic infections. (2) A 2022 evidence-based review found that vitamin D may reduce the risk of falls, improve pain in those with fibromyalgia, and reduce the risk of type 2 diabetes in patients with prediabetes. (3)

Research also shows that vitamin K assists with bone formation, insulin sensitivity, and preventing cancer. (4) The mineral chromium (a.k.a. Chromax) helps with the absorption of carbohydrates, proteins, and fats and aids blood glucose regulation. While it is found in some foods, it’s only in small amounts, so it’s great that they provide 67 micrograms here (193 percent of the daily value). 

The inclusion of organic ashwagandha, Coenzyme Q10, and boron set this vitamin and mineral supplement apart from the rest. Ashwagandha is an adaptogen that can improve how the body handles stress, boosts cell-mediated immunity, and protects against cellular damage. (5) Coenzyme Q10, a fat-soluble compound, may reduce muscle pain and improve exercise performance. (6) Lastly, boron is necessary for the growth of bone and wound healing. In addition, it can reduce levels of inflammatory biomarkers. (7)

Overall, this dietary supplement has a lot to offer, and it does this at a reasonable price. A 30-serving container is $29.00. While that might very well be more than the ones you see in retail stores, it includes ingredients you likely wouldn’t find in those.

Plus, it has an Informed Choice certification, meaning that each month, at least one lot and/or batch is randomly tested for banned substances. One downside, however, is that one serving is equal to four capsules, which will be a no-go for many. 

Best Multivitamin for Men Over 50: Lifeforce Peak Healthspan

Lifeforce Peak Healthspan
3.7
  • Form: Capsule 
  • Daily dose: Three capsules
  • Cost per serving: $3.83
  • Key vitamins and minerals: Vitamin D, niacin, vitamin B12, copper 
  • Certifications: N/A
Check Price

Pros

  • Addresses the nine hallmarks of aging 
  • Includes therapeutic dosages of some nutrients 
  • May boost energy and immune support

Cons

  • No reviews on their website 
  • Expensive 
  • Includes sesame, which some people may be allergic to

Guys over 50 looking for a men’s multivitamin formulated with them in mind should consider Lifeforce’s Peak Healthspan. It has therapeutic dosages of vitamins and minerals that may help with cognitive health, multi-organ function, and cellular resilience. In addition, it includes unique blends of botanical nutrients known to assist with aging gracefully.

A quick look at the supplement facts label will reveal that this multivitamin has 156 percent of the daily value of vitamin D. But why so much? According to one study, vitamin D deficiency is common in older American men, especially during the spring and winter. (31) Interestingly, older men commonly deal with conditions that are potentially linked to a vitamin D deficiency, so supplementation is vital. 

Niacin, also known as vitamin B3, is found in ample amounts, too (813 percent of the daily value). This vitamin helps to convert nutrients into energy, makes fats and cholesterol, and creates and repairs DNA. The latter is especially important to older adults, as aging naturally results in cell damage, which can lead to cell death or mutation. (32) Fortunately, the antioxidant effects associated with niacin may be able to help. It also plays a role in helping the body create sex and stress-related hormones. This may explain why niacin aids in improving erectile function in some men. (33)

This multivitamin features NAD3, a propriety blend of Wasabi extract, theacrine, and cuprous niacin (copper and niacin). In a 2020 study on Wasabi, researchers found that this spice prevented the development of hypertension in rodents that followed a high-fat, high-carb diet. (34) Another study published that same year noted that it could assist in managing obesity, so Wasabi shows much promise. (35)

Theacrine is an alkaloid that’s structured similarly to caffeine and may increase physical performance. In a 2019 study, researchers found that male and female soccer players who used TeaCrine® (a compound containing pure theacrine) had increased performance capacity and endurance. (36

Another ingredient, BetaPower, shows some potential, too. Supplementation of betaine anhydrous has been shown to increase strength and power. (37) One study even revealed that it may reduce adipose tissue, which plays a role in age-related metabolic dysfunction. (38)(39) Adipose tissue causes inflammation and interferes with immune and skeletal muscle cells, so it’s nice to see an ingredient that combats that. 

For a 30-serving container, where one serving equals three capsules, you can expect to pay about $115. Peak Healthspan should be taken before lunch as it may cause jitteriness if taken too close to bedtime. In addition, not everyone requires three capsules, so pay attention to your body and adjust as needed. Lastly, it’s unclear if this men’s multivitamin is third-party tested, and it does include one allergen: sesame. 

Best Multivitamin for Men: Onnit Total Human

Onnit Total Human
3.9
  • Form: Capsule packs
  • Daily dose: One pack during the day and one at night
  • Cost per serving: $4.50
  • Key vitamins and minerals: B vitamins, calcium, magnesium, vitamin E, vitamin C, zinc
  • Certifications: N/A
Check Price

Pros

  • Therapeutic doses of vitamins and minerals 
  • Daytime and nighttime support 
  • Money-back guarantee

Cons

  • Expensive 
  • Several pills needed per dose
  • Not safe for those with shellfish allergies
  • May not be third-party tested

Fellas, are you looking for a solid men’s multivitamin to boost your energy during the day and help you relax and recover at night? The Onnit Total Human multivitamin has just the key nutrients for that! However, it is probably unlike any other supplements you’ve tried. It includes two packets and multiple pills. You’re supposed to take one packet in the morning and another at night.

One of our Breaking Muscle staff members who tested this multivitamin said he was able to swallow all the pills in one pack at the same time, but other people may want to break it up because it is a lot.

The daytime packet includes ingredients that may help with cognitive function, cardiovascular endurance, bone strength, and energy production. For example, there are therapeutic doses of all the B vitamins, vitamin E, and chromium. The packet has numerous trademarked blends, too, like the flow blend, performance blend, and immune blend, just to name a few. 

To give you an example, the performance blend includes cordyceps, green tea, ashwagandha, astragalus, and Rhodiola. Cordyceps is a fungus that may delay the aging process, increase natural endurance, and nourish the body’s immune system. (16) Rhodiola has traditionally been used to manage stress-induced fatigue and improve physical performance. (17)

The nighttime packet has ingredients that can promote relaxation, immune system support, and total body support. You’ll find therapeutic doses of vitamin B6 and vitamin C, which are both associated with enhancing immune function. The nighttime pills also contain vitamin D. A study found that men with low levels of that nutrient may be twice as likely to have a heart attack, so the inclusion of vitamin D in Onnit Total Human is noteworthy. (18)

There’s also a trademarked tranquility blend with valerian root, chamomile, lemon balm, and jujube. Valerian root has historically been used as a sleep aid, and chamomile can help promote calmness. (19)(20) Lemon balm may improve symptoms associated with anxiety and depression, while jujube has anti-inflammatory and anti-bacterial functions. (21)(22)

Some ingredients show up in both the daytime and nighttime packets. For instance, turmeric, fish oil, krill oil, spirulina, and chlorella are there to encourage all-day general wellness. Turmeric, a spice often used for medicinal purposes, can help to manage inflammatory and oxidative conditions. (23) It also has the potential to boost recovery and performance in those who exercise. Krill oil is said to help with muscle recovery following resistance exercise and may even assist with brain development and improved cognition. (24)(25)

With all these ingredients, you would think there’d be some notable side effects, but our tester only experienced more vivid dreams. A couple of consumers said it made them feel sluggish, though, so it depends on the person. My partner, who was deployed overseas with guys who used this exact supplement, said that people swore by them. Since they couldn’t follow a balanced diet, these came in handy. 

For around $137.95, you’d get a 30-day supply of various vitamins, minerals, and botanical nutrients. If you’re not ready to completely take the plunge, consider getting a seven-day supply for about $25.97. Onnit offers a Keep-It Money-Back Guarantee, so if you get a trial size and don’t like it, you can get a refund without returning the product. 

Best Multivitamin for Women: Ritual Essential for Women Multivitamin 18+

Ritual Essential for Women Multivitamin 18+
4.0
  • Form: Capsule
  • Daily dose: Two 
  • Cost per serving: $1.10
  • Key vitamins and minerals: Folate, omega-3 DHA, vitamin B12, vitamin D, iron, vitamin E
  • Certifications: USP Verified, Non-GMO Project-verified
Check Price

Pros

  • Traceable ingredients 
  • Vegan-friendly 
  • 30-day money-back guarantee 
  • Backed by a peer-reviewed study 
  • Certified B Corporation

Cons

  • Lacks nutrients often found in other multivitamins 
  • Pricey 
  • Requires a subscription 
  • A few complained of heartburn

It’s not every day that a multivitamin has been peer-reviewed, but the Ritual Essential for Women Multivitamin 18+ has, which is why it’s our top choice for a women’s multivitamin.

A bottle of the Ritual Essential Women's Multivitamin 18+ on a black surface with a wood background
The Ritual Essential Multivitamin for Women 18+ at the Breaking Muscle testing facility

The study divulged that women who used their multivitamin supplement had seen increases in vitamin D and omega-3 DHA levels in 12 weeks. (8) While this is certainly promising, there were some study limitations. For one, the participants were young and healthy, so it’s unclear if these vitamins would be helpful to someone with a metabolic condition. In addition, it’s unclear how much physical activity or sunlight exposure participants had, which could’ve altered vitamin D and omega-3 levels. Therefore, keep these things in mind as you assess if this is the best women’s multivitamin for you. 

What’s interesting here is that this daily multivitamin does not offer as many essential nutrients as others. Ritual stands by the “less is more” phenomenon. For instance, you’re not going to find copper, selenium, calcium, or vitamin C in this product because 1) they feel you’re probably already getting enough of those nutrients from your diet, and 2) too much of some nutrients can negatively impact another.

According to WomensHealth.gov, the following essential nutrients are important for women’s health: vitamins B9, B12, and D, as well as calcium and iron. The Ritual multivitamin includes four out of five of those but also includes a few other ingredients. But first, let’s clarify why the four vitamins we need and that are included in this formula are important. 

Vitamin B9 (folate) is crucial for women, especially if they plan on getting pregnant. The body needs it to make new cells and assist with protein metabolism. Not having enough during pregnancy could result in congenital disabilities. This is why you’ll usually see this ingredient in prenatal multivitamins. It may help with fertility as well. One study even revealed that a high intake of supplemental folic acid (>800 micrograms per day) correlated with increased implantation rates, clinical pregnancy, and live births. (9) This supplement happens to have 1,000 micrograms. 

Studies show that adequate levels of vitamin B12 are associated with maintaining pregnancy and ovarian health. (10) Ritual’s multivitamin provides 333 percent of the daily value, so women will get a dosage that’s generous enough to accommodate their nutritional needs. 

RELATED: Best Probiotic for Women

Then there’s vitamin D, a nutrient needed to help absorb calcium and maintain bone health. (11) As women age, they experience a decrease in estrogen, a hormone that prevents bones from getting weaker. Ritual’s multivitamin can help. In fact, one study found a 23–43% reduction in the risk of a hip fracture in women who used vitamin D3. (12) Another study even discovered that increased vitamin D levels could improve muscle performance. (13)

Our bodies need iron to create hemoglobin, but menstruation, childbirth, and pregnancy can cause an iron deficiency. Such a deficiency can lead to decreased exercise capacity, extreme fatigue, and poor work performance. (14) Thankfully, this multivitamin provides 44 percent of the daily value. 

Other nutrients found in this supplement include vitamin E, magnesium, boron, omega-3 fatty acids, and vitamin K2. A study revealed that vitamin E is highly beneficial to female reproductive health. (15) This essential vitamin is associated with improved endometrial thickness, reduced risk of pregnancy complications and pelvic pain, and a slowed progression of gynecological cancer. 

I can’t forget to mention that each ingredient is traceable, meaning you can find the supplier and final place of manufacturing on Ritual’s website. This multivitamin is also USP (United States Pharmacopeia)-Verified. Such a designation lets consumers know that this product was created following the FDA’s current Good Manufacturing Practices and doesn’t include harmful levels of certain contaminants. Their delayed-release capsules are made with their patented beadlet in oil technology, which is said to help with absorbency. There’s also a hint of mint to make taking two pills a day more enjoyable. 

Besides the subscription model and the $33 per month price tag, users are generally satisfied with this multivitamin. The Breaking Muscle product testing team enjoys the minty flavor and finds the capsules easy to swallow. They also noted that they didn’t experience any side effects, while other multivitamin tablets cause stomach upset.

For more, check out our full Ritual Vitamins Review.

Best Men’s Multivitamin for Testosterone: XWERKS Rise

XWERKS Rise
3.8
  • Form: Capsule
  • Daily dose: Two 
  • Cost per serving: $1.63
  • Key vitamins and minerals: Zinc, tongkat ali powder, shilajit extract, BioPerine, and boron
  • Certifications: N/A
Check Price

Pros

  • Research-backed ingredients  
  • 30-day refund policy 
  • May help boost energy

Cons

  • Potential side effects 
  • Few customer reviews 
  • No third-party testing

Looking for a multivitamin that may help boost your testosterone levels? If yes, consider XWERKS Rise. Its unique formula may naturally optimize nutrient and mineral intake so you can become stronger and feel more energized. Admittedly, this one has the most unrecognizable active ingredients compared to other multivitamins on this list. Besides zinc and boron, the rest will leave you wondering, “What in the world is this?” As a result, I’ll explain each ingredient so you can discern if XWERKS Rise will meet your needs. 

Before jumping into the supplement facts, let me clarify why testosterone is important. Testosterone is a sex hormone that contributes to muscle size and strength because it stimulates protein synthesis. It gives men masculine characteristics and is especially important if you’re bulking. Therefore, a lack of it could stand in the way of your fitness goals. 

Although exercise, particularly resistance training, can boost serum testosterone concentration to some degree, factors like age, stress, poor sleep hygiene, and a higher body weight could inhibit that. (42)(43) In fact, research shows that after age 35, there is often a decline in circulating testosterone concentration. (44) As a result, having a solution like XWERKS Rise could make a difference in muscle optimization. 

You’ll see 15 milligrams of zinc on the supplement facts label, which makes up 136 percent of the daily value. A 2022 study revealed a correlation between zinc deficiencies and low testosterone levels. (45) Another study looked at men who received 30 milligrams of zinc daily and found increased testosterone levels in their bodies. (46) Therefore, it’s safe to assume that including this nutrient in XWERKS Rise is one way to promote muscle building. 

Tongkat ali powder is an herbal medicinal plant that may increase testosterone levels and lessen symptoms associated with aging changes in males. In a study of 13 physically active men who received the plant, researchers discovered that all participants had increased free testosterone and muscular force. (47)

Shilajit extract, a powder found in the rocks of the Himalayas, is associated with boosting testosterone levels, too. A clinical study showed a significant increase in testosterone in men aged 45 to 55 who received 250 milligrams of Shilajit twice daily. (48)

Even BioPerine, a type of black pepper that may be easier for the body to absorb, impacts testosterone. In a 2018 study, rats were given five to 10 milligrams of BioPerine in Vitro, and their testosterone levels increased as well. (49)

So, does XWERKS Rise work? Well, the research behind its ingredients certainly suggests that it does! But, as with any supplement, it’s no miracle solution. In addition, you should use caution with supplements like this, as increasing your testosterone levels could come with some undesirable side effects, like mood and skin changes. 

For around $49, you’ll get a 30-serving container. You’re supposed to take two capsules daily, and XWERKS suggests you pair it with their Ashwa (ashwagandha) gummies. 

RELATED: Best Testosterone Boosters

Best Multivitamin for Women Over 50: Ritual Essential for Women Multivitamin 50+

Ritual Essential for Women Multivitamin 50+
4.0
  • Form: Capsule
  • Daily dose: Two 
  • Cost per serving: $1.30
  • Key vitamins and minerals: Folate, omega-3 DHA, vitamin B12, vitamin D, vitamin E, magnesium
  • Certifications: Non-GMO Project-verified, certified carbon-free
Check Price

Pros

  • Vegan-friendly 
  • Traceable ingredients 
  • Certified B Corporation 
  • Third-party tested
  • 30-day money-back guarantee

Cons

  • Requires subscription 
  • Fishy aftertaste 

For women over 50, it’s important to get a good helping of calcium, potassium, omega-3 fats, and vitamins B12 and D. After menopause, women require more calcium and vitamin D to combat osteoporosis and prevent fractures. (26)

As we age, it also becomes more difficult for our bodies to absorb vitamin B12. (27) Research on omega-3 fatty acids even shows that those who consume this nutrient may have less cognitive decline. In addition, a 2021 study showed evidence that fish oil improves heart health. (28) Therefore, finding a multivitamin that includes at least some of these essential nutrients that support healthy aging is critical. The Ritual Essential for Women Multivitamin 50+ checks some of those boxes. 

Like the other Ritual multivitamins on this list, this one also includes traceable ingredients and a delayed-release capsule design with a mint flavor. It has no artificial colorants or GMOs and is free of major allergens and gluten. What’s different, though, is that there are more of the vitamins E, B12, and K, as well as high-quality magnesium.

Some research found that women over 65 taking vitamin E had a 26 percent decrease in nonfatal heart attacks and a 49 percent decrease in cardiovascular death rates. In addition, vitamin K may have a protective effect against age-related conditions like osteoarthritis and cardiovascular disease. (29) Also, growing older is associated with a change in magnesium metabolism, and deficits in this mineral are connected with sleep disorders, muscular diseases, psychiatric conditions, and bone fragility. (30) So, including more of those nutrients in this formulation is a good idea. 

While it’s missing calcium, your current diet likely already satisfies this nutrient need. Calcium is found in many food sources, like yogurt, kale, spinach, tofu, and even almond milk. This multivitamin includes calcium-helper nutrients, though, like boron, D3, K2, and magnesium. You’ll also notice that iron isn’t included in their formulation, and there’s a good reason for that. The need for iron decreases following menopause; thus, extra iron isn’t recommended for older women. In addition, it could cause GI side effects, like heartburn, cramps, and nausea. 

The stomach acid-resistant vegan capsule does help with absorption, but the form of some of these ingredients plays a role, too. For example, Ritual uses chelated magnesium, which may be more easily absorbed by the body.

For $39.00, you’re getting a 30-day supply of a well-formulated multivitamin that aids in supporting the health of older adults. Each batch is tested in-house, and third-party testing is occasionally done as well for good measure. However, do note that this is a subscription, so once you purchase one, you’ll automatically be sent another one a month later. If you want to change or cancel your subscription, you can do so from your account page on the Ritual website. 

RELATED: Best Greens Powder

Best Women’s Multivitamin Gummy: Olly Women’s Multivitamin Gummy

OLLY Women's Multivitamin Gummy
4.7
  • Form: Gummy
  • Daily dose: Two 
  • Cost per serving: $0.31
  • Key vitamins and minerals: Vitamin A, vitamin C, vitamin D, biotin, zinc, B vitamins
  • Certifications: NSF Certified
Check Price

Pros

  • 30-day money-back guarantee 
  • Affordable 
  • Certified B Corporation
  • Available in most retailers 
  • Third-party testing

Cons

  • May arrive melted 
  • Unpleasant scent 
  • Only available in one flavor 

Whether I’m looking for gummy vitamins at Target or Amazon, one women’s multivitamin supplement I know I will see on the shelves is Olly. It’s practically everywhere! Plus, its affordable price is attractive to ladies on a budget. 

Olly is void of artificial flavors and colors. It provides 18 essential nutrients, including all eight B vitamins. The other women’s multivitamins on this list are missing all of them except B9 and B12, so it’s nice to see them here. Although B1 (thiamin) deficiencies are rare, pregnant and breastfeeding women need more of it. The same goes for vitamin B2. Vegans, vegetarians, and pregnant women are at greater risk of deficiency, so a little boost could go a long way. 

By taking this multivitamin, you’ll be able to satisfy 100 percent of the daily value for vitamins D, E, B5, B6, B9, and iodine. In women of reproductive age, iodine deficiency is becoming more common. (40) It can lead to fertility issues, an enlarged thyroid gland, thinning hair, and impaired mental function. 

There are also nutrients that more than exceed the recommended daily value, such as vitamin B12 and biotin. Biotin assists with breaking down the carbohydrates, proteins, and fats in food. However, it’s also popular in the beauty industry, as it’s claimed to help with brittle and thinning hair. (41) This multivitamin has 150 micrograms of biotin, which makes up 500 percent of the daily value. While that might seem like way too much, it’s still considered safe. B12 and biotin are water-soluble, so taking high doses is still safe since you’ll just end up urinating what your body doesn’t need. 

As previously mentioned, this multivitamin is NSF Certified, meaning NSF International conducts random onsite inspections of products and manufacturing facilities to ensure they meet specific standards. They review supplement labels to ensure what’s stated is actually in the bottle, conduct a contamination review, and complete a toxicology review to verify product formulation. Since the Food and Drug Administration doesn’t assess and approve dietary supplements before they hit the market, it’s always nice when a company goes through this extra third-party testing. 

The majority of consumers love these berry-flavored gummies but aren’t a fan of the smell. A member of the Breaking Muscle team even says they taste pretty good but smell kind of odd. She also mentions that they have a weird aftertaste. Also, these wouldn’t be suitable for those following a vegetarian or plant-based diet. Gelatin is one of their ingredients, and it’s made from animal collagen. 

Overall, for about $13.99, you get a lot of bang for your buck. Olly gummies are easy to take, offer several essential nutrients, and come from a Certified B Corporation. Companies with that designation must meet certain environmental and social performance standards.  

Best Multivitamin for Kids: Nature Made’s Kids First® Multivitamin + Omega-3 Gummies

Nature Made Kids First Multivitamin
4.0
  • Form: Gummy 
  • Daily dose: One to two gummies
  • Cost per serving: $0.25
  • Key vitamins and minerals: Vitamins D3 and B12, Omega-3
  • Certifications: USP Verified
Check Price

Pros

  • Tasty
  • Affordable 
  • Easy to take

Cons

  • Contains added sugars
  • Not vegetarian or vegan-friendly

We all know that good nutrition is necessary for proper child development, but getting kids to eat nutritious food isn’t always easy. They either don’t like the taste or the texture. Or maybe they’re not picky at all, but you just want to make sure they’re getting what they need. Whatever the case, a great multivitamin for kids, like Nature Made’s Kids First® Multivitamin + Omega-3 Gummies, is a practical solution. 

Nutritional deficiencies among children aren’t as likely in the United States, but one of the most common deficiencies is vitamin D. (50) Nature Made Kids First Multivitamin contains 25 micrograms of vitamin D. This makes up 125 percent of the daily value for children over four years old, which is plenty. Kids need this important nutrient to build strong bones and teeth. 

Children need a good supply of B vitamins too, as those assist with energy production, metabolism, and more. (51) While not all of them are included here, four of them are: B3, B6, B9, and B12. A 2016 study established that vitamin B12 plays a significant role in child growth and brain development. (52) Fortunately, three micrograms of that is provided in this formula (equal to 125 percent of the daily value). 

Some of the other vitamins and minerals you’ll find here are vitamins A, C, E, and zinc. Vitamin A helps with vision and cell growth, vitamin C and zinc are necessary for combatting infections, and vitamin E assists with neurodevelopment in children. (53)(54

One other key ingredient in this formula is omega-3 fatty acids (113.5 milligrams). A 2020 study found that omega-3 supplementation during childhood may reduce the risk of allergic diseases, like asthma and eczema. (55) This is huge, as asthma is the leading chronic disease in children and could result in quality of life and study performance issues. (56)

This Nature Made kids multivitamin is free of artificial flavors and sweeteners, synthetic dyes, gluten, and high fructose corn syrup. It does have two grams of added sugar, though. One consumer commented that the sugar coating leaves a bad aftertaste and leaves her kiddos with sticky fingers. 

For $17.59, you’ll get 70 gummies, which should last a little over a month or two, but how long they last really depends on the child’s age. It’s suggested that children between four and 13 take one a day, while those aged 14 to 18 should take two daily. Before you buy, understand that this product contains gelatin, so it’s not the best choice for vegans or vegetarians. Nonetheless, most kids find them tasty, and the gummies are USP-verified. 

What Are the Benefits of Taking a Multivitamin?

Many people take multivitamins these days, but what is the benefit of doing so? I’ll share two major reasons below. 

Potential Health Benefits 

During different stages of our lives, our bodies need more of certain vitamins and minerals. The multivitamins for men and women over 50 often include more vitamin B12, while those for women of childbearing age contain more folic acid. Taking certain medications or having malabsorption conditions could change or prevent how your body digests and absorbs nutrients.

Imagine you have a cold. What do you reach for besides medicine? It’s probably vitamin C, which may boost your immune system.

Another example is if you notice problems with your hair and/or skin. It’s not uncommon to seek nutrients like vitamin E and/or biotin. 

Convenience

Multivitamins help busy folks fill their nutritional gaps. Many of us are on the go and simply can’t make multiple balanced meals daily. Instead of going without your body’s nutrients, you could just take a capsule or gummy. 

When Is the Best Time to Take a Multivitamin?

Most of the time, it’s best to take your multivitamin in the morning with food. However, double-check the instructions on the container to be sure. Some products, like the nighttime packet that comes with Onnit’s Total Human multivitamin, are meant to be taken before bed. 

What To Consider When Buying a Multivitamin

I’ve purchased A LOT of multivitamins over the years, and honestly, I based my purchasing decisions on brand popularity and cost. Now that I’m more intentional about things like this, I pay attention to so much more than that. Unfortunately, many of those multivitamins ended up sitting in my medicine cabinet far past the expiration date, and I don’t want the same thing to happen to you. Therefore, here’s what you’ll want to consider when buying a multivitamin. 

Individual Needs

Once upon a time, I followed a plant-based diet, and I can remember how tired I used to feel. After researching, I realized that I was more than likely nutrient deficient and decided to add a multivitamin to fill in the gaps. I eventually started to feel better. 

Today, I’m back consuming some meats, but because I live in a cold state where I tend to hibernate for four to six months, I occasionally lack vitamin D. As a result, my doctor urges me to take a vitamin D3 supplement. 

I’m sharing all that to clarify that you should pick multivitamins based on your individual needs. We all consume different foods and reside in different areas, so get nutrients you might not get from your diet or environment. 

Dosage

When selecting a multivitamin, pay attention to the dosage of each ingredient. Also, take a look at the serving size to learn how much you’d need to take to get the dosage on the bottle. Some will say you must take two pills, while others might say eight. Taking less than the stated serving size may mean you don’t get the full effect, but taking more could be harmful. For example, consuming an excessive amount of magnesium could lead to difficulty breathing, muscle weakness, and/or an irregular heartbeat. 

Percent Daily Values

In addition to the dosage, look at the Percent Daily Values (% DV). This tells us how much a nutrient in a serving contributes to an individual on a 2,000-calorie diet. To give you some perspective, the Ritual Essential for Women Multivitamin 18+ provides 45 percent of the daily value of vitamin E, so you’d need to get the rest from somewhere else. However, it also contains 250 percent of the daily value for folate, which should more than satisfy your need for this nutrient. 

Ultimately, it all depends on your individual needs. Those with malabsorption issues may require more of certain nutrients to maintain good health. It’s best to check in with your physician and/or a registered dietitian to be sure. 

Pre-Existing Health Conditions

Those with pre-existing conditions should avoid some vitamins and minerals. This is mainly because the prescription medications you take for your condition may not interact well with them. Fish oil, for instance, may increase the risk of bleeding, which isn’t good if you’re on a medication that reduces blood clotting. 

Potential Interactions With Other Medications

Before taking a new multivitamin supplement, ensure it won’t negatively interfere with your medications. For instance, curcumin, a substance in turmeric, may change how your body interacts with antihistamines, antidepressants, antibiotics, and more. (57)

You might’ve also noticed that most multivitamins only have a small dose of potassium. A large dosage of this nutrient is banned because many people take potassium channel blockers, a type of blood pressure medication. These can actually raise your potassium levels and even lead to cardiac arrest. Therefore, they simply limit how much supplements can contain to prevent a drug-nutrient interaction. 

If you’re unsure if you should be taking certain nutrients along with your medications, call your pharmacist and/or doctor. It’s always better to be safe! 

Form

On this best multivitamins list, you probably noticed that many options came in capsule form. However, we included some soft gels and gummies, too. Always pay attention to the form and be honest with yourself about which form you prefer. If you know you hate capsules, you should probably look to soft gels and/or gummies. If you don’t like pills at all, gummies are ultimately a better alternative.

However, keep in mind that gummies tend to have added sugar and extra ingredients. Take a look at the Olly Women’s Multi, for example. It has two grams of added sugar and over 10 “other ingredients.” 

Certifications and Third-Party Testing

Many people are shocked by this, but the FDA doesn’t review dietary supplements before they become available for purchase. As a result, companies can sell multivitamins without verifying if they’re safe or effective. This is precisely why third-party testing and certifications are so important. They show that the company took the extra step to verify if their product is safe. 

Brands like Transparent Labs and Ritual have batches tested for contaminants and/or banned substances. For consumers, this provides extra peace of mind. After all, no one wants to take a multivitamin to potentially improve their health just to find mercury and lead in it. 

Certifications, like the one from the Non-GMO Project, ensure that companies follow guidelines and standards that limit the risk of genetically modified organisms. If you pay attention, you’ll notice that many multivitamins say “non-GMO,” but they don’t have the Non-GMO Project Verified seal. 

Ultimately, a product not being certified doesn’t mean it’s harmful or unsafe, but you do want to take precautions. If you’d prefer multivitamins that are third-party tested, look for Informed Choice/Sport, USP-Verified, NSF, and/or USDA Organic marks on the container. 

Final Thoughts

I, and so many others on the Breaking Muscle team, have tried multivitamins that we eventually abandoned because they didn’t give us the results we hoped for. We don’t want you to have that same experience. As a result, we put this round-up together to help you make an informed decision and not waste your hard-earned money. After all, many of these options aren’t cheap! 

Be sure to check with your doctor before taking a new multivitamin. While they are generally safe, ensuring they are specifically safe for you is best.   

Best Multivitamin: Side-by-Side Comparison

Best Multivitamin Overall
Best Multivitamin for Women
Best Multivitamin for Men
Best Multivitamin for Women Over 50
Best Multivitamin for Men Over 50
Best Women's Multivitamin Gummy
Best Men's Multivitamin for Testosterone
Best Multivitamin for Kids
Description:
  • Form: Capsule
  • Daily dose: Four capsules
  • Cost per serving: $1.00
  • Key vitamins and minerals: Vitamin D, calcium, thiamin, vitamin B12, vitamin A, vitamin C, zinc
  • Certifications: Informed Choice Certified
Description:
  • Form: Capsule
  • Daily dose: Two 
  • Cost per serving: $1.10
  • Key vitamins and minerals: Folate, omega-3 DHA, vitamin B12, vitamin D, iron, vitamin E
  • Certifications: USP Verified, Non-GMO Project-verified
Description:
  • Form: Capsule packs
  • Daily dose: One pack during the day and one at night
  • Cost per serving: $4.50
  • Key vitamins and minerals: B vitamins, calcium, magnesium, vitamin E, vitamin C, zinc
  • Certifications: N/A
Description:
  • Form: Capsule
  • Daily dose: Two 
  • Cost per serving: $1.30
  • Key vitamins and minerals: Folate, omega-3 DHA, vitamin B12, vitamin D, vitamin E, magnesium
  • Certifications: Non-GMO Project-verified, certified carbon-free
Description:
  • Form: Capsule 
  • Daily dose: Three capsules
  • Cost per serving: $3.83
  • Key vitamins and minerals: Vitamin D, niacin, vitamin B12, copper 
  • Certifications: N/A
Description:
  • Form: Gummy
  • Daily dose: Two 
  • Cost per serving: $0.31
  • Key vitamins and minerals: Vitamin A, vitamin C, vitamin D, biotin, zinc, B vitamins
  • Certifications: NSF Certified
Description:
  • Form: Capsule
  • Daily dose: Two 
  • Cost per serving: $1.63
  • Key vitamins and minerals: Zinc, tongkat ali powder, shilajit extract, BioPerine, and boron
  • Certifications: N/A
Description:
  • Form: Gummy 
  • Daily dose: One to two gummies
  • Cost per serving: $0.25
  • Key vitamins and minerals: Vitamins D3 and B12, Omega-3
  • Certifications: USP Verified
Best Multivitamin Overall
Description:
  • Form: Capsule
  • Daily dose: Four capsules
  • Cost per serving: $1.00
  • Key vitamins and minerals: Vitamin D, calcium, thiamin, vitamin B12, vitamin A, vitamin C, zinc
  • Certifications: Informed Choice Certified
Best Multivitamin for Women
Description:
  • Form: Capsule
  • Daily dose: Two 
  • Cost per serving: $1.10
  • Key vitamins and minerals: Folate, omega-3 DHA, vitamin B12, vitamin D, iron, vitamin E
  • Certifications: USP Verified, Non-GMO Project-verified
Best Multivitamin for Men
Description:
  • Form: Capsule packs
  • Daily dose: One pack during the day and one at night
  • Cost per serving: $4.50
  • Key vitamins and minerals: B vitamins, calcium, magnesium, vitamin E, vitamin C, zinc
  • Certifications: N/A
Best Multivitamin for Women Over 50
Description:
  • Form: Capsule
  • Daily dose: Two 
  • Cost per serving: $1.30
  • Key vitamins and minerals: Folate, omega-3 DHA, vitamin B12, vitamin D, vitamin E, magnesium
  • Certifications: Non-GMO Project-verified, certified carbon-free
Best Multivitamin for Men Over 50
Description:
  • Form: Capsule 
  • Daily dose: Three capsules
  • Cost per serving: $3.83
  • Key vitamins and minerals: Vitamin D, niacin, vitamin B12, copper 
  • Certifications: N/A
Best Women's Multivitamin Gummy
Description:
  • Form: Gummy
  • Daily dose: Two 
  • Cost per serving: $0.31
  • Key vitamins and minerals: Vitamin A, vitamin C, vitamin D, biotin, zinc, B vitamins
  • Certifications: NSF Certified
Best Men's Multivitamin for Testosterone
Description:
  • Form: Capsule
  • Daily dose: Two 
  • Cost per serving: $1.63
  • Key vitamins and minerals: Zinc, tongkat ali powder, shilajit extract, BioPerine, and boron
  • Certifications: N/A
Best Multivitamin for Kids
Description:
  • Form: Gummy 
  • Daily dose: One to two gummies
  • Cost per serving: $0.25
  • Key vitamins and minerals: Vitamins D3 and B12, Omega-3
  • Certifications: USP Verified

FAQs

Which brand of multivitamin is best?

The brand of a multivitamin isn’t everything, as less popular ones could still be good. However, brands do set an expectation. For example, if you want transparent labels and scientifically backed ingredients, Transparent Labs shines in this regard. If you desire traceable ingredients and extensive testing, Ritual is an excellent choice. Want products sold by a Certified B Corporation? Check out Olly. 

Ultimately, which brand you go with depends on your lifestyle and values. There’s something on our list that’ll cater to practically everyone. 

Is it healthy to take a multivitamin every day?

In general, the potential benefits associated with taking a multivitamin daily are greater than the potential risks. However, it’s best to check with your doctor first. 

What are the healthiest vitamins?

There are 13 essential vitamins that play a role in how your body grows and functions. Those vitamins are vitamins A, C, D, E, K, and the B vitamins. 

Does it really matter what brand of vitamins you buy?

Each brand follows different values, so choose the one that aligns with you. In the grand scheme of things, though, it doesn’t matter. 

Research

  1. Shah AK, Dhalla NS. Effectiveness of Some Vitamins in the Prevention of Cardiovascular Disease: A Narrative Review. Front Physiol. 2021;12:729255. Published 2021 Oct 8. doi:10.3389/fphys.2021.729255
  2. Carr AC, Maggini S. Vitamin C and Immune Function. Nutrients. 2017;9(11):1211. Published 2017 Nov 3. doi:10.3390/nu9111211
  3. Michael W, Couture AD, Swedlund M, Hampton A, Eglash A, Schrager S. An Evidence-Based Review of Vitamin D for Common and High-Mortality Conditions. J Am Board Fam Med. 2022;35(6):1217-1229. doi:10.3122/jabfm.2022.220115R1
  4. DiNicolantonio JJ, Bhutani J, O’Keefe JH. The health benefits of vitamin K. Open Heart. 2015;2(1):e000300. Published 2015 Oct 6. doi:10.1136/openhrt-2015-000300
  5. Singh N, Bhalla M, de Jager P, Gilca M. An overview on ashwagandha: a Rasayana (rejuvenator) of Ayurveda. Afr J Tradit Complement Altern Med. 2011;8(5 Suppl):208-213. doi:10.4314/ajtcam.v8i5S.9
  6. Drobnic F, Lizarraga MA, Caballero-García A, Cordova A. Coenzyme Q10 Supplementation and Its Impact on Exercise and Sport Performance in Humans: A Recovery or a Performance-Enhancing Molecule?. Nutrients. 2022;14(9):1811. Published 2022 Apr 26. doi:10.3390/nu14091811
  7. Pizzorno L. Nothing Boring About Boron. Integr Med (Encinitas). 2015;14(4):35-48.
  8. Osburn SC, Roberson PA, Medler JA, et al. Effects of 12-week multivitamin and omega-3 supplementation on micronutrient levels and red blood cell fatty acids in pre-menopausal women. Frontiers in Nutrition. 2021;8. doi:10.3389/fnut.2021.610382 
  9. Gaskins AJ, Afeiche MC, Wright DL, et al. Dietary folate and reproductive success among women undergoing assisted reproduction. Obstet Gynecol. 2014;124(4):801-809. doi:10.1097/AOG.0000000000000477
  10. Agbalalah T, Robert FO, Amabebe E. Impact of vitamin B12 on the reproductive health of women with sickle cell disease: a narrative review [published online ahead of print, 2023 Jul 1]. Reprod Fertil. 2023;4(3):e230015. doi:10.1530/RAF-23-0015
  11. Bohon TM, Goolsby MA. The Role of Vitamin D Supplements in Women’s Health. Clin Med Insights Womens Health. 2013;6:67-70. Published 2013 Oct 20. doi:10.4137/CMWH.S11067
  12. Khadilkar SS. The Emerging Role of Vitamin D3 in Women’s Health. J Obstet Gynaecol India. 2013;63(3):147-150. doi:10.1007/s13224-013-0420-4
  13. Broe KE, Chen TC, Weinberg J, Bischoff-Ferrari HA, Holick MF, Kiel DP. A higher dose of vitamin d reduces the risk of falls in nursing home residents: a randomized, multiple-dose study. J Am Geriatr Soc. 2007;55(2):234-239. doi:10.1111/j.1532-5415.2007.01048.x
  14. Benson CS, Shah A, Stanworth SJ, et al. The effect of iron deficiency and anaemia on women’s health. Anaesthesia. 2021;76 Suppl 4:84-95. doi:10.1111/anae.15405
  15. Md Amin NA, Sheikh Abdul Kadir SH, Arshad AH, Abdul Aziz N, Abdul Nasir NA, Ab Latip N. Are Vitamin E Supplementation Beneficial for Female Gynaecology Health and Diseases?. Molecules. 2022;27(6):1896. Published 2022 Mar 15. doi:10.3390/molecules27061896
  16. Ashraf SA, Elkhalifa AEO, Siddiqui AJ, et al. Cordycepin for Health and Wellbeing: A Potent Bioactive Metabolite of an Entomopathogenic Cordyceps Medicinal Fungus and Its Nutraceutical and Therapeutic Potential. Molecules. 2020;25(12):2735. Published 2020 Jun 12. doi:10.3390/molecules25122735
  17. Ivanova Stojcheva E, Quintela JC. The Effectiveness of Rhodiola rosea L. Preparations in Alleviating Various Aspects of Life-Stress Symptoms and Stress-Induced Conditions-Encouraging Clinical Evidence. Molecules. 2022;27(12):3902. Published 2022 Jun 17. doi:10.3390/molecules27123902
  18. Judd SE, Tangpricha V. Vitamin D deficiency and risk for cardiovascular disease. Am J Med Sci. 2009;338(1):40-44. doi:10.1097/MAJ.0b013e3181aaee91
  19. Shinjyo N, Waddell G, Green J. Valerian Root in Treating Sleep Problems and Associated Disorders-A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis. J Evid Based Integr Med. 2020;25:2515690X20967323. doi:10.1177/2515690X20967323
  20. Sah A, Naseef PP, Kuruniyan MS, Jain GK, Zakir F, Aggarwal G. A Comprehensive Study of Therapeutic Applications of Chamomile. Pharmaceuticals (Basel). 2022;15(10):1284. Published 2022 Oct 19. doi:10.3390/ph15101284
  21. Ghazizadeh J, Sadigh-Eteghad S, Marx W, et al. The effects of lemon balm (Melissa officinalis L.) on depression and anxiety in clinical trials: A systematic review and meta-analysis. Phytother Res. 2021;35(12):6690-6705. doi:10.1002/ptr.7252
  22. Hua Y, Xu XX, Guo S, et al. Wild Jujube (Ziziphus jujuba var. spinosa): A Review of Its Phytonutrients, Health Benefits, Metabolism, and Applications. J Agric Food Chem. 2022;70(26):7871-7886. doi:10.1021/acs.jafc.2c01905
  23. Hewlings SJ, Kalman DS. Curcumin: A Review of Its Effects on Human Health. Foods. 2017;6(10):92. Published 2017 Oct 22. doi:10.3390/foods6100092
  24. Yang S, He Q, Shi L, Wu Y. Impact of Antarctic krill oil supplementation on skeletal muscle injury recovery after resistance exercise. Eur J Nutr. 2023;62(3):1345-1356. doi:10.1007/s00394-022-03077-6
  25. van der Wurff ISM, von Schacky C, Bergeland T, et al. Effect of 1 Year Krill Oil Supplementation on Cognitive Achievement of Dutch Adolescents: A Double-Blind Randomized Controlled Trial. Nutrients. 2019;11(6):1230. Published 2019 May 30. doi:10.3390/nu11061230
  26. Aggarwal S, Nityanand. Calcium and vitamin D in post menopausal women. Indian J Endocrinol Metab. 2013;17(Suppl 3):S618-S620. doi:10.4103/2230-8210.123549
  27. Smith AD, Warren MJ, Refsum H. Vitamin B12. Adv Food Nutr Res. 2018;83:215-279. doi:10.1016/bs.afnr.2017.11.005
  28. Liao J, Xiong Q, Yin Y, Ling Z, Chen S. The Effects of Fish Oil on Cardiovascular Diseases: Systematical Evaluation and Recent Advance. Front Cardiovasc Med. 2022;8:802306. Published 2022 Jan 5. doi:10.3389/fcvm.2021.802306
  29. Simes DC, Viegas CSB, Araújo N, Marreiros C. Vitamin K as a Powerful Micronutrient in Aging and Age-Related Diseases: Pros and Cons from Clinical Studies. Int J Mol Sci. 2019;20(17):4150. Published 2019 Aug 25. doi:10.3390/ijms20174150
  30. Barbagallo M, Veronese N, Dominguez LJ. Magnesium in Aging, Health and Diseases. Nutrients. 2021;13(2):463. Published 2021 Jan 30. doi:10.3390/nu13020463
  31. Orwoll E, Nielson CM, Marshall LM, et al. Vitamin D deficiency in older men. J Clin Endocrinol Metab. 2009;94(4):1214-1222. doi:10.1210/jc.2008-1784
  32. Gorbunova V, Seluanov A, Mao Z, Hine C. Changes in DNA repair during aging. Nucleic Acids Res. 2007;35(22):7466-7474. doi:10.1093/nar/gkm756
  33. Ng CF, Lee CP, Ho AL, Lee VW. Effect of niacin on erectile function in men suffering erectile dysfunction and dyslipidemia. J Sex Med. 2011;8(10):2883-2893. doi:10.1111/j.1743-6109.2011.02414.x
  34. Thomaz FS, Altemani F, Panchal SK, Worrall S, Dekker Nitert M. The influence of wasabi on the gut microbiota of high-carbohydrate, high-fat diet-induced hypertensive Wistar rats. J Hum Hypertens. 2021;35(2):170-180. doi:10.1038/s41371-020-0359-8
  35. Thomaz FS, Tan YP, Williams CM, Ward LC, Worrall S, Panchal SK. Wasabi (Eutrema japonicum) Reduces Obesity and Blood Pressure in Diet-Induced Metabolic Syndrome in Rats. Foods. 2022;11(21):3435. Published 2022 Oct 29. doi:10.3390/foods11213435
  36. Bello ML, Walker AJ, McFadden BA, Sanders DJ, Arent SM. The effects of TeaCrine® and caffeine on endurance and cognitive performance during a simulated match in high-level soccer players. J Int Soc Sports Nutr. 2019;16(1):20. Published 2019 Apr 18. doi:10.1186/s12970-019-0287-6
  37. Ismaeel A. Effects of Betaine Supplementation on Muscle Strength and Power: A Systematic Review. J Strength Cond Res. 2017;31(8):2338-2346. doi:10.1519/JSC.0000000000001959
  38. Cholewa JM, Wyszczelska-Rokiel M, Glowacki R, et al. Effects of betaine on body composition, performance, and homocysteine thiolactone. J Int Soc Sports Nutr. 2013;10(1):39. Published 2013 Aug 22. doi:10.1186/1550-2783-10-39
  39. De Carvalho FG, Justice JN, Freitas EC, Kershaw EE, Sparks LM. Adipose Tissue Quality in Aging: How Structural and Functional Aspects of Adipose Tissue Impact Skeletal Muscle Quality. Nutrients. 2019;11(11):2553. Published 2019 Oct 23. doi:10.3390/nu11112553
  40. Panth P, Guerin G, DiMarco NM. A Review of Iodine Status of Women of Reproductive Age in the USA. Biol Trace Elem Res. 2019;188(1):208-220. doi:10.1007/s12011-018-1606-5
  41. Bistas KG, Tadi P. Biotin. In: StatPearls. Treasure Island (FL): StatPearls Publishing; July 3, 2023.
  42. Vingren JL, Kraemer WJ, Ratamess NA, Anderson JM, Volek JS, Maresh CM. Testosterone physiology in resistance exercise and training: the up-stream regulatory elements. Sports Med. 2010;40(12):1037-1053. doi:10.2165/11536910-000000000-00000
  43. Riachy R, McKinney K, Tuvdendorj DR. Various Factors May Modulate the Effect of Exercise on Testosterone Levels in Men. J Funct Morphol Kinesiol. 2020;5(4):81. Published 2020 Nov 7. doi:10.3390/jfmk5040081
  44. Vingren JL, Kraemer WJ, Ratamess NA, Anderson JM, Volek JS, Maresh CM. Testosterone physiology in resistance exercise and training: the up-stream regulatory elements. Sports Med. 2010;40(12):1037-1053. doi:10.2165/11536910-000000000-00000
  45. Te L, Liu J, Ma J, Wang S. Correlation between serum zinc and testosterone: A systematic review. J Trace Elem Med Biol. 2023;76:127124. doi:10.1016/j.jtemb.2022.127124
  46. 1. Brilla LR, Conte V. Effects of a Novel Zinc-Magnesium Formulation on Hormones and Strength. JEP Journal of Exercise Physiology Online. Accessed October 24, 2023. https://www.asep.org/asep/asep/BrillaV2.PDF. 
  47. Henkel RR, Wang R, Bassett SH, et al. Tongkat Ali as a potential herbal supplement for physically active male and female seniors–a pilot study. Phytother Res. 2014;28(4):544-550. doi:10.1002/ptr.5017
  48. Pandit S, Biswas S, Jana U, De RK, Mukhopadhyay SC, Biswas TK. Clinical evaluation of purified Shilajit on testosterone levels in healthy volunteers. Andrologia. 2016;48(5):570-575. doi:10.1111/and.12482
  49. Chen X, Ge F, Liu J, et al. Diverged Effects of Piperine on Testicular Development: Stimulating Leydig Cell Development but Inhibiting Spermatogenesis in Rats. Front Pharmacol. 2018;9:244. Published 2018 Mar 28. doi:10.3389/fphar.2018.00244
  50. Suskind DL. Nutritional deficiencies during normal growth. Pediatr Clin North Am. 2009;56(5):1035-1053. doi:10.1016/j.pcl.2009.07.004
  51. Hanna M, Jaqua E, Nguyen V, Clay J. B Vitamins: Functions and Uses in Medicine. Perm J. 2022;26(2):89-97. doi:10.7812/TPP/21.204
  52. Venkatramanan S, Armata IE, Strupp BJ, Finkelstein JL. Vitamin B-12 and Cognition in Children. Adv Nutr. 2016;7(5):879-888. Published 2016 Sep 15. doi:10.3945/an.115.012021
  53. Vidailhet M, Rieu D, Feillet F, et al. Vitamin A in pediatrics: An update from the Nutrition Committee of the French Society of Pediatrics. Arch Pediatr. 2017;24(3):288-297. doi:10.1016/j.arcped.2016.11.021
  54. Maggini S, Wenzlaff S, Hornig D. Essential role of vitamin C and zinc in child immunity and health. J Int Med Res. 2010;38(2):386-414. doi:10.1177/147323001003800203
  55. Zhang Y, Lin J, Zhou R, Zheng X, Dai J. Effect of omega-3 fatty acids supplementation during childhood in preventing allergic disease: a systematic review and Meta-Analysis. J Asthma. 2021;58(4):523-536. doi:10.1080/02770903.2019.1709866
  56. Ferrante G, La Grutta S. The burden of pediatric asthma. Frontiers in Pediatrics. 2018;6. doi:10.3389/fped.2018.00186 
  57. Bahramsoltani R, Rahimi R, Farzaei MH. Pharmacokinetic interactions of curcuminoids with conventional drugs: A review. J Ethnopharmacol. 2017;209:1-12. doi:10.1016/j.jep.2017.07.022

The post Best Multivitamins for Men, Women, and More (2024) appeared first on Breaking Muscle.

]]>
Best Meal Replacement Shakes for Weight Loss, Weight Gain, and More (2024) https://breakingmuscle.com/best-meal-replacement-shakes/ Fri, 27 Oct 2023 11:25:44 +0000 https://breakingmuscle.com/?p=199782 Whether you’re trying to gain muscle for a bodybuilding competition or aiming to lose weight to live a healthier lifestyle, the best meal replacement shakes could be a convenient and nutritious option. When it comes to food, it usually feels like you have to choose one or the other, as most convenient choices aren’t healthy and most healthy...

The post Best Meal Replacement Shakes for Weight Loss, Weight Gain, and More (2024) appeared first on Breaking Muscle.

]]>
Whether you’re trying to gain muscle for a bodybuilding competition or aiming to lose weight to live a healthier lifestyle, the best meal replacement shakes could be a convenient and nutritious option. When it comes to food, it usually feels like you have to choose one or the other, as most convenient choices aren’t healthy and most healthy ones require a lot of preparation. But meal replacement shakes are busy, health-conscious individuals’ dreams, since they’re chock full of nutrients and super easy to make. Heck, they might even be more affordable than going to a fast food restaurant. 

As a public health professional and writer, I’ve researched and written hundreds of articles on supplements and nutrition. Since 2015, I’ve used my writing to educate individuals about health and wellness best practices, as I realize that many of us just don’t know what to look for. 

Therefore, in this roundup, we’ll share what we consider the 10 top meal replacement shakes across different categories. Plus, we’ll share some tips you’ll want to think about before you make your purchase. 

Medical disclaimer: This article is intended for educational and informational purposes only. It is not intended as a substitute for medical advice. For health advice, contact a licensed healthcare provider.

How We Chose the Best Meal Replacement Shakes

The Breaking Muscle team members aren’t strangers to supplements. From dozens of pre-workout mixes to protein powders to popular creatine supplements, we’ve become familiar with what supplements are worth the money and which ones are better to skip. In our hunt to select the best meal replacement shakes, we knew what to look for. 

We based our initial list based on what some of our team and their fitness network raved about. We then hit the internet to see which options stood out based on customer reviews and in-depth research. Once we reviewed a few from there, we began weeding out any item that didn’t meet our criteria, such as having high-quality protein, carb, and fat sources, low sugar content, and more. The products that made our list checked all of these boxes.

Our Top Picks for the Best Meal Replacement Shakes

Best Meal Replacement Shake Overall: Transparent Labs Mass Gainer

Transparent Labs Mass Gainer
4.5
  • Number of servings: 15
  • Price per serving: $5.33
  • Calories per serving: 730 to 750
  • Protein per serving: 51 to 53 grams
  • Fat per serving: 13 to 14 grams
  • Carbohydrates per serving: 106 to 110 grams
Check Price

Pros

  • Natural ingredients 
  • Third-party tested 
  • Excellent taste
  • Dissolves well

Cons

  • Pricey
  • Not for vegans or those with a tree nut allergy

Want to know what’s annoying? Looking for meal replacement options and coming across the words “proprietary blend” on the ingredients list. When trying to find something that can help you meet your nutritional needs, you want to know exactly what ingredients you’re getting and how much is in a serving.

In addition, you want to feel confident that the ingredients you consume are clean and free of GMOs, artificial sweeteners, gluten (if you have celiac disease or gluten intolerance), and more. While this is rare, one product that checks all of those boxes is Transparent Labs Mass Gainer. It’s not only our top pick for the best meal replacement shake overall but also made our list of the best mass gainers.

If you’re trying to gain weight and/or build muscle, you’ll need to consume more calories, and Mass Gainer doesn’t have a shortage of them. This product contains approximately 750 calories per serving and has an abundant supply of carbohydrates (106 to 110 grams), protein (51 to 52 grams), and fat (13 to 14 grams).

It also has minerals like calcium and iron, so you’re getting what’s considered a complete meal. Calcium helps to preserve muscle mass, and iron is needed to store oxygen in muscle tissue, making this a solid meal replacement. (1) The three grams of creatine is the cherry on top, as this supplement may increase lean muscle mass and exercise capacity. (2) Plus, three to five grams of creatine is the recommended dose per day. (3)

In order to provide you with these nutrients, Mass Gainer uses natural ingredients, like organic tapioca maltodextrin and grass-fed whey protein concentrate. According to their third-party tester, Elite Manufacturing and Packaging, 50.8 percent of their formula is tapioca maltodextrin. A 2022 study found that tapioca maltodextrin not only digests well but may also reduce HbA1C levels in prediabetic individuals and normoglycemic participants (i.e., those with a normal concentration of glucose in the blood). (4) For clarity, HbA1C refers to glycated hemoglobin, which is created when the sugar in your body attaches to your blood cells. 

More than 31 percent of their formula comprises grass-fed whey protein concentrate, which also has benefits. One study established that 25 grams of whey protein maximizes protein synthesis and may support muscle hypertrophy with consistent resistance training. There’s more than double that amount of protein here, so seeing gains doesn’t sound too far-fetched. One buyer even said, “I have taken the Mass Gainer for about three weeks and have gained roughly 3 pounds.”

But, what if you’re not trying to bulk up? Could this still be a practical choice for you? The short answer is yes. Mass gainers like Transparent Labs Mass Gainer are a good source of macronutrients. The protein and carbs can make you feel full and help you avoid those unhealthy snacks that seem to call your name when you’re hungry. However, I’d recommend consuming a smaller serving if you’re not trying to gain weight. 

There are two flavors of Mass Gainer, and based on customer reviews, both seem to taste pretty good. One of our Breaking Muscle team members tested the Chocolate Glaze Donut flavor and said it really tastes like a donut. She also noted that it dissolved well, which is a plus. Just add two scoops (equal to one serving) to 16 ounces of milk and drink up.

However, do note that this pure product isn’t cheap. One 15-serving container costs $79.99, which isn’t cheap. At $5.33 per serving, this is easily one of the more expensive meal replacement shakes on this list. Still, it’s cheaper than many fast food options. It’s dietitian-recommended and good enough for athletes based on its Informed Choice certification. These qualities are precisely why we consider this to be the best meal replacement shake overall. 

Best Meal Replacement Shake for Weight Loss: PhenQ Complete Meal Shake

PhenQ Complete Meal Shake
3.5
  • Type of protein: Whey protein concentrate 
  • Cost per serving: $2.99
  • Calories per serving: 180 to 190
  • Protein per serving: 16 to 17 grams 
  • Flavors: Chocolate, Strawberry & Cream, Vanilla
Check Now

Pros

  • Includes 13 vitamins  
  • Vegetarian-friendly  
  • Three flavors 
  • 60-day money-back guarantee

Cons

  • Only available online 
  • Few product reviews

While meal prepping can help you be more successful with weight loss, it’s difficult for those with multiple obligations to consistently do so. It can easily take several hours to make a week’s worth of low-calorie meals, so what are you supposed to do if that’s not feasible for you? Well, this is where the PhenQ Complete Meal Shake comes into play. It’s only 190 calories but still provides 13 vitamins and 16 grams of whey protein concentrate. With a lower calorie count than some others on this list, it could be an attractive option for those wanting to lose weight. 

Micronutrients like Vitamins A, B12, C, D, and E, as well as pantothenic acid and thiamin, can help with the growth and development of our muscles and turn food into fuel. Even further, a lack of some of those vitamins, like B12, is associated with obesity. It’s critical to get enough of these nutrients if you want to maintain a healthy weight. (5)

PhenQ also includes Digezyme, a multi-enzyme complex, in their formulation. These digestive enzymes (amylase, protease, cellulase, lactase, and lipase) help break down lipids, carbohydrates, and protein so you can adequately absorb the included nutrients. (6) Carb10, a carbohydrate source derived from pea starch, further helps with digestion without spiking your blood sugar level

Other beneficial ingredients, like gluten-free oat flour and flaxseed powder, further make PhenQ an excellent choice for those trying to lose weight. Oats, in general, increase satiety-related hormones, potentially making you want to eat less. Flaxseed is associated with weight reduction in overweight and obese individuals. (7)(8

The PhenQ Complete Meal Shake has a lot going for it, but like all things, it will not check everyone’s boxes. For instance, while it’s suitable for vegetarians, the addition of milk makes it a no-go for vegans or those with lactose intolerance.

In addition, it’s difficult to find actual customer reviews on their product, which could be a turn-off for potential consumers. PhenQ offers a 60-day money-back guarantee if you’re unhappy with your results. However, a refund is only issued if you return an unused package. Therefore, if you purchase all three flavors, you may have to think twice about opening each one.

One package costs about $20.95 and only contains seven servings, making it about $2.99 per meal. You’d need at least four packages to get almost a month’s worth, so you must plan accordingly. To drink, you just need to mix one to two scoops of PhenQ Meal Shake with eight or 16 ounces of water or dairy-free, unsweetened milk. However, keep in mind that one scoop equals one serving, so if you double it up, is it still considered a good meal replacement option?   

Overall, the PhenQ Complete Meal Shake is a solid choice for those looking for a nutrient-rich option with natural ingredients. Far too many meal replacement options are empty-calorie foods, meaning they’re high in calories and likely consist of added sugars and saturated fats. As one study confirmed, these things may be associated with obesity, which is precisely what one wants to avoid with a meal replacement shake for weight loss. (9)

Best Tasting Meal Replacement Shake: Soylent Ready-to-Drink Meal

Soylent Meal Replacement Shake
3.5
  • Number of servings: 12 bottles 
  • Cost per serving: $4.00 to $4.17 
  • Nutrition info: 400 calories, 24 grams of fat, 20 grams of protein, 36 to 38 of carbohydrates, and one gram of sugar 
  • Flavors: Banana, Cafe Mocha, Creamy Chocolate, Mint Chocolate, Strawberry, and Vanilla
Check Price

Pros

  • Tasty 
  • Offered in multiple flavors 
  • Chock full of vitamins and minerals
  • Vegan-friendly 
  • No prep required

Cons

  • Not for those with soy allergy 
  • May cause constipation because it lacks insoluble fiber

For those who just don’t want to deal with powder mixes, consider Soylent’s Ready-To-Drink Meal. I recently learned about this shake from a family member who is using it to lose weight. One of the things they raved about was how good these shakes tasted. If you’ve tried a meal replacement shake, you’re already aware that it can be a hit or miss, so it’s nice when you find one worth buying again. However, is this tasty choice also a nutritious one? 

One serving of Soylent’s Ready-To-Drink Meal packs about 400 calories but, surprisingly, only has one gram of sugar and no artificial sweeteners. It also contains 28 vitamins and minerals, like iron, magnesium, vitamin D, calcium, and zinc. Nutrients like magnesium aid with regulating muscle function and making protein. Even calcium and vitamin D3 supplementation has been associated with lower body weight and better metabolic health, so it’s critical that we get enough of these. (10

Soylent also provides about 38 grams of carbs, primarily from allulose. Allulose is a slow-burning carb that may reduce the availability of glucose in the blood. (11) In other words, it doesn’t spike blood sugar levels, meaning it could be a good choice even for those with diabetes. Sporadic spikes and dips of glucose can cause fatigue, so this should keep your energy levels stable for longer periods. However, always check with your doctor first to confirm. 

The 20 grams of protein in Soylent drinks comes from soy isolate. It’s vegan-friendly and includes all nine essential amino acids. A 2013 study on soy isolate found that post-menopausal women who consumed that, along with doing resistance exercises, noticed improved bone and muscle strength. (12

Forty-seven percent of Soylent’s total calories come from fat, but there’s a reason for that. Fat metabolizes slower than carbs, which can help you stay full for longer. (13) Soylent uses high oleic sunflower oil (omega 9 fatty acid), and diets rich in this type of fat may help prevent heart disease. (14)

Many people taking Soylent mention that they notice a boost of energy, especially if they used to follow a crappy diet. Poor nutrition and inadequate calorie intake can lead to fatigue, so the boost of calories and energy-improving nutrients in this shake may be a game-changer for some. These grab-and-go drinks are $50.00 and come in a pack of 12. There are six flavors, so you shouldn’t get bored anytime soon. 

RELATED: Best Tasting Protein Powder

Best Meal Replacement Shake for Women: Ritual Daily Shake

Ritual Essential Protein Powder
4.4
  • Protein type: Pea protein
  • Number of servings: 15
  • Cost per serving: $2.66
  • Calories per serving: 115 
  • Protein per serving: 20 grams 
  • Flavors: Vanilla
  • Third-party tested: Yes
Check Price

Pros

  • Traceable ingredients 
  • 30-day moneyback guarantee 
  • Third-party tested 
  • Vegan-friendly 
  • GMO-free, gluten-free, sugar-free

Cons

  • Doesn’t always dissolve well 
  • Only one flavor option
  • Pricey

Ritual’s Essential Protein is easily one of the best protein shakes for vegans on the market. Each ingredient is traceable, meaning you’ll know exactly where it comes from. For health-conscious individuals, this is a big deal because not many companies offer this level of transparency.

In addition, it’s third-party tested and holds Informed Protein and Informed Sport certifications. For extra measure, Ritual tests each lot of protein for heavy metals, microbes, and banned substances. This level of testing is important for everyone, but it’s especially crucial for women who have hormones that may interact with some types of proteins. 

For example, soy protein and isoflavones may negatively affect reproductive and thyroid hormones, especially estrogen. (15) Although several studies show soy is okay to consume, its safety remains questionable.

Instead of soy, Ritual includes 20 grams of organic pea protein per serving in their formulation. This type of plant-based protein is a good substitute for soy and animal products. In fact, one study found that pea protein supplementation (along with following a 12-week resistance training program) increased bicep muscle thickness to the same degree as an equivalent amount of whey protein. (16)  

Pea protein also provides a complete amino acid profile. There are eight grams of essential amino acids and four grams of branched-chain amino acids in each serving of the Ritual Daily Shake.

Essential amino acids, like l-methionine, are not naturally created by mammals, so we have to get them through our diet. (17) As the building blocks of protein, our body simply couldn’t properly function without them. Branched-chain amino acids are necessary, too, and may help with muscle growth and soreness following exercise. (18) Deficiencies in either could cause hormonal imbalances, muscle issues, edema, and more. (17)

This daily shake only comes in a Handcrafted Vanilla flavor. The vanilla comes from vanilla bean extract harvested in Madagascar. Reb-M (a compound made from fermented sugar cane), and monk fruit are also added to give it a sweet taste, but it’s still completely sugar-free. While it might sound bizarre that something from sugar cane is considered sugar-free, the fermentation process removes the sugar content while retaining its sweetness.  

One bag of Ritual Daily Shake is around $40 and contains 15 servings, so expect to spend about $80 if you want one month’s worth. While expensive, it’s vegan-friendly, GMO-free, gluten-free, and has no artificial flavors. Just add one scoop of protein powder to a cold liquid, shake it, and drink up.

Do note that it doesn’t dissolve the best, so consider mixing it with a blender. In addition, compared to others on this list, this is a low-calorie option and thus may not make you feel as full. 

RELATED: Best Protein Powders

Best Meal Replacement Shake for Men: Kaged Clean Meal

Kaged Clean Meal Protein Shake
4.3
  • Number of servings: 13 to 20, depending on how many scoops you take
  • Cost per serving: $1.95 to $3.88
  • Calories per serving: 240 to 360
  • Protein per serving: 28 to 42 grams
  • Flavors: Chocolate Peanut Butter, Snickerdoodle, Vanilla Cake
  • Third-party tested: Informed Sport
Check Price

Pros

  • ioWhey™ technology
  • Third-party tested 
  • Zinc helps with testosterone production

Cons

  • Contains sucralose 
  • Too sweet for some 
  • May cause GI issues

Guys looking for a whole-food meal replacement should look into Kaged Clean Meal. It’s made with great ingredients like whey protein isolate, organic quinoa, Swedish oats, coconut oil, and loads of nutrients from fruits and veggies. Plus, it’s non-GMO, gluten-free, third-party tested, and has the Informed Sport certification. For men, it’s one of the best meal replacement shakes on the market.

Research shows that men are more likely than women to have a vitamin D deficiency. Such a deficiency can cause muscle weakness, bone pain, and more. (19) Fortunately, the Kaged Clean Meal provides 25 percent of the daily value, which is a nice boost for someone not getting balanced meals. 

Zinc is another mineral that’s important for men’s health. One study found that 30 milligrams of zinc daily increases levels of free testosterone, a hormone that positively influences muscular development. (20) Like vitamin D, this too meets 25 percent of the daily value.

RELATED: Best Testosterone Boosters

Even the inclusion of coconut oil is beneficial to men, as it has been shown to possibly increase fat-free mass, enhance plasma HDL cholesterol, and improve insulin sensitivity. (21) High HDL cholesterol levels are strongly associated with a reduced risk of heart attacks, which are twice as likely in men than in women. (22

Those are just a few examples of how the ingredients in this meal replacement product help men, but there are 21 vitamins and minerals in total. Its micronutrient profile stands out, as it provides 25 percent of the daily value in almost every essential vitamin and mineral the body requires.

As if that wasn’t enough, Kaged Clean Meal uses ioWhey™ Technology, a patented process that’s said to optimize whey protein isolate consumption. Standard whey protein is said to have a complex structure that can make it difficult for the body to absorb. However, ioWhey™ Protein is said to have a less complex structure that allows for greater bioavailability. On their website, Kaged claims ioWhey™ Technology may improve amino acid absorption 123 percent better than regular whey protein. However, I haven’t come across any studies that back this claim up. 

Combined with the 6.5 grams of branch-chain amino acids per serving, that may have an anabolic effect on protein metabolism. According to one study, this means that following physical exercise, one might have an increased protein synthesis rate and a decreased protein degradation rate, even during rest. (23

On Kaged’s website, you’ll find over 400 reviews and a 4.8 rating, so it appears that many people like it. One guy even said, “The life of a firefighter, father, husband. Crossfiter makes it tough to get all my meals! Not a problem anymore! Love clean meal!” There were three one-star reviews, but two of them simply never received their order. Unfortunately, it doesn’t look like the company publicly responded to these negative reviews to rectify the situation. 

For around $49.99, you’d get about 20 servings. Kaged Clean Meal is available in three flavors: Chocolate Peanut Butter, Snickerdoodle, and Vanilla Cake. One serving equals two scoops that you can add to 10 to 12 ounces of cold water. Despite being reasonably nutritious, it’s not meant to replace all your meals since it has a slightly lower calorie count of 240 calories, compared with other meal replacement shakes that have 700 calories or more.  

Overall, it’s a pretty good meal replacement shake, but it does contain a small amount of sucralose and may be too sweet for some. A few customers on Amazon even remarked that this supplement caused GI issues. 

Best Meal Replacement Shake for Weight Gain: Crazy Nutrition Mass Gainer

Crazy Nutrition Mass Gainer
4.0
  • Number of servings: 20 
  • Price per serving: $4.50
  • Calories per serving: 488 
  • Protein per serving: 39 to 40 grams
  • Fat per serving: 10 grams
  • Carbohydrates per serving: 55 to 56 grams
Check Price

Pros

  • Tastes good 
  • Black pepper and Digezyme help with digestion 
  • 60-day money-back guarantee 
  • Low in sugar

Cons

  • Includes sucralose and lactose 
  • One serving requires four scoops 
  • Doesn’t appear third-party tested 
  • Expensive

Having a fast metabolism is all fun and dandy until you’re trying to gain weight. It can seem almost impossible, even if you eat a bunch of donuts and pizza to add calories. As tasty as these foods are, they lack the micronutrients you need to build muscle. Plus, they’ll leave you feeling super sluggish, and who wants to feel like that at the gym? Thankfully, a more efficient way to gain weight can be using Crazy Nutrition’s Mass Gainer. 

This mass gainer formula uses whole-food sourced ingredients like oat flour, whey protein, and medium-chain triglycerides (MCT) oil. Oat flour is high in complex carbohydrates, which take longer to digest and, as a result, can make you feel fuller. However, our testers noted that the oat powder seemed to settle at the bottom of their drink, so they had to keep shaking it up before every sip. We’d recommend using a blender for the best results. 

MCT oil is an easy-to-digest form of fat that can boost your energy. Some research even suggests that MCT oil may improve athletic performance. (24) In addition, a 2019 study found that bodybuilders using whey protein experienced weight gain and increased muscle mass. (25)

What I really like is that this meal replacement shake contains nutrients like magnesium, zinc, B6, and B12. However, I couldn’t confirm how much of each is in their formulation, which is a con. Nonetheless, B12 is associated with muscle development, and both B12 and B6 help with cellular energy production. (26)(27) The addition of magnesium is very useful, too, since this element can be depleted by physical exercise. (28) Supplementing it could be just what you need to get through an intense training session. 

As good as all these nutrients are, it would mean nothing if you didn’t properly digest and absorb what you consumed. Therefore, like PhenQ, this product also uses Digezyme to improve absorption. You’ll also find black pepper on the ingredient list, which might seem random, but it may improve digestive capacity and reduce food transit time. (29)

This is a good pick if you’re looking for a mass gainer with a hefty amount of proteins and carbs that’s also low in sugar. Crazy Nutrition Mass Gainer is gluten-free, comes in two flavors that individuals like, and seems to help people achieve the results they’re looking for. One buyer said, “Been taking this a couple of months in combination with working out. Up from the low 140s to around 150 in two and a half months. It’s been an easy way to get in the extra calories I had been missing.” 

Another thing that’s hefty about this product is its price tag. One 20-serving pouch costs $89.99, so this isn’t a good option if you’re on a budget.

You may also want to avoid this product if you’re trying to avoid artificial sweeteners like sucralose. Crazy Nutrition Mass Gainer also contains lactose and wouldn’t be ideal for those who are lactose intolerant. One of our testers who’s sensitive to lactose had an unsettled stomach after taking it. Our other tester, who doesn’t have any issues with lactose, didn’t report any negative effects. Ultimately, if you want to try it and see for yourself, there is a 60-day money-back guarantee. 

RELATED: Best Bodybuilding Supplements

Best Vegan Meal Replacement Shake: Orgain Vegan Organic Nutrition Shake

Orgain Vegan Organic Nutrition Shake
4.2
  • Type of protein: Organic pea protein, organic chia seeds
  • Cost per serving: $3.00
  • Calories per serving: 230 to 240
  • Protein per serving: 16 grams 
  • Flavors: Smooth Chocolate, Vanilla Bean
Check Price

Pros

  • Vegan-friendly 
  • USDA-Organic 
  • Premixed

Cons

  • Includes added sugars 
  • Can sometimes have a clumpy consistency 

If you follow a plant-based diet, getting the macronutrients and micronutrients you need can be challenging. Research shows that adults who follow a plant-based diet tend to lack certain essential nutrients, like vitamin B12, vitamin D, iron, zinc, iodine, and calcium. (30) So, what are you supposed to do? Ideally, it’s best to follow a balanced diet that’ll help you meet your dietary needs, but that’s way easier said than done. As a result, USDA-organic options like the Orgain Vegan Organic Nutrition Shake are convenient for busy folks who’d benefit from consuming an easy-to-take meal replacement shake. 

Earlier this year, I searched for a healthy meal replacement option to drink in the morning or on the go. Even though I don’t follow a plant-based diet, I wanted a gluten-free and soy-free vegan protein source with a good supply of macronutrients and micronutrients. Therefore, when I came across the Orgain Vegan Organic Nutrition Shake, I was so excited to try it that I ordered a case of each flavor. 

What I like is that one serving of this shake contains over 20 vitamins and minerals, 220 calories, and a decent helping of protein, fats, and carbs. They use many ingredients (particularly their own unique blends) to provide complete nutrition. For example, pea protein, chia seeds, kale, and even beets are on the ingredients list. 

Although there are mixed reviews regarding chia seeds and weight management, one study found that consuming them can reduce weight and waist circumference. (31) Kale, a popular superfood, may help protect healthy cells, reduce inflammation, prevent tumors, and more.

Even a study on beets noted that this food provides huge health benefits, like eliminating oxidative stress, preventing DNA damage, and lowering blood lipids. (32) The betalins in beetroot have antioxidant and antitumor capabilities. 

What I don’t particularly like about this vegan shake is that it has 10 grams of added sugars and only 16 grams of protein. In addition, in my experience, the Smooth Chocolate flavor wasn’t that smooth. Even after I shook it, some sips were clumpy, as if the mix hadn’t fully dissolved. While I enjoyed the taste, the texture occasionally bothered me, so I decided to stick with the Vanilla Bean flavor. Besides that, expect it to have a slightly thinner consistency than actual milkshakes.  

I can honestly say these have helped me curb my craving for less healthy breakfast foods. Also, if I drink one of these in the morning, I usually don’t need anything else until lunchtime. But honestly, these are a bit pricey. A 12-serving box of this lactose-free shake will cost you $35.99, so if you want 30 days’ worth, you might spend over $100 per month. Yet, that’s still cheaper than how much you might buy grabbing a fast food meal every day over a 30-day period. 

Best Meal Replacement Shake for Diabetes: 310 Nutrition Meal Replacement Shake

310 Nutrition Meal Replacement Shake
4.0
  • Number of servings: 28 
  • Cost per serving: $1.44 
  • Nutrition info: 110 calories, two grams of fat, 15 grams of protein, seven grams of carbohydrates, and zero grams of sugar 
  • Flavors: Caramel Sundae, Chocolate, Chocolate Bliss, Cookies n’ Cream, Horchata, Mocha, Organic Chocolate, Pumpkin Spice, Salted Caramel, Strawberry, Tropical Coconut, Vanilla, Vanilla Crème
Check Price

Pros

  • Affordable 
  • Low glycemic index 
  • Includes superfoods 
  • Several flavors 

Cons

  • May not be third-party tested 
  • Some say it’s too sweet

While meal replacement shakes can help with weight loss, those with diabetes have to be particularly wary of their carbs, as some can spike blood sugar levels. Thankfully, there’s a gluten-free, soy-free, and GMO-free option on Amazon that may be suitable.

The 310 Nutrition Meal Replacement Shake comes in powder form and has many flavors. It uses a blend of plant proteins (brown rice, pumpkin, and pea protein) that provides 15 grams per serving. While that’s less than some of the others on this list, it’s still powerful. For example, brown rice not only has a good amount of dietary fiber and unsaturated fats but also has low glycemic index properties and shouldn’t affect your blood sugar levels. (33

Other ingredients in this meal replacement powder include turmeric, ginger, spirulina, MCT oil, and more. Studies show turmeric has antioxidant, anti-inflammatory, antibacterial, and anticancer properties. (34) Ginger, primarily known for helping with nausea, improves lipid profiles and glucose control. (35) Then there’s spirulina, a type of blue-green algae that a 2022 study shows may be able to increase exercise tolerance and oxygen uptake. (36)

With so many sweet flavors, like Salted Caramel and Vanilla Creme, you’d think this product had a ton of sugar. However, there are surprisingly zero grams in this drink mix. Most flavors use stevia and monk fruit as sweeteners, and based on many customer reviews, these shakes taste great. 

What individuals might not particularly like about this product is its lack of micronutrients. The iron in here makes up 28 percent of the daily value, but the calcium (four percent of the daily value) and potassium (two percent of the daily value) are underwhelming. Consider another option if you’re looking for something that provides complete nutrition. 

A 28-serving container of this organic plant powder is only $28.99, so it’s one of the more affordable choices on this list. Many comment that it’s also filling, which you might not automatically expect since it’s only 110 calories. The five grams of fiber likely helps with that.

Best Low-Carb Meal Replacement Shake: HLTH Code Complete Meal

HLTH Code Complete Meal Replacement
4.4
  • Number of servings: 15 
  • Cost per serving: $3.99
  • Nutrition info: 400 calories, 27 grams of fat, 27 grams of protein, 13 grams of carbohydrates, and two grams of sugar 
  • Flavors: Chocolate Macadamia and Creamy Vanilla
Check Price

Pros

  • Nutrient-dense 
  • Keto-friendly 
  • Includes digestive enzyme blend 
  • Provides satiated feeling

Cons

  • Many dislike the taste
  • Includes potential allergens 

What’s high in protein, low-carb, and provides 50 percent of the daily value for 25 micronutrients? HLTH Code Complete Meal. Created by a metabolic scientist, this meal replacement shake is an all-in-one option with ingredients that pack some nutrient power. 

Now, you might be wondering, how 13 grams of carbs are considered low-carb, but let me explain. If you look closely at the supplement facts label, you’ll see that there are nine grams of fiber, which the body cannot completely digest. And if the body can’t digest it and make it into an energy compound, then it shouldn’t impact your blood sugar levels. There are really only four grams of net carbs (total carbs minus fiber and sugar alcohols) in this shake, which isn’t bad. 

This shake’s protein blend includes whey protein concentrate, grass-fed collagen, and egg whites. A 2023 study on mice found that collagen has an anti-obesity effect. (37) These mice were fed a high-fat diet, and collagen peptides reduced abdominal fat accumulation, weight gain, and high blood glucose levels.

In a 2017 study using rats, researchers discovered that those receiving egg-white protein had reduced body fat mass. (38) While neither of those studies suggested what impact it could have on humans, the results seem promising. A more recent study on egg protein, in general, noted that it may enhance muscle strength, lower cholesterol, and reduce visceral fat in humans. (39

The 27 grams of fat comes from various sources, like MCT oil, olive oil, grass-fed ghee, and more. These are all considered healthy fats with great health benefits. For example, a study shows that olive oil may help combat oxidative stress and inflammation. (40) An older study on ghee, a South Asian clarified butter, even demonstrated that study participants who consumed it had a lower prevalence of coronary heart disease. (41)

This shake includes a digestive enzyme blend that consists of cellulase, amylase, diastase, and more. As mentioned previously, these enzymes help break down the macronutrients so your body can benefit from them. 

Another beneficial ingredient is apple cider vinegar (ACV). A 2018 study compared obese rats who consumed ACV daily to those who didn’t and found that those who received it had a reduced risk of obesity-associated diseases. (42)

The micronutrient profile in this shake is impressive, making it beneficial to those who might be deficient in a few of them. A CDC report showed that some of the most common deficiencies in the US are vitamins B6, D, C, B12, and iron. This shake has 50 percent of the daily value for each of them and plenty more. 

There are no added sugars, which is a plus. Instead, HLTH Code Complete Meal uses monk fruit and stevia. However, milk, egg, and coconut are potential allergens people should be aware of. This wouldn’t be a good choice if you need a lactose-free shake. 

Ultimately, if you’re looking for something that’ll make you feel full after drinking it, this would check that box. But it’s not cheap, costing $59.95 for a 15-serving container. 

Best Organic Meal Replacement Shake: Ka’Chava Whole Body Meal

Ka’Chava All-In-One Nutrition Shake Blend
3.8
  • Number of servings: 15 servings 
  • Cost per serving: $4.66
  • Nutrition info: 240 calories, Seven grams of fat, 25 grams of protein, 24 grams of carbohydrates, and six grams of sugar 
  • Flavors: Chai, Chocolate, Coconut Açaí, Matcha, and Vanilla
Check Price

Pros

  • Free of soy, GMOs, gluten, and artificial sweeteners
  • Includes many superfoods 
  • 30-day money-back guarantee 
  • Thousands of positive reviews

Cons

  • May not be third-party tested 
  • Some dislike the taste

Ka’Chava’s Whole Body Meal has superfoods and plant-based ingredients like organic shiitake mushrooms, chlorella, raspberries, tart cherries, and more than 80 others. A small 2015 study on shiitake mushrooms found that those who consumed it had improved immunity. (43) Chlorella, a freshwater green algae, has antioxidant, detoxification, and immune system-boosting effects. It may even help prevent complications from diabetes and improve glycemic control. (44)

A 2021 study showed that polyphenol-rich foods, like raspberries, reduce muscle soreness following a workout. (45) Raspberries may also lower post-meal serum glucose levels and inflammation. (46) Tart cherries are also rich in polyphenols and have been associated with lowering blood pressure, regulating blood glucose, boosting cognitive function, and more. (47)

There are numerous micronutrients in this shake, too. Some even provide over 60 percent of the daily value, like vitamins A, E, B1, folate, and more. You’ll also find probiotics, prebiotics, and digestive enzymes in their formula. 

Another thing that Ka’Chava has a lot of is reviews. With 60,000+ video and written reviews, potential buyers can get a true sense of what current customers think. Most reviews are positive, noting that it’s delicious and convenient. Other reviews state that they wished it tasted better — though to be fair, taste is subjective, and this doesn’t mean you won’t like it. 

Is the Ka’Chava meal shake a good choice? If you’re looking for an organic, plant-based snack option with multiple superfoods and flavors, then yes. They have a Love-It guarantee, too, so if you don’t like it, you can return up to one bag of each flavor for a refund. A 15-serving container is around $69.95. 

Benefits of Meal Replacement Shakes

Most people have heard of meal replacement shakes, but not everyone knows how beneficial they are. Consider some of their benefits below. 

They’re Convenient 

Every day, we have to figure out what to eat. That, in itself, is a time-consuming activity. On top of that, you must cook a meal or decide where to order one that meets your dietary preferences and needs. When you’re trying to eat healthily and are on a tight schedule, it’s not always easy to make good choices. However, drinking meal replacement shakes is one way to fuel your body without much effort. You can add a powder mix to your water bottle or pop open a carton of a premade drink for one of your meals.  

They’re Versatile

As you’ve seen on this list, several types of meal replacement shakes exist. Some have a little over a hundred calories, and others have over 700 calories. You can use them to lose or gain weight, so aim to select the ones that align with your fitness goals. 

They’re (Usually) Nutritious 

When it comes to food, convenience and health often don’t go together. However, the right meal replacement shake could benefit your overall health. It can be a good source of complete protein, fats, carbs, and multiple micronutrients, all of which help your body function properly. Those who follow a poor diet and then start incorporating meal replacement shakes with superfood ingredients often comment that they feel more energized afterward. 

When Is the Best Time to Have a Meal Replacement Shake?

The best time to drink a meal replacement shake depends on your lifestyle. I prefer to drink my Orgain Vegan Organic Nutrition Shake around breakfast time. Before I started taking this supplement, I would eat a heavy breakfast that would leave me feeling sluggish. The shake gives me just the nutrients I need to give me energy for the day.  

Meal replacement shakes might be a solid option for lunch, too. People are more likely to get fast food or a pre-cooked frozen meal with low-quality ingredients because they’re looking for something quick to satisfy their hunger. A shake can get you through those moments when you’re at work or on the go. 

Another time you should consider consuming a meal replacement shake is after your workout. The proteins and other essential nutrients may assist with muscle recovery and repair. 

What To Look For in a Meal Replacement Shake

Picking a meal replacement shake isn’t as simple as you may think. There are a lot of things you should consider before you split with your hard-earned cash. 

High-Quality Protein, Carb, and Fat Sources

Protein sources matter, and unfortunately, they’re not all created equally. The same goes for carbohydrates and fats. For example, highly processed protein sources include chemicals that increase the risks of several chronic conditions. To avoid this, look for protein sources like soy, egg, whey, and peas.

In addition, look for the complete protein label, which means it has all the necessary amino acids needed to help you maintain muscle mass (or build it, if that’s your goal).

Lastly, steer clear of protein types you may have trouble digesting. 

When it comes to carbs and fats, there are good ones, and there are bad ones. It’s best to look for carbs like the oat flour in the Crazy Nutrition Mass Gainer. It’s a slow-burning carb, meaning it takes more time to digest and thus doesn’t cause a sudden rise in blood sugar. For fats, aim for high-quality sources like the high oleic sunflower oil in the Soylent Ready-to-Drink Meal. 

Low Sugar Content

Some meal replacement shakes are loaded with added sugars. According to the American Health Association, we should have no more than 24 grams of added sugar daily. Therefore, if you want to follow a balanced diet, stick to options with little to no added sugars.  

Additional Ingredients

Although this isn’t an absolute must-have, consider looking for ingredients like Digezyme, which is found in PhenQ and Crazy Nutrition’s shakes. These digestive enzymes aid digestion so your body can use the nutrients found in your meal replacement shake for energy and more. 

Apple cider vinegar, found in the HLTH Code Complete Meal, has become a trendy herbal supplement ingredient over the years. People see it as a cure-all, even though it’s not, but it does have some health benefits, such as weight loss and preventing spikes in blood sugar. 

Superfoods, like legumes, nuts, leafy greens, berries, and more, have many health benefits. Therefore, check to see if the meal replacement shake you’re considering includes these nutritious additions. On this list, the 310 Nutrition Meal Replacement Shake and Orgain Vegan Organic Nutrition Shake include superfoods. 

Vitamins and Minerals

If you think your current diet might lack essential vitamins and minerals, a drink meal replacement shake may help. For instance, the HLTH Code Complete Meal provides 50 percent of the daily value for more than 20 micronutrients. However, if you’re taking other supplements, you’ll want to ensure you’re not getting too much of a micronutrient. Just as deficiencies can lead to health complications, taking an excessive amount of a vitamin or mineral can also be harmful. 

Flavors

Some meal replacement shakes only come in one flavor, like the Ritual Daily Shake, which is only available in a vanilla flavor. Others have five or more flavors, like the 310 Nutrition Meal Replacement Shake and Soylent Ready-to-Drink Meal. You’ll want to be careful that the flavored options don’t have excess added sugars, though, as that’s occasionally the case. If you want a sweet taste, look for options with natural sugars, like monk fruit. 

Lastly, you’ll find that there are always mixed reviews about flavors. So if you see a few remarks that one is nasty, don’t automatically discount it. We all have different taste palettes. Therefore, what one person dislikes could be something you’d enjoy. 

Final Thoughts

At this point, you not only know about 10 of the best meal replacement shakes in the marketplace but also which factors to consider so you select the right one for you. As someone who’s purchased expensive meal replacement shakes before that I rarely used, I don’t want you to make the same mistake as me. Those sat on the shelves because I realized afterward that they lacked the nutrients I needed and had subpar quality. With this list, you can make an informed decision that may help you achieve your fitness goals. 

Best Meal Replacement Shake: Side-by-Side Comparison

Best Meal Replacement Shake Overall
Best Meal Replacement Shake for Weight Loss
Best Tasting Meal Replacement Shake
Best Meal Replacement Shake for Women
Best Meal Replacement Shake for Men
Best Meal Replacement Shake for Weight Gain
Best Vegan Meal Replacement Shake
Best Meal Replacement Shake for Diabetes
Best Low-Carb Meal Replacement Shake
Best Organic Meal Replacement Shake
Description:
  • Number of servings: 15
  • Price per serving: $5.33
  • Calories per serving: 730 to 750
  • Protein per serving: 51 to 53 grams
  • Fat per serving: 13 to 14 grams
  • Carbohydrates per serving: 106 to 110 grams
Description:
  • Type of protein: Whey protein concentrate 
  • Cost per serving: $2.99
  • Calories per serving: 180 to 190
  • Protein per serving: 16 to 17 grams 
  • Flavors: Chocolate, Strawberry & Cream, Vanilla
Description:
  • Number of servings: 12 bottles 
  • Cost per serving: $4.00 to $4.17 
  • Nutrition info: 400 calories, 24 grams of fat, 20 grams of protein, 36 to 38 of carbohydrates, and one gram of sugar 
  • Flavors: Banana, Cafe Mocha, Creamy Chocolate, Mint Chocolate, Strawberry, and Vanilla
Description:
  • Protein type: Pea protein
  • Number of servings: 15
  • Cost per serving: $2.66
  • Calories per serving: 115 
  • Protein per serving: 20 grams 
  • Flavors: Vanilla
  • Third-party tested: Yes
Description:
  • Number of servings: 13 to 20, depending on how many scoops you take
  • Cost per serving: $1.95 to $3.88
  • Calories per serving: 240 to 360
  • Protein per serving: 28 to 42 grams
  • Flavors: Chocolate Peanut Butter, Snickerdoodle, Vanilla Cake
  • Third-party tested: Informed Sport
Description:
  • Number of servings: 20 
  • Price per serving: $4.50
  • Calories per serving: 488 
  • Protein per serving: 39 to 40 grams
  • Fat per serving: 10 grams
  • Carbohydrates per serving: 55 to 56 grams
Description:
  • Type of protein: Organic pea protein, organic chia seeds
  • Cost per serving: $3.00
  • Calories per serving: 230 to 240
  • Protein per serving: 16 grams 
  • Flavors: Smooth Chocolate, Vanilla Bean
Description:
  • Number of servings: 28 
  • Cost per serving: $1.44 
  • Nutrition info: 110 calories, two grams of fat, 15 grams of protein, seven grams of carbohydrates, and zero grams of sugar 
  • Flavors: Caramel Sundae, Chocolate, Chocolate Bliss, Cookies n’ Cream, Horchata, Mocha, Organic Chocolate, Pumpkin Spice, Salted Caramel, Strawberry, Tropical Coconut, Vanilla, Vanilla Crème
Description:
  • Number of servings: 15 
  • Cost per serving: $3.99
  • Nutrition info: 400 calories, 27 grams of fat, 27 grams of protein, 13 grams of carbohydrates, and two grams of sugar 
  • Flavors: Chocolate Macadamia and Creamy Vanilla
Description:
  • Number of servings: 15 servings 
  • Cost per serving: $4.66
  • Nutrition info: 240 calories, Seven grams of fat, 25 grams of protein, 24 grams of carbohydrates, and six grams of sugar 
  • Flavors: Chai, Chocolate, Coconut Açaí, Matcha, and Vanilla
Best Meal Replacement Shake Overall
Description:
  • Number of servings: 15
  • Price per serving: $5.33
  • Calories per serving: 730 to 750
  • Protein per serving: 51 to 53 grams
  • Fat per serving: 13 to 14 grams
  • Carbohydrates per serving: 106 to 110 grams
Best Meal Replacement Shake for Weight Loss
Description:
  • Type of protein: Whey protein concentrate 
  • Cost per serving: $2.99
  • Calories per serving: 180 to 190
  • Protein per serving: 16 to 17 grams 
  • Flavors: Chocolate, Strawberry & Cream, Vanilla
Best Tasting Meal Replacement Shake
Description:
  • Number of servings: 12 bottles 
  • Cost per serving: $4.00 to $4.17 
  • Nutrition info: 400 calories, 24 grams of fat, 20 grams of protein, 36 to 38 of carbohydrates, and one gram of sugar 
  • Flavors: Banana, Cafe Mocha, Creamy Chocolate, Mint Chocolate, Strawberry, and Vanilla
Best Meal Replacement Shake for Women
Description:
  • Protein type: Pea protein
  • Number of servings: 15
  • Cost per serving: $2.66
  • Calories per serving: 115 
  • Protein per serving: 20 grams 
  • Flavors: Vanilla
  • Third-party tested: Yes
Best Meal Replacement Shake for Men
Description:
  • Number of servings: 13 to 20, depending on how many scoops you take
  • Cost per serving: $1.95 to $3.88
  • Calories per serving: 240 to 360
  • Protein per serving: 28 to 42 grams
  • Flavors: Chocolate Peanut Butter, Snickerdoodle, Vanilla Cake
  • Third-party tested: Informed Sport
Best Meal Replacement Shake for Weight Gain
Description:
  • Number of servings: 20 
  • Price per serving: $4.50
  • Calories per serving: 488 
  • Protein per serving: 39 to 40 grams
  • Fat per serving: 10 grams
  • Carbohydrates per serving: 55 to 56 grams
Best Vegan Meal Replacement Shake
Description:
  • Type of protein: Organic pea protein, organic chia seeds
  • Cost per serving: $3.00
  • Calories per serving: 230 to 240
  • Protein per serving: 16 grams 
  • Flavors: Smooth Chocolate, Vanilla Bean
Best Meal Replacement Shake for Diabetes
Description:
  • Number of servings: 28 
  • Cost per serving: $1.44 
  • Nutrition info: 110 calories, two grams of fat, 15 grams of protein, seven grams of carbohydrates, and zero grams of sugar 
  • Flavors: Caramel Sundae, Chocolate, Chocolate Bliss, Cookies n’ Cream, Horchata, Mocha, Organic Chocolate, Pumpkin Spice, Salted Caramel, Strawberry, Tropical Coconut, Vanilla, Vanilla Crème
Best Low-Carb Meal Replacement Shake
Description:
  • Number of servings: 15 
  • Cost per serving: $3.99
  • Nutrition info: 400 calories, 27 grams of fat, 27 grams of protein, 13 grams of carbohydrates, and two grams of sugar 
  • Flavors: Chocolate Macadamia and Creamy Vanilla
Best Organic Meal Replacement Shake
Description:
  • Number of servings: 15 servings 
  • Cost per serving: $4.66
  • Nutrition info: 240 calories, Seven grams of fat, 25 grams of protein, 24 grams of carbohydrates, and six grams of sugar 
  • Flavors: Chai, Chocolate, Coconut Açaí, Matcha, and Vanilla

FAQs

What is the very best meal replacement shake?

The best meal replacement shake depends on your goals. If you’re trying to bulk up, consider a high-calorie, high-carb, and high-protein option, like Transparent Labs Mass Gainer and Crazy Nutrition Mass Gainer. Consider a lower-calorie meal replacement option like PhenQ’s Complete Meal Shake if you’re trying to lose weight. 

Which protein shakes are the best meal replacements for weight loss?

Some of the best protein shakes for weight loss are Kaged Clean Meal, 310 Nutrition’s Meal Replacement Shake, and PhenQ’s Complete Meal Shake. They all have less than 200 calories per bottle or serving.

Do doctors recommend meal replacement shakes?

Some doctors suggest meal replacement shakes to their patients to assist them with weight gain or weight loss. In some cases, they may even recommend shakes as a way for someone to get the nutrients they need. 

Research

  1. Kim YS, Hong KW, Han K, et al. Longitudinal Observation of Muscle Mass over 10 Years According to Serum Calcium Levels and Calcium Intake among Korean Adults Aged 50 and Older: The Korean Genome and Epidemiology Study. Nutrients. 2020;12(9):2856. Published 2020 Sep 18. doi:10.3390/nu12092856
  2. Hall M, Manetta E, Tupper K. Creatine Supplementation: An Update. Curr Sports Med Rep. 2021;20(7):338-344. doi:10.1249/JSR.0000000000000863
  3. Kreider RB, Kalman DS, Antonio J, et al. International Society of Sports Nutrition Position Stand: Safety and efficacy of creatine supplementation in exercise, sport, and medicine. Journal of the International Society of Sports Nutrition. 2017;14(1). doi:10.1186/s12970-017-0173-z 
  4. Astina J, Saphyakhajorn W, Borompichaichartkul C, Sapwarobol S. Tapioca Resistant Maltodextrin as a Carbohydrate Source of Oral Nutrition Supplement (ONS) on Metabolic Indicators: A Clinical Trial. Nutrients. 2022;14(5):916. Published 2022 Feb 22. doi:10.3390/nu14050916
  5. Baltaci D, Kutlucan A, Turker Y, et al. Association of vitamin B12 with obesity, overweight, insulin resistance and metabolic syndrome, and body fat composition; primary care-based study. Med Glas (Zenica). 2013;10(2):203-210.
  6. Ianiro G, Pecere S, Giorgio V, Gasbarrini A, Cammarota G. Digestive Enzyme Supplementation in Gastrointestinal Diseases. Curr Drug Metab. 2016;17(2):187-193. doi:10.2174/138920021702160114150137
  7. Rebello CJ, O’Neil CE, Greenway FL. Dietary fiber and satiety: the effects of oats on satiety. Nutr Rev. 2016;74(2):131-147. doi:10.1093/nutrit/nuv063
  8. Mohammadi-Sartang M, Mazloom Z, Raeisi-Dehkordi H, Barati-Boldaji R, Bellissimo N, Totosy de Zepetnek JO. The effect of flaxseed supplementation on body weight and body composition: a systematic review and meta-analysis of 45 randomized placebo-controlled trials. Obes Rev. 2017;18(9):1096-1107. doi:10.1111/obr.12550
  9. Reedy J, Krebs-Smith SM. Dietary sources of energy, solid fats, and added sugars among children and adolescents in the United States. J Am Diet Assoc. 2010;110(10):1477-1484. doi:10.1016/j.jada.2010.07.010
  10. Zhu W, Cai D, Wang Y, et al. Calcium plus vitamin D3 supplementation facilitated fat loss in overweight and obese college students with very-low calcium consumption: a randomized controlled trial [published correction appears in Nutr J. 2013;12:43]. Nutr J. 2013;12:8. Published 2013 Jan 8. doi:10.1186/1475-2891-12-8
  11. Yuma T, Tokuda M, Nishimoto N, Yokoi H, Izumori K. Allulose for the attenuation of postprandial blood glucose levels in healthy humans: A systematic review and meta-analysis. PLoS One. 2023;18(4):e0281150. Published 2023 Apr 6. doi:10.1371/journal.pone.0281150
  12. Shenoy S, Bedi R, Sandhu JS. Effect of soy isolate protein and resistance exercises on muscle performance and bone health of osteopenic/osteoporotic post-menopausal women. J Women Aging. 2013;25(2):183-198. doi:10.1080/08952841.2013.764252
  13. Samra RA. Fats and Satiety. In: Montmayeur JP, le Coutre J, editors. Fat Detection: Taste, Texture, and Post Ingestive Effects. Boca Raton (FL): CRC Press/Taylor & Francis; 2010. Chapter 15. Available from: https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK53550/
  14. Allman-Farinelli MA, Gomes K, Favaloro EJ, Petocz P. A diet rich in high-oleic-acid sunflower oil favorably alters low-density lipoprotein cholesterol, triglycerides, and factor VII coagulant activity. J Am Diet Assoc. 2005;105(7):1071-1079. doi:10.1016/j.jada.2005.04.008
  15. Hertzler SR, Lieblein-Boff JC, Weiler M, Allgeier C. Plant Proteins: Assessing Their Nutritional Quality and Effects on Health and Physical Function. Nutrients. 2020;12(12):3704. Published 2020 Nov 30. doi:10.3390/nu12123704
  16. Babault N, Païzis C, Deley G, et al. Pea proteins oral supplementation promotes muscle thickness gains during resistance training: a double-blind, randomized, Placebo-controlled clinical trial vs. Whey protein. J Int Soc Sports Nutr. 2015;12(1):3. Published 2015 Jan 21. doi:10.1186/s12970-014-0064-5
  17. National Research Council (US) Subcommittee on the Tenth Edition of the Recommended Dietary Allowances. Recommended Dietary Allowances: 10th Edition. Washington (DC): National Academies Press (US); 1989. 6, Protein and Amino Acids. Available from: https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK234922/
  18. Institute of Medicine (US) Committee on Nutrition, Trauma, and the Brain; Erdman J, Oria M, Pillsbury L, editors. Nutrition and Traumatic Brain Injury: Improving Acute and Subacute Health Outcomes in Military Personnel. Washington (DC): National Academies Press (US); 2011. 8, Branched-Chain Amino Acids. Available from: https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK209312/
  19. Sanghera DK, Sapkota BR, Aston CE, Blackett PR. Vitamin D Status, Gender Differences, and Cardiometabolic Health Disparities. Ann Nutr Metab. 2017;70(2):79-87. doi:10.1159/000458765
  20. Fallah A, Mohammad-Hasani A, Colagar AH. Zinc is an Essential Element for Male Fertility: A Review of Zn Roles in Men’s Health, Germination, Sperm Quality, and Fertilization. J Reprod Infertil. 2018;19(2):69-81.
  21. Korrapati D, Jeyakumar SM, Putcha UK, et al. Coconut oil consumption improves fat-free mass, plasma HDL-cholesterol and insulin sensitivity in healthy men with normal BMI compared to peanut oil. Clin Nutr. 2019;38(6):2889-2899. doi:10.1016/j.clnu.2018.12.026
  22. Voight BF, Peloso GM, Orho-Melander M, et al. Plasma HDL cholesterol and risk of myocardial infarction: a mendelian randomisation study [published correction appears in Lancet. 2012 Aug 11;380(9841):564]. Lancet. 2012;380(9841):572-580. doi:10.1016/S0140-6736(12)60312-2
  23. Blomstrand E, Eliasson J, Karlsson HK, Köhnke R. Branched-chain amino acids activate key enzymes in protein synthesis after physical exercise. J Nutr. 2006;136(1 Suppl):269S-73S. doi:10.1093/jn/136.1.269S
  24. Wang Y, Liu Z, Han Y, Xu J, Huang W, Li Z. Medium Chain Triglycerides enhances exercise endurance through the increased mitochondrial biogenesis and metabolism. PLoS One. 2018;13(2):e0191182. Published 2018 Feb 8. doi:10.1371/journal.pone.0191182
  25. Ali, Diyar. (2019). Effects of creatine, amino acid and whey protein supplements on gaining weight in a bodybuilder. 3. P 84-95. 
  26. Li P, Zhao Y, Liu Y, et al. Cyanocobalamin promotes muscle development through the TGF-β signaling pathway. Food Funct. 2022;13(24):12721-12732. Published 2022 Dec 13. doi:10.1039/d2fo00315e
  27. Ge Y, Zadeh M, Mohamadzadeh M. Vitamin B12 Regulates the Transcriptional, Metabolic, and Epigenetic Programing in Human Ileal Epithelial Cells. Nutrients. 2022;14(14):2825. Published 2022 Jul 9. doi:10.3390/nu14142825
  28. Bohl CH, Volpe SL. Magnesium and exercise. Crit Rev Food Sci Nutr. 2002;42(6):533-563. doi:10.1080/20024091054247
  29. Srinivasan K. Black pepper and its pungent principle-piperine: a review of diverse physiological effects. Crit Rev Food Sci Nutr. 2007;47(8):735-748. doi:10.1080/10408390601062054
  30. Neufingerl N, Eilander A. Nutrient Intake and Status in Adults Consuming Plant-Based Diets Compared to Meat-Eaters: A Systematic Review. Nutrients. 2021;14(1):29. Published 2021 Dec 23. doi:10.3390/nu14010029
  31. Tavares Toscano L, Tavares Toscano L, Leite Tavares R, da Oliveira Silva CS, Silva AS. Chia induces clinically discrete weight loss and improves lipid profile only in altered previous values. Nutr Hosp. 2014;31(3):1176-1182. Published 2014 Dec 14. doi:10.3305/nh.2015.31.3.8242
  32. Chen L, Zhu Y, Hu Z, Wu S, Jin C. Beetroot as a functional food with huge health benefits: Antioxidant, antitumor, physical function, and chronic metabolomics activity. Food Sci Nutr. 2021;9(11):6406-6420. Published 2021 Sep 9. doi:10.1002/fsn3.2577
  33. Lee JS, Sreenivasulu N, Hamilton RS, Kohli A. Brown Rice, a Diet Rich in Health Promoting Properties. J Nutr Sci Vitaminol (Tokyo). 2019;65(Supplement):S26-S28. doi:10.3177/jnsv.65.S26
  34. Hay E, Lucariello A, Contieri M, et al. Therapeutic effects of turmeric in several diseases: An overview. Chem Biol Interact. 2019;310:108729. doi:10.1016/j.cbi.2019.108729
  35. Anh NH, Kim SJ, Long NP, et al. Ginger on Human Health: A Comprehensive Systematic Review of 109 Randomized Controlled Trials. Nutrients. 2020;12(1):157. Published 2020 Jan 6. doi:10.3390/nu12010157
  36. Calella P, Cerullo G, Di Dio M, et al. Antioxidant, anti-inflammatory and immunomodulatory effects of spirulina in exercise and sport: A systematic review. Front Nutr. 2022;9:1048258. Published 2022 Dec 14. doi:10.3389/fnut.2022.1048258
  37. Baek GH, Yoo KM, Kim SY, et al. Collagen Peptide Exerts an Anti-Obesity Effect by Influencing the Firmicutes/Bacteroidetes Ratio in the Gut. Nutrients. 2023;15(11):2610. Published 2023 Jun 2. doi:10.3390/nu15112610
  38. Matsuoka R, Shirouchi B, Umegatani M, et al. Dietary egg-white protein increases body protein mass and reduces body fat mass through an acceleration of hepatic β-oxidation in rats. Br J Nutr. 2017;118(6):423-430. doi:10.1017/S0007114517002306
  39. Matsuoka R, Sugano M. Health Functions of Egg Protein. Foods. 2022;11(15):2309. Published 2022 Aug 2. doi:10.3390/foods11152309
  40. Yubero-Serrano EM, Lopez-Moreno J, Gomez-Delgado F, Lopez-Miranda J. Extra virgin olive oil: More than a healthy fat. Eur J Clin Nutr. 2019;72(Suppl 1):8-17. doi:10.1038/s41430-018-0304-x
  41. Gupta R, Prakash H. Association of dietary ghee intake with coronary heart disease and risk factor prevalence in rural males. J Indian Med Assoc. 1997;95(3):67-83.
  42. Halima BH, Sonia G, Sarra K, Houda BJ, Fethi BS, Abdallah A. Apple Cider Vinegar Attenuates Oxidative Stress and Reduces the Risk of Obesity in High-Fat-Fed Male Wistar Rats. J Med Food. 2018;21(1):70-80. doi:10.1089/jmf.2017.0039
  43. Dai X, Stanilka JM, Rowe CA, et al. Consuming Lentinula edodes (Shiitake) Mushrooms Daily Improves Human Immunity: A Randomized Dietary Intervention in Healthy Young Adults. J Am Coll Nutr. 2015;34(6):478-487. doi:10.1080/07315724.2014.950391
  44. Bito T, Okumura E, Fujishima M, Watanabe F. Potential of Chlorella as a Dietary Supplement to Promote Human Health. Nutrients. 2020;12(9):2524. Published 2020 Aug 20. doi:10.3390/nu12092524
  45. Rickards L, Lynn A, Harrop D, Barker ME, Russell M, Ranchordas MK. Effect of Polyphenol-Rich Foods, Juices, and Concentrates on Recovery from Exercise Induced Muscle Damage: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis. Nutrients. 2021;13(9):2988. Published 2021 Aug 27. doi:10.3390/nu13092988
  46. Schell J, Betts NM, Lyons TJ, Basu A. Raspberries Improve Postprandial Glucose and Acute and Chronic Inflammation in Adults with Type 2 Diabetes. Ann Nutr Metab. 2019;74(2):165-174. doi:10.1159/000497226
  47. Alba C MA, Daya M, Franck C. Tart Cherries and health: Current knowledge and need for a better understanding of the fate of phytochemicals in the human gastrointestinal tract. Crit Rev Food Sci Nutr. 2019;59(4):626-638. doi:10.1080/10408398.2017.1384918

The post Best Meal Replacement Shakes for Weight Loss, Weight Gain, and More (2024) appeared first on Breaking Muscle.

]]>
Best Jump Ropes for Beginners, CrossFit, Boxing, and More (2024) https://breakingmuscle.com/best-jump-rope/ Tue, 24 Oct 2023 19:24:37 +0000 https://breakingmuscle.com/?p=199278 If you’re looking for a way to spice up your cardio routine without a bulky or expensive cardio machine, jumping rope is a great option. It’s cost-effective, easy to learn, and could improve your health. However, with so many options available today, how are you supposed to pick one? Choice overload is a real thing, and if you...

The post Best Jump Ropes for Beginners, CrossFit, Boxing, and More (2024) appeared first on Breaking Muscle.

]]>
If you’re looking for a way to spice up your cardio routine without a bulky or expensive cardio machine, jumping rope is a great option. It’s cost-effective, easy to learn, and could improve your health. However, with so many options available today, how are you supposed to pick one? Choice overload is a real thing, and if you have too many options, you might not pick any! Therefore, we’ve made it easy for CrossFitters, boxers, and everyone in between to find the best jump rope for them. 

Check out our top 11 picks, including everything from the best jump rope for double-unders and boxing to the best choices if you’re on a budget or want to go cordless. 

How We Chose the Best Jump Rope

Not to toot our own horn, but we’re no strangers to fitness equipment at Breaking Muscle. As certified personal trainers, strength and conditioning coaches, and all-around fitness junkies, we’ve used plenty of commercial and home gym equipment. Many of our staff members have also been doing CrossFit for at least a decade or more, and naturally, jump ropes have been in our fitness equipment line-up.

In fact, our in-house team has tested almost 30 jump ropes. We could tell you which ones are beginner and budget-friendly, as well as the ones that can help you PR your double-unders.

To create the best jump rope list, we made a list of all the jump ropes we’ve ever tried and ranked each one on its durability, performance, unique features, and more. Following that, we scoured the Internet to research different options. Before long, we realized some commonalities regarding which jump ropes were the most ideal for any situation and began categorizing them. The end result is what you’ll find below. 

Our Top Picks for the Best Jump Rope

Best Jump Rope Overall: Rx Smart Gear Original

Rx Smart Gear Original
4.4
  • Length: 7’10” to 9’4”
  • Cable material: Aircraft-grade cable with PVC coating 
  • Cable thickness: Not listed
  • Handle material: Not listed
Check Price

Pros

  • Customizable with lots of handle and cable color options
  • Gives good feedback 
  • Well-made ergonomic handle

Cons

  • Cable hurts if it hits you 
  • May not hold up well in colder weather
  • Not adjustable

Wouldn’t it be neat if you could buy a jump rope that was made just for you? Sometimes, the options found in the store just don’t check all of the boxes. For instance, it might have the cable weight you desire but not come in a length that works for your height. Or maybe you love the cable and/or handle color, but the other factors don’t align with your fitness goals.

Rx Smart Gear (aka RXSG) alleviates these concerns by offering an attractive choice for both beginners and experts. It’s customizable to fit your needs aesthetically and functionally, so it easily lands on this list as the best jump rope overall. 

The Rx Smart Gear Jump Ropes are made with a PVC-coated, aircraft-grade cable. They come in 10 different lengths that can accommodate individuals between 4’9″ and 6’5″ tall. There are also many cable colors to choose from, like green, yellow, and different shades of blue.

The thickness of the cable varies, too. Amanda Dvorak, Reviews Editor at Breaking Muscle, purchased RXSG’s “beginner” rope when she first began her CrossFit journey. This cable, which RXSG calls “Buff,” is 3.4 ounces, while the other three options are 2.6, 1.8, and 1.3 ounces. She says, “The thicker rope moves more slowly, so it’s supposed to be able to help beginners get the timing of double-unders before they move on to speed ropes with thinner cables.” 

Like the cables, the RX Smart Gear handles come in multiple colors. If you like cute gym equipment, you can find it here. From leopard print and camo to solid colors like sea green, orange, and yellow — you’ve got options. 

While it’s unclear what the handles are made of, we can clearly state that they’re high-quality. They’re six inches long and one inch thick with indentations on them. The indentations allow you to conveniently place your thumbs so you can maintain a relaxed grip. They’re wrapped in grip tape to prevent your hands from slipping when they get sweaty.

However, Amanda notes, “Even though the handles are grippy and comfortable to hold, I notice that they burn out my shoulders and forearms quickly. They’re a lot thicker than any other jump rope I’ve used.” 

RXSG uses a patented swivel attachment to make controlling the speed of the ropes seamless for athletes. The ball-bearing system in the handles appears to play on its own power to rotate the rope around. So, whether you’re doing CrossFit, HIIT, or another cardio workout, it should give you what you’re looking for performance-wise. 

For $55 to $60, you get a custom-made, durable jump rope that lasts. Amanda occasionally uses hers on pavement, and it hasn’t frayed yet.

In addition, it seems to hold up well in cold weather for the most part. However, some have complained that the PVC cord starts to break down once it reaches 20 degrees and below. While it’s not an adjustable rope, it’s a good one. However, you’ll want to watch your legs and the back of your arms because this steel cable will sting you if you miss a rep. 

RELATED: Best Kettlebells for Home Gyms

Best Jump Rope for Beginners: REP Speed Cable Jump Rope

REP Fitness Speed Cable Jump Rope
4.0
  • Length: 9.8’
  • Cable material: Rubber-coated galvanized steel
  • Cable thickness: 0.1 inch
  • Handle material: Plastic
Check Price

Pros

  • Affordable  
  • Lightweight
  • Adjustable

Cons

  • May not be ideal for taller individuals

Chances are, If you’re new to jumping rope, you don’t want to spend a ton of money. You likely just want to get a feel for it and see if it’s right for you. But do you have to sacrifice quality if you buy a cheaper jump rope? Nope! The REP Speed Cable Jump Rope is $11.99 if you only get one, but you can save by buying a set of five or 10. The five-pack is $47.50, and the 10-pack is $90, so even if one broke, you could just grab another from your home gym stash. 

The REP Speed Cable is an adjustable jump rope that allows for workout versatility. It was built with the various needs of jumpers in mind, so whether you’re into cross-training or HIIT, it should work for you. This is incredibly helpful for beginners as you might not be sure how long the cable should be or what kind of workouts you want to do. 

The cable is made of rubber-coated galvanized steel and is 118.1 inches long. You can find the best length for you by standing in the center of the 9.8-foot-long rope and pulling the handles straight up. Once the handles touch your armpits, set it there. While the length should work for most, it could come up a bit short for taller individuals. Keep in mind that most ropes are 10 feet, and this is slightly under that.

The cable is also relatively thin, only 0.1″ inches thick. However, this is what you’d expect from a speed rope. The REP Speed Cable Jump Rope would be good for those who are proficient with double-unders but not ideal for beginners. The thinner, lighter cable can make it more difficult to perfect your rythym when you’re learning how to jump rope. 

The plastic handles are 4.5 inches long, shorther than the handles on the Rogue SR-2 Speed Rope, but they should still fit comfortably in your hands. They’re very lightweight and easy to grip. Overall, if you’re a beginner looking for a tangle-free cable you can use on the go or at home, these are a solid choice. The REP Fitness Speed Cable is only 0.2 pounds and isn’t going to weigh you down.  

Best Jump Rope for Boxing: TRX Speed Rope

TRX Speed Rope
4.3
  • Length: 10'
  • Cable material: Vinyl-sheathed metal cable with nylon coating 
  • Cable thickness: Not listed
  • Handle material: Plastic and urethane
Check Price

Pros

  • Solid ball bearing system 
  • Ergonomically-designed handles 
  • Very lightweight

Cons

  • Cord coating may wear 
  • Higher price tag

Jumping rope is a very common boxing cardio workout that not only helps with weight loss but also mental stamina. We consider the TRX Speed Rope the best jump rope for boxing because it’s adjustable, lightweight, and has tapered handles. These make a good recipe for easily performing double-unders and other speed work drills. 

The vinyl-sheathed metal cable with a nylon coating is 10 feet long and can be adjusted to fit your height. While the diameter of the cord is unclear, but it appears incredibly thin. Although the cable should hold up well in indoor settings, one customer reviewer online noticed the nylon coat fraying after just two months of training on the pavement. Given that this jump rope is $34.95, most people wouldn’t expect that to occur at that price point. 

The tapered plastic and urethane handles allow for a comfortable grip, so you shouldn’t have to worry about them slipping once you get sweaty. The etched surface adds to the ergonomic design, allowing you to maintain a solid grip from warm-up to workout completion. As people get better, they tend to hold the handles more lightly, so you need grippy handles that won’t let the rope just fly out of your hands as you get faster. 

The four hi-precision ball bearings in the handles reduce resistance, so the rope spins quickly and fluidly. It also prevents the rope from getting tangled. A reliable rope allows you to practice proper footwork, improve coordination, and develop the quickness boxers need to be successful in the ring. 

The TRX Speed Rope has an ultra-light profile, doesn’t kink easily, and has handles that support good performance. The coated wire is also more forgiving than other jump rope choices that tend to sting when you miss a rep. In the grand scheme of things, it can be a durable and reliable choice as long as you steer clear of hard and rough surfaces. 

Best Weighted Jump Rope: Rogue Heavy Jump Rope

Rogue Heavy Rope
4.0
  • Length: 9' and 10’ options 
  • Cable material: Not listed
  • Cable thickness: Eight millimeters 
  • Handle material: TPE polymer handles
Check Price

Pros

  • Cool, aesthetically-pleasing design
  • Smooth handle rotation
  • Firm handles make it easier to hold onto the rope for long periods

Cons

  • Frays on rough surfaces  
  • Painful with skin contact 
  • Unadjustable 
  • Pricier

While some jump ropes are made to reduce resistance, others, like the Rogue Heavy Jump Rope, are created to be resistance tools. Featuring a thick, bare steel cable and weighing in at almost two pounds, it’s a good rope for cardio, improving speed, and building endurance. You can perform single-unders, skip roping, and Tabata-style workouts with this heavy-duty jump rope.

Heavy-rope double-unders have also appeared at the CrossFit Games, so if you’re a CrossFitter with aspirations to compete, you may want to add this rope to your arsenal.

Rogue’s eight-millimeter diameter cable is available in two lengths: nine feet and 10 feet. The nine-foot cord is 1.5 pounds, while the 10-foot one is 1.75. Two pounds doesn’t seem like a lot, but in the case of jump roping, it adds quite a bit of resistance.

In addition, as previously mentioned, this is a bare steel rope. Therefore, if it hits your shins, it will hurt. I recommend only considering this rope if you’re already good at jumping rope.

Many customers suggested that a durable coating could be helpful, as the Rogue Heavy Rope tends to fray and splinter, especially outdoors. Rogue even mentions on their website that this rope is not made for abrasive surfaces. If you want to use these outdoors, we recommend putting down some gym floor mats to help prolong the longevity of the rope. 

The one-inch diameter TPE polymer handles are aesthetically pleasing, which matters to those who care about their gym equipment’s appearance. They’re red and have the Rogue logo imprinted on them. 

Also, compared to other jump ropes, the handles here are firmer and even a bit longer. At 6.25 inches, these will undoubtedly stick out of your hands. However, I’ve found that it helps to have a more solid handle when you’re dealing with a thicker rope. The swivels in the handles make for a smooth workout, too. Using this jump rope would qualify as a full-body workout, but you’ll mainly feel it in your forearms, shoulders, and calves. 

Depending on the length you need, expect to pay around $55 to $60 for this jump rope. It’s priced the same as the RXSG rope, even though the cord isn’t as well-made. Most buyers seemed satisfied with the jump rope’s performance, but others were disappointed by the durability. In addition, others wished it was adjustable, but depending on your needs, this might not be a big deal. 

Best CrossFit Jump Rope: Rogue SR-2 Speed Rope

Rogue SR-2 Speed Rope
3.8
  • Length: 120”
  • Cable material: Not listed
  • Cable thickness: 3/32"
  • Handle material: Aircraft-grade aluminum
Check Price

Pros

  • Light, knurled handles 
  • High-precision bearing swivel 
  • Multiple handle color choices
  • Adjustable rope
  • Fast rope  

Cons

  • Not recommended for abrasive surfaces 
  • Small screws are challenging to adjust
  • Cable gets coiled easily

Usually, scissors and jump ropes don’t mix, but for the Rogue SR-2 Speed Rope 3.0, you’ll need a good pair before you get started. Seen as one of the best CrossFit jump ropes on the market, this Rogue rope has many admirable features that make for a good workout experience. This is likely because this rope has been out for a while, allowing Rogue to improve based on customer feedback. After being out for over five years and this being its third iteration, it has become a highly sought-after rope for CrossFitters and other athletes. 

The plastic-coated cable is 120 inches long, but you can use scissors to trim it to a length that meets your height requirement. One of our product testers had no trouble using a regular pair of scissors to cut the rope and didn’t notice any fraying in the cable afterward.

If you’re new to double-unders, you may want to leave a bit more length so you have more to work with. The cable is also 2.38 millimeters thick, so it’s pretty thin, but it’s what you’d expect for a speed rope. What people don’t like about these thinner ropes is that they tend to get coiled up more easily. Therefore, if you put this jump rope in your gym bag, don’t be surprised if you pull it out and it’s all warped up. 

Honestly, the handles are probably one of the most impressive features of this jump rope. They’re 6.75 inches long and 0.875 inches in diameter. However, if you prefer shorter handles, Rogue offers some that are 5.25 inches. This rope’s second iteration was that long, but they lengthened it for the 3.0. These are made with aircraft-grade aluminum and have about an inch and a half of knurling at the ends. The textured knurling is mild and dense to allow for a firm grip without hurting the palm of your hands. One staff member at Breaking Muscle said, “It feels nice in hand compared to plastic handles.” 

Rogue uses a bearing swivel so the rope can rotate effortlessly in all directions. They also placed high-speed oil on the bearing handle mechanism to allow it to move even more efficiently. The third iteration of this speed rope features a lightweight aluminum head that’s CNC machined and anodized. In other words, it promotes fast speeds and little resistance. Our product tester, a certified personal trainer and a CrossFit Level 1 coach, PR’d her double-unders using this rope, so we think there’s something extraordinary about it. 

For $46.50, you’re getting a super lightweight rope (only 0.35 pounds) that comes in different colors. There are eight handle colors that come with a clear-coated cable, but the black handles also come with a red cable. While one Breaking Muscle staff member said she’d give this jump rope 10 stars if she could, some people are less than impressed with the rope itself and are more in love with the handles. 

RELATED: Best Resistance Bands

Best Jump Rope for Double-Unders: REP Competition Speed Rope

REP Fitness Competition Speed Rope
4.2
  • Length: 118.1"
  • Cable material: Rubber-coated galvanized steel
  • Cable thickness: 0.1"
  • Handle material: Not listed
Check Price

Pros

  • Knurled handles 
  • Lightweight 
  • Inexpensive 
  • Handles are available in two colors 
  • 30-day money-back guarantee

Cons

  • Small screws make adjusting difficult 
  • Not ideal for outdoor use

Ready to become the double-unders king or queen? While there’s no guarantee that any rope can make that happen, the REP Competition Speed Rope might be a helpful tool in your arsenal. This 9’8 long rope is adjustable, light as a feather, and claimed to be made to last. Plus, it only costs around $25.99, a pretty attractive price tag compared to others on this list. 

The rubber-coated galvanized steel cable on this jump rope is 118.1 inches long. It can be adjusted to fit your height and fitness goals, but some people claim that making adjustments isn’t the easiest thing to do. For example, one customer suggested that the small screws are too challenging to adjust quickly, which could be frustrating if you need to adjust the length in the middle of a WOD.

Another customer explained that there’s just too much excess cord hanging over after you adjust. You may need a rubber band to hold it in place, or consider cutting it. If you do neither, the steel cord may randomly hit your hands while working out. 

The cable is only 0.1 inches thick, so it’s very thin and light. You can expect it to spin quickly, which could be a pro or a con, depending on your experience level. If you’re new to double-unders, you may find it more challenging to control the rope, but it shouldn’t be a problem if you’re a pro.  

The tapered handles are 5.9 inches long and 0.7 inches thick, so they’re slim and fit well in the hands. They’re also knurled to help you maintain your grip as you work up a sweat with each additional rep. You can choose black or silver handles, but the cord on both is blue. 

Like similar speed ropes, this one has ball-bearing mechanisms that make swiveling the rope seamless. Thanks to the bearing construction, your wrists shouldn’t tire out too fast. 

So, is it worth it? For the price, it’s not a bad rope. It’s got adjustable length, is only 0.4 pounds, and features knurled handles that allow for a nice grip. This sturdy, lightweight, and affordable speed rope could help you take your double-unders to the next level. 

Best Speed Jump Rope: RPM Training Session4 Speed Rope

RPM Training Session4 Speed Rope
3.9
  • Length: 12’ 
  • Cable material: Alloy steel 
  • Cable thickness: Not listed
  • Handle material: Aluminum
Check Price

Pros

  • Five-year warranty 
  • Can replace cables 
  • Comfortable aluminum handles 
  • Proprietary bearing placement 
  • Patented Dual-Axis Rotation

Cons

  • Permanent adjustment 
  • Expensive

If you’re looking for one of the best speed jump ropes on the market and want to benefit from the free shipping on Amazon, look at the RPM Training Session Speed Rope. With 500+ reviews and an almost 5-star rating, there’s something about this rope that athletes love. In fact, it’s in such high demand that you might not even be able to find it in stock. So, what’s this $65 jump rope got going for it that makes individuals gladly pay a higher price AND wait seven to 14 days before it actually ships?

This speed rope is made in the USA at RPM’s headquarters in northern California. The coated cable is 12 feet long, but it’s unclear what the exact thickness is.

Nonetheless, since most people don’t need a 12-foot rope, you’ll need to cut it to ensure it meets your height and fitness needs. Many people find the cut-to-size approach inconvenient since it’s a permanent adjustment and doesn’t allow room for mistakes. In addition, individuals with larger hands have found maneuvering the screws on this rope challenging. Some have even broken parts of the handle in the process. Fortunately, RPM does have a video on their website that shows folks exactly how to do it.  

Considering the price of this rope, it’s reasonable to assume that the coated cord wouldn’t have any issues, but a few comments say otherwise. Some buyers say the protective coating is thin and frays after just two months. However, others say it lasts a long time, especially if used on softer surfaces. They have colorful replacement cables available for $9.99, but you likely don’t want to buy those after spending $65. 

The aluminum handles on this rope are definitely brag-worthy. They have a barbell-style grip thanks to the diamond knurling and come in five different colors, like steel blue and rose. RPM believes in their comfortable handles so much that they offer a five-year warranty. 

The dual-bearing anti-friction placement also makes a big difference, especially when spinning a really fast rope. Resistance is the last thing you want when speed roping, so their proprietary bearing allows proper power transfer and free spin.

In addition to that is their patented dual-axis rotation that helps the handles stay in place at the end of the cable. One complaint people often have about thinner cables is how tangled up they get, but this feature prevents kinks from forming in the rope and thus allows optimal performance. Because it’s practically frictionless, it helps reduce fatigue in your hands and wrists so you can workout longer. 

Ultimately, if you’re looking to master speed rope movements, this sleek rope is one to consider. As one buyer said, “Getting the new rope was the best decision and let me unlock a new level of speed!” Another noted that these are “The Ricky Bobby of jump ropes.” 

Best Cordless Jump Rope: Renpho Smart Jump Rope

RPM Training Session4 Speed Rope
3.9
  • Length: 12’ 
  • Cable material: Alloy steel 
  • Cable thickness: Not listed
  • Handle material: Aluminum
Check Price

Pros

  • Great for indoor and outdoor use
  • Tangle-free 
  • Trackable data 
  • Convenient

Cons

  • Battery-operated
  • Short battery life

I can admit that a cordless jump rope sounds a bit out of this world. Seriously, how do you jump rope without a cord? Well, with Bluetooth, of course. The Renpho Smart Jump Rope 2 is a weighted cordless rope that allows you to record and review your data on their handy-dandy app. However, a steel wire rope with PVC sheathing comes in the package, too, just in case you want the real jump rope experience. So, if you want the best of both worlds, this might be your best bet. 

The Renpho Smart Jump Rope is a good solution for those who want to jump rope outside without ruining their cords. Coated and bare cords can only endure so much contact with abrasive surfaces and, at some point, become practically useless. But with a cordless jump rope, you don’t have to worry about this. Instead, you just grab the silicone handles, attach the cordless balls, and select which fitness mode you’d like to experience. You can also use the app to set weekly goals, compete with others, track fat burning, and more.  

One handle features an LCD screen that shows the battery level, skipping rope data, and Bluetooth connection status. The black handles are 7.1 inches long, 0.8 inches thick and are made with ABS (Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene) and silica gel. These are a bit longer than other handles on this list, but the thickness seems similar. The ABS material is better suited to tolerate the outdoor environment, and the silica gel makes it skid-free and easy to clean. 

Although you don’t have to worry about adjusting the cord length or potentially tripping over a cord, there are other issues. For instance, the handles require two AAA batteries, and it appears that the battery life doesn’t last long. As a result, you may find yourself frequently replacing batteries, which could be resolved if this allowed USB charging. 

Based on the numerous positive reviews, consumers love this cordless jump rope. Several comments suggest that it’s fun, well-structured, and motivating. Users also say that jumping still feels natural and comfortable, which is good to know because it might appear awkward to some. Lastly, while most people don’t buy this for the 3-meter PVC rope, it is available and can be adjusted without cutting it. For only $29.99, this smart rope seems to pack a ton of value.  

Best Beaded Jump Rope: Elite SRS Beaded Jump Rope

Elite SRS Beaded Jump Rope
3.5
  • Length: 10’ 
  • Cable material: Shatterproof plastic beads
  • Cable thickness: Not listed
  • Handle material: Plastic polymer
Check Price

Pros

  • One-year warranty 
  • Adjustable 
  • Lightweight 
  • Durable

Cons

  • May be difficult to pull the rope through handle holes
  • Five-inch handle doesn’t have grip tape

When I was a kid who jumped rope on the playground during recess, I used a beaded jump rope. It seemed indestructible and didn’t hurt when it smacked my legs. If you also have fond memories of using beaded jump ropes in your youth, why not go back to what you know? The Elite SRS Beaded Jump Rope is a version of the throwback rope we’re all familiar with, but it’s much better. 

One thing that makes this jump rope better than the ones from childhood is that it’s faster, so you can use it for CrossFit. Cheaper beaded ropes tend to be heavier, slower, and tangle more, which makes doing crossovers with them practically ineffective.

Despite the Elite SRS Beaded Jump Rope having one-inch shatterproof plastic beads throughout, the whole thing is still super lightweight. Upon arrival, the 10-foot-long cord only weighs three to 3.5 ounces. That’s just enough weight for you to feel the rhythm of the beads but not enough to feel like it’s creating resistance. However, some people don’t like that. One purchaser said, “I was hoping this rope would be heavier.” 

The Elite SRS Beaded Jump Rope is also adjustable. If you’re 6’4, the 10-foot rope length might work perfectly, but others will need to resize it to fit their needs. You can do this by loosening the washer on one end of the handle, removing beads, and cutting any excess cord. It’s meant to be relatively easy, but one person felt getting the rope back through the small handle holes was challenging. 

Many people complained that the rope was just too long, but they may not have been aware that they could adjust it. Elite SRS does provide a rope sizing guide on its website, where you can see how much you should cut based on your height and workout routine. How much rope you keep will depend on whether your goal is consistency, efficiency, or control. 

The five-inch plastic polymer handles come in black or white colors, are low-density, and provide a comfortable grip. However, if you go with the eight-inch handles, those have grip tape, which comes in handy when sweating. There’s nothing worse than getting the hang of your routine and then having the rope slip out of your hands.  

Overall, most people seem to like this rope, especially beginners. Individuals find skipping and learning new routines easier because the beads provide more feedback than other ropes. The $22.97 price tag might seem a little steep for what it is, but it’s a sturdy rope, comes with a one-year warranty, and you get free shipping (thanks, Amazon).

RELATED: Best Weighted Vests

Best Smart Jump Rope: Crossrope AMP Smart Jump Rope Handles

Crossrope AMP Smart Jump Rope Handles
3.5
  • Length: Cable not included but is available separately in sizes XS to XL
  • Cable material: N/A
  • Cable thickness: N/A 
  • Handle material: Not listed
Check Price

Pros

  • 60-day money-back guarantee 
  • Helpful jump data 
  • Access to more than 2,000 personalized workouts 
  • Rechargeable battery

Cons

  • Buggy 
  • Requires membership and compatible rope

In a world where folks want smart cars and smart refrigerators, why not get smart jump rope handles, too? Similar to the previously mentioned smart rope, the Crossrope AMP Smart Jump Rope Handles are Bluetooth-enabled, too. These may be a convenient choice for those who want to do HIIT and endurance fitness training outdoors. It’s also appealing to individuals who like to use apps to track their stats and receive feedback. However, is it really worth $99? 

Out of all the jump ropes on this list, this is the first one without a rope. Instead, you get a pair of tech handles that let you see critical data, like your speed, power, and jumping feedback. The latter is one of a kind, as it shares your average jumps per minute (JPM), power output, max JPM, streaks, and more.

In addition, with the Crossover App, you can set personalized benchmarks and get access to over 2,000 personalized workouts. It is neat that you can see recommendations within the app regarding the targets you need to hit during each interval based on your current level of fitness and goals. 

While all of that sounds good and dandy, there’s one catch. You need a membership to utilize those data-tracking features and personalized workouts. Before buying this, you must determine how vital those metrics are to you. As one buyer mentioned, “There is no functionality of this as a counter unless you sign up for an ongoing monthly membership.” So, if you don’t plan on paying $11.99 per month or $99.99 per year to access those perks, buying the handles is probably not worth it. 

The handles are 1.06 inches thick and weigh 5.7 ounces each. Interestingly, one handle is heavier than the entire Elite SRS Beaded Jump Rope. They’re attached to precision steel bearings that are supposed to make jump roping smooth. Based on the mostly positive reviews and 4.9 average rating on their website, there may be some truth to that. However, these handles are only compatible with other Crossrope accessories, so you’d have to decide whether to go “ropeless” or attach one of their classic ropes. Whichever ones you choose, expect to pay between $29.95 and $59.95 per rope/ropeless attachment. 

Unlike the Renpho Smart Jump Rope, this one does have a rechargeable battery, so you don’t have to keep going out buying a new set. By using the micro USB cable, you can easily plug it in, let it fully charge, and get back to your workout. 

The AMP handles are truly smart, but you must be willing to shell out some cash to get all its benefits. This is definitely not a budget-friendly choice, as you’ll have to pay for handles, a rope, and an ongoing membership just for it to function. While it’s neat, it’s not a must-have unless you’re a personal trainer who wants to track your client’s jumps and progress. It’s also something to consider if you live in a small space and want to go the ropeless route. Besides that, you have to decide if it’s a smart choice for you. 

Best Budget Jump Rope: WODFitters Speed Jump Rope

WODFitters Speed Jump Rope
4.0
  • Length: 10'
  • Cable material: Nylon coated steel 
  • Cable thickness: Not listed
  • Handle material: Not listed
Check Price

Pros

  • Affordable
  • Adjustable 
  • Lightweight 
  • Comes with a carrying bag

Cons

  • Not ideal for outdoor use
  • May develop kinks
  • Difficult to cut 

If you’re budget-conscious and want something to get the job done, say hello to the WODFitters Speed Jump Rope. For around $14.97 on Amazon, you’ll get a classic speed rope specially made for CrossFit WODS and fast jumping. But given the price point, can you expect a quality rope? 

The steel cable on this jump rope is 10 feet long and coated with nylon. Although this is a budget-friendly jump rope, it’s still adjustable. There are hand screws available to change the length to what works for you, and it’s not cumbersome to do. This is very convenient in situations where more than one person will be using the rope.

Due to its length, you might need to trim it if you don’t want excess rope getting in the way. Unfortunately, though, there aren’t any instructions on how to do this, which was a complaint from some customers. Even Amanda, Editor at Breaking Muscle, says, “I tried cutting mine once with a wire cutter and couldn’t do it.” 

Another person said their jump rope developed kinks and no longer fully uncoils, so it’s now shorter than they’d like. To avoid this, they suggested leaving some excess cord when cutting just in case this happens to you, too. While Amanda mentioned that “the excess wire may get annoying,” she didn’t experience it tangling up, even when she didn’t lie it on the floor nicely. 

Despite those issues, it’s a very fast rope, likely because it is so thin. However, you’ll want to avoid hitting your legs, as Amanda says, “It hurts more than any other jump rope I’ve tried!” With this rope only weighing 0.2 ounces and using ball bearing technology, it has a high velocity, so you should be able to double-unders and even triple-unders with no problem. 

The black handles are approximately six inches long, relatively thin, and have no knurling. WODFitters states they’re ergonomically designed, and Amanda found them comfortable to hold. She compared them to the thick handles on the RX Smart Gear jump rope and said, “The WODFitters jump rope doesn’t fatigue my forearms and shoulders as much.”

While this isn’t the best jump rope in the world, it’s earned its place as the best budget jump rope currently on the market. On Amazon, it has 4.1 out of 5 stars and mostly positive comments, so it’s worth a try if you don’t want to spend a ton of money. It even comes with a carrying bag. But, like even some of the more costly ropes, this is another one you don’t want to use on concrete, as it won’t last as long. 

What Are the Benefits of Jumping Rope?

Like more traditional cardio exercises, such running and biking, a jump rope workout has many benefits. Here are a few major benefits associated with this activity. 

May Enhance Athletic Performance

It’s not uncommon to see professional athletes, such as boxers, runners, or even MMA fighters, jumping rope to improve their athletic abilities. 

A 2020 study evaluated if and how this form of training impacted the performance of endurance runners. Researchers found that the group who implemented jumping rope in their warm-ups improved their three-kilometer time-trial performance, power, jump ability, and arch stiffness. (1)

An older study that included female adolescent volleyball players found that weighted rope training improved coordination and eccentric endurance of the lower extremities. This is important to volleyball players, who use their legs to support the weight of their body against gravity during a jump-up. (2)

In 2015, a study showed that a 10-minute round of vigorous rope training may help improve cardiorespiratory fitness. This is because it results in high heart rates and energy expenditures. For athletes, boosting cardiorespiratory endurance could help with doing physical activities for longer. (3)

These are just three examples, but there are countless other studies out there that illustrate how jumping rope may better athleticism. 

RELATED: 10 Benefits of Cardio: Build Your Physique, Health, Performance, and More

May Improve Health and Physical Strength 

Jumping rope activates so many muscle groups, so it’s no surprise how beneficial it may be to the body.

In 2018, a study sought to understand the effect that 12 weeks of jump rope exercise may have on adolescent girls with prehypertension. Researchers discovered that such intervention could improve cardiovascular disease risk factors for that age group. (4)

Another 2018 study wanted to assess whether jump training could boost muscular power among adults 50 and older. They learned that this intervention was not only safe but also effective for this age group. (5)

In addition to the above examples, jumping rope is a great activity if you’re trying to lose weight and want a simple way to burn calories. If you’re 155 pounds, jumping rope fast for 30 minutes can burn 421 calories. You wouldn’t even burn that many calories running six miles per hour in that time. 

May Enhance Cognitive Abilities

In addition to its physical benefits, jumping rope may help with cognitive regulation. A 2021 study revealed that long-rope jumping may enhance cognitive performance because it’s rhythmic. Study participants had improved attention and lower anxiety. (6)

Adaptable, Affordable, and Space Saving

Whether you’re a kid, teen, or younger/older adult, jumping rope is a relatively easy physical activity to learn. Plus, buying a jump rope is inexpensive, especially compared to treadmills, ellipticals, or a set of dumbbells. A jump rope also takes up a lot less space than those aforementioned items!

What To Look For in a Jump Rope

If you’re looking for a new jump rope for yourself or your favorite CrossFitter friend, here are some factors you’ll want to consider. 

Sizing and Adjustment

The size of your rope and your ability to make adjustments are very important. Most ropes are around nine to 10 feet and can be cut and/or altered to fit your height requirement. It’s best to see if the company selling the jump rope has a rope sizing guide that you can refer to. They may suggest keeping your rope longer or shorter, depending on the activity you’ll be doing.   

When it comes to rope adjustments, pay close attention to what the company selling the product really means. Sometimes, “adjustment” means you have to cut it to size, which isn’t something that everyone is comfortable with. The cut-to-size approach doesn’t leave much room for error, particularly if you snip too much. 

Others may mean you’ll have to use clasps, screws, or knots to alter the length. The ones with clasps or screws are appealing because you can adjust it whenever you want. Unfortunately, constantly moving the clasps up and down could result in the rope fraying. Nonetheless, I personally recommend that beginners use adjustable clasps, as cutting is too permanent for someone new to rope training. As a newbie, you might want to experiment with different lengths to see what works for you. 

Rotation Mechanism

You probably noticed that each handle on this list was attached to a bearing system, and there’s a good reason for that. Bearing systems allow ropes to rotate in all directions, which is essential for speed ropes. You want your rope to spin as smooth as butter and not cause any restrictions. 

Bushing rotation systems, on the other hand, limit what you can do. They don’t allow the same degree of rotation and aren’t as fast. However, this could be helpful to individuals new to rope training who’d prefer something that moves a little slower and provides more rope feedback. 

Cable Material

When it comes to cable material, you need to ask yourself if you want coated cables or bare steel cables. If you want coated cables, you must determine what kind of coating you’re looking for. PVC coating is one of the most common and cost-effective choices. It’s also easier to cut but doesn’t hold up well in cold weather or on abrasive surfaces. The Rx Smart Gear Jump Ropes had Renpho Smart Jump Ropes have this type of coating. Nylon coating is another option that’s tougher and more durable. This material is what’s found on the TRX Speed Rope.  

If you go with a bare steel cable, like the Rogue Heavy Jump Rope, it’ll likely be incredibly efficient. But unfortunately, it’s going to hurt when you eventually whip yourself with it. 

Cable Width and Weight

If you’re doing speed training, finding a thin, lightweight cable is ideal. Thicker cables, on the other hand, are heavier and thus cause more resistance. They’re a better choice if you’re hoping to improve your strength.  

Handle Material and Comfort

While much attention is focused on the cable, the handles are just as important. Aluminum handles, like those found on the Rogue SR-2 Speed Rope, are super lightweight, so they don’t tire out your wrists and forearms. Tapered plastic and urethane ones are easier to grip, so they don’t slip out of your hands when you get sweaty. 

Comfort is a huge factor, too. For example, indentations, like those on the Rx Smart Gear Original, allow you to snugly grip the handle in various ways to perform different jumping movements. Knurling is another feature you might like for added comfort and grip. The RPM Training Session Speed Rope is an excellent example of a high-quality, knurled handle that athletes love. 

Final Thoughts

At this point, you’ve gotten hip to some of the best jump ropes available, so which ones will you go with? While there are numerous factors to consider, we hope this roundup makes finding one that meets your fitness goals easier. We’ve taken the time to identify the best jump ropes for boxing, double-unders, CrossFit, beginners, and more so you can make an informed decision. By educating our community, we can prevent hardworking folks like yourself from spending unnecessary money on jump ropes that don’t serve your needs.  

Best Jump Rope: Side-by-Side Comparison

Best Jump Rope
Overall
Best Jump Rope for Beginners
Best Jump Rope for Boxing
Best Weighted Jump Rope
Best CrossFit
Jump Rope
Best Jump Rope for Double-Unders
Best Speed
Jump Rope
Best Cordless Jump Rope
Best Beaded
Jump Rope
Best Smart
Jump Rope
Best Budget
Jump Rope
Description:
  • Length: 7’10” to 9’4”
  • Cable material: Aircraft-grade cable with PVC coating 
  • Cable thickness: Not listed
  • Handle material: Not listed
Description:
  • Length: 9.8’
  • Cable material: Rubber-coated galvanized steel
  • Cable thickness: 0.1 inch
  • Handle material: Plastic
Description:
  • Length: 10'
  • Cable material: Vinyl-sheathed metal cable with nylon coating 
  • Cable thickness: Not listed
  • Handle material: Plastic and urethane
Description:
  • Length: 9' and 10’ options 
  • Cable material: Not listed
  • Cable thickness: Eight millimeters 
  • Handle material: TPE polymer handles
Description:
  • Length: 120”
  • Cable material: Not listed
  • Cable thickness: 3/32"
  • Handle material: Aircraft-grade aluminum
Description:
  • Length: 118.1"
  • Cable material: Rubber-coated galvanized steel
  • Cable thickness: 0.1"
  • Handle material: Not listed
Description:
  • Length: 12’ 
  • Cable material: Alloy steel 
  • Cable thickness: Not listed
  • Handle material: Aluminum
Description:
  • Length: Three meters
  • Cable material: TPU and steel wire
  • Cable thickness: 0.8 inches
  • Handle material: ABS and silica gel
Description:
  • Length: 10’ 
  • Cable material: Shatterproof plastic beads
  • Cable thickness: Not listed
  • Handle material: Plastic polymer
Description:
  • Length: Cable not included but is available separately in sizes XS to XL
  • Cable material: N/A
  • Cable thickness: N/A 
  • Handle material: Not listed
Description:
  • Length: 10'
  • Cable material: Nylon coated steel 
  • Cable thickness: Not listed
  • Handle material: Not listed
Best Jump Rope
Overall
Description:
  • Length: 7’10” to 9’4”
  • Cable material: Aircraft-grade cable with PVC coating 
  • Cable thickness: Not listed
  • Handle material: Not listed
Best Jump Rope for Beginners
Description:
  • Length: 9.8’
  • Cable material: Rubber-coated galvanized steel
  • Cable thickness: 0.1 inch
  • Handle material: Plastic
Best Jump Rope for Boxing
Description:
  • Length: 10'
  • Cable material: Vinyl-sheathed metal cable with nylon coating 
  • Cable thickness: Not listed
  • Handle material: Plastic and urethane
Best Weighted Jump Rope
Description:
  • Length: 9' and 10’ options 
  • Cable material: Not listed
  • Cable thickness: Eight millimeters 
  • Handle material: TPE polymer handles
Best CrossFit
Jump Rope
Description:
  • Length: 120”
  • Cable material: Not listed
  • Cable thickness: 3/32"
  • Handle material: Aircraft-grade aluminum
Best Jump Rope for Double-Unders
Description:
  • Length: 118.1"
  • Cable material: Rubber-coated galvanized steel
  • Cable thickness: 0.1"
  • Handle material: Not listed
Best Speed
Jump Rope
Description:
  • Length: 12’ 
  • Cable material: Alloy steel 
  • Cable thickness: Not listed
  • Handle material: Aluminum
Best Cordless Jump Rope
Description:
  • Length: Three meters
  • Cable material: TPU and steel wire
  • Cable thickness: 0.8 inches
  • Handle material: ABS and silica gel
Best Beaded
Jump Rope
Description:
  • Length: 10’ 
  • Cable material: Shatterproof plastic beads
  • Cable thickness: Not listed
  • Handle material: Plastic polymer
Best Smart
Jump Rope
Description:
  • Length: Cable not included but is available separately in sizes XS to XL
  • Cable material: N/A
  • Cable thickness: N/A 
  • Handle material: Not listed
Best Budget
Jump Rope
Description:
  • Length: 10'
  • Cable material: Nylon coated steel 
  • Cable thickness: Not listed
  • Handle material: Not listed

FAQs

Which jumping rope is the best?

No single jump rope out there will check everyone’s boxes. Instead, look for the best jump rope with features to help you meet your fitness goals. 

Is 500 jump ropes a day enough?

If your goal is weight loss, 500 jump ropes likely won’t be enough to achieve that. On average, individuals can complete 500 jump ropes in three to four minutes, but it’s recommended that we workout at least 30 minutes per day. 

What type of jump rope is best for double-unders?

We think the REP Competition Speed Rope is one of the best jump ropes for double-unders. It’s lightweight with thin cables and has a ball-bearing mechanism that makes it spin quickly and efficiently.

How long should I jump rope for best results?

For building aerobic fitness, aim for 20 to 60 minutes of jump rope. 

Research

  1. García-Pinillos, F., Lago-Fuentes, C., Latorre-Román, P. A., Pantoja-Vallejo, A., & Ramirez-Campillo, R. (2020). Jump-Rope Training: Improved 3-km Time-Trial Performance in Endurance Runners via Enhanced Lower-Limb Reactivity and Foot-Arch Stiffness. International journal of sports physiology and performance, 1–7. Advance online publication. https://doi.org/10.1123/ijspp.2019-0529
  2. Ozer, D., Duzgun, I., Baltaci, G., Karacan, S., & Colakoglu, F. (2011). The effects of rope or weighted rope jump training on strength, coordination and proprioception in adolescent female volleyball players. The Journal of sports medicine and physical fitness, 51(2), 211–219.
  3. Fountaine, C. J., & Schmidt, B. J. (2015). Metabolic cost of rope training. Journal of strength and conditioning research, 29(4), 889–893. https://doi.org/10.1519/JSC.0b013e3182a35da8
  4. Sung, KD., Pekas, E.J., Scott, S.D. et al. The effects of a 12-week jump rope exercise program on abdominal adiposity, vasoactive substances, inflammation, and vascular function in adolescent girls with prehypertension. Eur J Appl Physiol 119, 577–585 (2019). https://doi.org/10.1007/s00421-018-4051-4
  5. Moran, J., Ramirez-Campillo, R., & Granacher, U. (2018). Effects of Jumping Exercise on Muscular Power in Older Adults: A Meta-Analysis. Sports medicine (Auckland, N.Z.), 48(12), 2843–2857. https://doi.org/10.1007/s40279-018-1002-5
  6. Yamashita, M., & Yamamoto, T. (2021). Impact of Long-Rope Jumping on Monoamine and Attention in Young Adults. Brain sciences, 11(10), 1347. https://doi.org/10.3390/brainsci11101347

The post Best Jump Ropes for Beginners, CrossFit, Boxing, and More (2024) appeared first on Breaking Muscle.

]]>
Best Testosterone Boosters for Men (2024): Fight Back Against Low T-Levels https://breakingmuscle.com/best-testosterone-booster/ Fri, 20 Oct 2023 20:46:26 +0000 https://breakingmuscle.com/?p=199264 Testosterone is a crucial hormone for men’s health and influences muscle growth, fat distribution, bone density, and mood. As men age, declining testosterone levels can result in challenges like weight gain, reduced energy, and decreased libido, not to mention the unwelcome issue of “man boobs.” As a personal trainer and fitness nutrition specialist with over 20 years of...

The post Best Testosterone Boosters for Men (2024): Fight Back Against Low T-Levels appeared first on Breaking Muscle.

]]>
Testosterone is a crucial hormone for men’s health and influences muscle growth, fat distribution, bone density, and mood. As men age, declining testosterone levels can result in challenges like weight gain, reduced energy, and decreased libido, not to mention the unwelcome issue of “man boobs.”

As a personal trainer and fitness nutrition specialist with over 20 years of experience, I’m often asked, “How do I naturally increase testosterone?” While strength training and balanced nutrition are fundamental for healthy testosterone levels, those seeking an additional lift can consider testosterone boosters. 

I tested seven testosterone boosters, each with different formulas and key ingredients. Here’s the thing — my testosterone levels were already above average. For me, this was a test to see which testosterone boosters could keep my levels where they were or even get them higher without the consequence of estrogen dominance (which can be a side effect of overconsuming testosterone boosters). Keep that in mind as I review my top picks for the best testosterone booster for men.

Medical disclaimer: This article is intended for educational and informational purposes only. It is not intended as a substitute for medical advice. For health advice, contact a licensed healthcare provider.

How We Chose the Best Testosterone Boosters

Navigating the saturated market of testosterone boosters can be a daunting task, especially when every product claims to be the best solution. 

Bottles of testosterone boosters lined up
All of the testosterone boosters I tested

To cut through the noise and offer genuine recommendations, we adopted a systematic approach grounded in science, transparency, and real-world feedback.

Here’s how we chose the best testosterone boosters for you:

Research-Backed Ingredients

We prioritized products that contain ingredients scientifically shown to enhance testosterone production or support hormonal balance. Ingredients like fenugreek, vitamin D, and zinc consistently surfaced as key compounds with the research and studies to back them up.

Safety Profile

No supplement is worth risking your health over. We stuck to the products that had tried-and-true ingredients, free of unnecessary fillers or harmful additives. Additionally, products with a history of causing side effects were immediately excluded from our list.

Customer Reviews and Testimonials

Real-world experiences from men who’ve tried these boosters provided unique insights. We looked over hundreds of user reviews, searching for consistent reports of efficacy, benefits, and any potential drawbacks.

Company Reputation

A company’s track record matters. We selected brands with a history of integrity, transparency, and commitment to customer satisfaction.

Value for Money

While price isn’t the only indicator of a product’s worth, we wanted to ensure that our top picks offer a good balance between cost and effectiveness. In other words, we wanted to select the products that offered the most bang for your buck.

Third-Party Testing

Supplements that have undergone third-party testing offer an additional layer of trustworthiness. We favored products that had been tested for purity and potency by independent labs.

Our Top Picks for the Best Testosterone Boosters

Best Testosterone Booster Overall: TestoPrime

TestoPrime
4.5
  • Daily dose: Four capsules
  • Cost per serving: One bottle: $2.16 per serving / Three-bottle bundle: $1.44 per serving
  • Key ingredients: D-aspartic acid, Panax ginseng, KSM 66® ashwagandha extract, and fenugreek
  • Third-party testing: Yes
Check Price

Pros

  • All natural ingredients (e.g., vitamins, minerals, herbal remedies)
  • Knockout formula of testosterone support ingredients
  • No post-cycle therapy (PCT) supplement is required — you can stop using it at any time
  • Easy-to-swallow capsules

Cons

  • Low dosage of Ashwagandha
  • Only available through their official website
  • Only cost-effective if you buy multiple bottles

TestoPrime stands out as the best testosterone booster overall due to its potent ingredients, user accessibility, and glowing reviews. Ideal for beginners, this booster strikes a harmonious balance; neither overwhelmingly potent nor disappointingly mild.

A close-up of the TestoPrime bottle
A close-up of a bottle of Testosil

TestoPrime relies on several heavy hitter ingredients including: 

  • D-aspartic acid (2,000 milligrams): A well-researched amino acid that can support the production of luteinizing hormone, which is responsible for testosterone production. (2)
  • Fenugreek (equivalent to 800 milligrams): A popular herb in traditional medicine known for its potential to boost libido and testosterone levels. (3)
  • Green tea extract (equivalent to 4,000 milligrams): A powerhouse antioxidant that might indirectly support testosterone levels by reducing the conversion of testosterone to DHT. (4)

It also includes a proper dose of vitamin D3 (26.68 micrograms) and zinc (40 milligrams) — both of which have been shown to support healthy testosterone levels. (5)(6)

While many of the products on this list share similar ingredients, for TestoPrime, D-aspartic acid takes center stage. Though its efficacy is debated, a 2009 study reported significant testosterone increases in both humans and rats after 12 days of consistent dosing. Another study linked D-aspartic acid supplementation to improved sperm quality in sub-fertile men. (7)(8)

Although some research finds negligible effects, the combination of D-aspartic acid and other potent ingredients in TestoPrime might amplify its impact.

I decided to take TestoPrime as a part of my pre-workout supplement routine, hoping to capitalize on its reported energy-boosting benefits. I took the four-capsule serving 30 to 60 minutes before my strength training workouts.

Whether it was the D-aspartic acid or Panax ginseng, I did feel an increase in energy, especially during my heavier sets. My sex drive, libido, and performance all stayed the same during the time I was taking TestoPrime — and that’s a good thing!

My biggest issues with TestoPrime are the absence of vitamin K2 and the low dose of ashwagandha. 

Vitamin K2 can significantly improve the absorption and utilization of vitamin D3, so it’s essential to pair the two. 

As for ashwagandha, the amount used in TestoPrime is less than 700 milligrams per serving. Compare that to XWERKS, which contains more than double that at 1.5 grams. Also, if you buy ashwagandha powder on its own, a teaspoon will provide you with three grams per serving, which is more than all of the supplements on this list.

If you choose TestoPrime, my advice would be to take it with a vitamin K2 supplement. I’d also advise mixing ashwagandha powder with your morning coffee or protein shake. That would make this a near-perfect testosterone booster.

Best Natural Testosterone Booster: XWERKS Ashwa

XWERKS Ashwa
4.0
  • Daily dose: Two gummies
  • Cost per serving: $0.63 per serving
  • Key ingredients: Ashwagandha extract
  • Third-party testing: No
Check Price

Pros

  • Great flavor
  • Provides 1.5 grams of ashwagandha per serving
  • Easily stackable with other testosterone boosters

Cons

  • Might need to double your serving (depending on goals)
  • Includes six grams of sugar per serving
  • No black pepper extract — questionable bioavailability

Ashwagandha is a tough-to-pronounce but highly effective ingredient for supporting hormone health. This single-ingredient supplement is ranked as the best natural testosterone booster because ashwagandha has been used for centuries to potentially reduce stress and enhance hormone health. Research is finally proving what many cultures have already known.

In fact, it’s one of the most studied and confirmed ingredients for promoting natural testosterone levels.

A bottle of XWERKS Ashwa against a white wall
Testing the XWERKS Ashwa gummies

In one study, subjects taking ashwagandha over 16 weeks saw an 18 percent greater increase in DHEA-S (Dehydroepiandrosterone-sulfate) and a 14.7 percent greater increase in testosterone compared to the placebo group. (9)

DHEA-S is a hormone produced by your adrenal glands, and it’s important for two reasons: it’s seen as a marker for adrenal function, and it serves as a building block for testosterone. The increase of DHEA-S is important because, as a precursor, it directly supports the production of testosterone. (9)

In another eight-week study, men who consumed 600 milligrams of ashwagandha daily saw a 40 percent rise in their DISF‐M score, compared to a 25 percent rise in those given a placebo. The DISF-M is a questionnaire that consists of 25 questions, divided into five categories: 

  • Sexual cognition/fantasy
  • Sexual arousal
  • Sexual behavior/experiences
  • Orgasm
  • Drive/desire

The men taking ashwagandha reported higher levels and events in each of the five categories, suggesting testosterone levels increased. (10)

Hands down, XWERKS Ashwa was my favorite supplement to take because it was like getting a chance to eat candy. The gummies tasted great, and the texture was just right. To ensure I had a consistent amount of ashwagandha in my system, I spaced out the serving, taking one gummy in the late morning and another just before bed.

Several XWERKS Ashwa gummies in a man's hand
A close-up of the XWERKS Ashwa gummies

I noticed my sleep improved when taking the ashwagandha before bed. This might have something to do with ashwagandha being a cortisol-reducing ingredient.

While I can’t attribute any wild gains in the gym to ashwagandha, I can say that I felt more level-headed even during times of stress. I also slept better, which is great for supporting growth hormone production.

My only problem with XWERKS Ashwa is that it doesn’t include black pepper extract, an ingredient that can enhance bioavailability. Easy fix: just buy Bioperine and take a serving whenever you use ashwagandha.

Best Testosterone Booster for Muscle Growth: CrazyBulk Testo-Max

CrazyBulk Testo-Max
4.2
  • Daily dose: Four capsules
  • Cost per serving: One bottle: $2.16 per serving / Three bottle bundle: $1.44 per serving
  • Key ingredients: Vitamin D3, D-aspartic acid, nettle leaf extract, Korean red ginseng extract, and fenugreek 
  • Third-party testing: No
Check Price

Pros

  • Uses highly bioavailable forms of ingredients
  • Includes complementary ingredients (e.g., vitamin D and vitamin K)
  • Contains ingredients proven to support testosterone production

Cons

  • Confusing label — extract equivalents aren’t provided
  • Clever but deceptive marketing
  • Claims results in less than two weeks

CrazyBulk Testo-Max is the best testosterone booster for muscle growth since it may support size gains in two important ways: increased performance in the gym and enhanced testosterone production.

A bottle of CrazyBulk Testo-Max on a white counter against a white wall
Testing CrazyBulk’s Testo-Max testosterone booster

Let’s talk about weight room performance. You can trigger muscle growth (hypertrophy) when you stress muscle tissue with intense training, causing a series of microtears. The actual growth happens during the recovery phase, but you need the energy and determination to tear down that muscle in the first place. 

With more energy in the gym, you’re better positioned to effectively hit the target muscles. Testo-Max, rich in ingredients like Korean red ginseng extract, can boost stamina, reduce fatigue, and sharpen focus. (11)

Once you’re out of the gym, growth hormones like testosterone step in to repair the muscle tissue, slowly building it back bigger and stronger after each workout.

Testo-Max contains many of the same testosterone-boosting ingredients discussed above, such as fenugreek, D-aspartic acid, and vitamin D. One unique ingredient is stinging nettle leaf extract. It’s known for boosting free (active) testosterone levels by binding to the testosterone-inhibiting molecule, sex hormone-binding globulin (SHBG). (12)

What’s more, Bioperine enhances the bioavailability of all ingredients in Testo-Max, ensuring you get maximum efficacy from the supplement. (13

The Bioperine is an excellent addition because other testosterone boosters, like XWERKS Ashwa, don’t have it. It’s one less supplement you have to worry about taking separately, which can be more cost-effective in the long run.

I appreciate Testo-Max as a non-stimulant pre-workout and as a testosterone booster. While not as potent as caffeine, it offers consistent focus during light sessions. For intense workouts, I stuck with my favorite pre-workout with stimulants.

My one gripe is with the Testo-Max marketing and the idea that this supplement can help you see visible results in two weeks. CrazyBulk made a reputation for itself by using clever names that sound a lot like performance-enhancing drugs. Make no mistake about it: Testo-Max is no steroid. Sure, you’ll probably see muscle growth while using Testo-Max, but it’ll take longer than two weeks.

RELATED: Best Mass Gainer

Best Testosterone Booster for Men Over 50: PrimeGENIX Testodren

PrimeGENIX Testodren
3.8
  • Daily dose: One capsule
  • Cost per serving: One bottle: $1.99 per serving / Three bottle bundle: $1.33 per serving
  • Key ingredients: Furosap® 
  • Third-party testing: Yes
Check Price

Pros

  • The company offers a 67-day money-back guarantee
  • Several studies back up their product claims
  • Very positive reviews

Cons

  • Can be overwhelming to search for legit reviews
  • Some reviews mention upset stomach
  • Sketchy marketing campaign

The average guy will lose an average of 1.6 percent of total testosterone each year once he gets to his mid-30s. (1) But what happens when you want to increase your testosterone levels in your 50s without a trip to the doctor?

Introducing PrimeGENIX Testodren, my pick for the best testosterone booster for men over 50.

A bottle of Testodren on a white counter against a white wall
Testing the PrimeGenix Testodren testosterone booster

Testodren contains a unique form of fenugreek, which may enhance libido, increase testosterone levels, and boost sexual performance.

In one study, men who consumed a 600-milligram fenugreek supplement daily for 12 weeks experienced elevated levels of both free and total testosterone. Additionally, these individuals reported enhanced sexual performance, marked by an increase in sexual activity frequency. (3)

As cited by the Testodren website, one of the main issues with many fenugreek supplements is inconsistent protodioscin levels.

Protodioscin is a natural compound found in fenugreek. It’s believed to help boost testosterone levels by stimulating the release of nitric oxide and increasing the activity of certain enzymes. With that said, researchers aren’t exactly sure how it works; however, protodioscin is the key to fenugreek’s testosterone-boosting benefits. 

To address the issue of inconsistent and low levels of protodioscin in most supplements, Testodren uses a patented purification technique that ensures a consistent protodioscin level of 20 percent in each serving — easily some of the highest levels in the industry.

This formula was tested in three human-based clinical trials and the results were impressive. In one study, older male subjects saw their free testosterone levels increase by 72.87 percent in 12 weeks. (14

If you’re a man in your 50s (or older) looking to naturally boost your testosterone levels, PrimeGENIX Testodren can be the way to go. Not only does it offer clinically proven results, but the brand is committed to purity and transparency with its third-party testing. Most of the supplements you’ll see online or on store shelves don’t bother with third-party testing, which is considered the gold standard by many experts. 

Put excellent customer service on top of that and you can see why it’s my pick for the best testosterone booster for men over 50.

Best Testosterone Booster for Burning Fat: Testosil

Testosil
4.0
  • Daily dose: Four capsules
  • Cost per serving: One bottle: $1.99 per serving / Three bottle bundle: $1.33 per serving
  • Key ingredients: D-aspartic acid, KSM 66® ashwagandha extract, l-arginine HCl, Asian ginseng, and fenugreek
  • Third-party testing: No
Check Price

Pros

  • Delivers the equivalent of 3,600 milligrams of ordinary ashwagandha
  • Contains fat-burning ingredients that might help with low T weight gain
  • Cognitive boost makes it great as a pre-workout

Cons

  • Mismatching information on the website
  • Low dosage of L-arginine HCl
  • Too much of a focus on ashwagandha and not enough on other ingredients

For guys aiming to pack on lean muscle and shed excess fat, having optimal testosterone levels is crucial. 

A downfall of low testosterone is the undesired gain in fat mass and a corresponding reduction in muscle tissue. So, how do we simultaneously tackle the issue of diminished testosterone and prevent fat accumulation?

Enter Testosil, the best testosterone booster for burning fat.

A bottle of Testosil on a kitchen counter
A close-up of a bottle of Testosil

When it comes to boosting your T-levels, Testosil relies primarily on a super-concentrated extract of ashwagandha. While the extract is only 300 milligrams per serving, it provides you with the equivalent of 3,600 milligrams per serving of ordinary ashwagandha powder.

As I discussed above, ashwagandha is a reliable testosterone booster. It’s accompanied in the Testosil formula by some other familiar proven ingredients, including D-aspartic acid and ZMA (zinc, magnesium, and vitamin B6). It also contains an extract that provides the equivalent of 800 milligrams of fenugreek!

Testosil has its testosterone bases covered, but what about fat-burning ingredients?

L-arginine and Panax ginseng combined in a supplement offer a potent duo for potential fat-burning and weight management benefits. 

L-arginine, a precursor to nitric oxide, promotes enhanced blood flow, which can lead to improved exercise performance and greater calorie burn. Additionally, its role in stimulating growth hormone release may enhance fat metabolism and support muscle mass, which in turn, boosts resting calorie burn. (15)

Panax ginseng is known for its energy-boosting properties, which can help inside and outside of the gym. It also helps stabilize blood sugar levels, potentially reducing fat storage. Some studies hint at its role in increasing thermogenesis, further amplifying calorie burn. (16)

Together, their synergistic effects may offer an efficient approach to weight management.

While I didn’t notice any heightened fat loss with Testosil, I did enjoy stabilized testosterone levels. Just like with a few of the other supplements, I got into the habit of taking it just before a workout, especially during heavy lifting days. Even when I took it on an empty stomach, Testosil didn’t cause any weird digestive issues.

A bottle of Testosil on its side with capsules spilling out of it
Showing what the Testosil capsules look like

The one issue I have with Testosil is the low dosage of L-arginine HCl. While it does have other fat-burning ingredients, I think it’s safe to say that the star ingredient would be L-arginine. The problem is that Testosil only provides 250 milligrams per serving, which is less than what several key studies used. For example, some studies dosed L-arginine as low as two grams and as high as 30 grams per day. Either way, 250 milligrams isn’t going to cut it.

If your goal is to boost testosterone while decreasing fat mass, the most important factors to get right are your diet and workout routine. If those are a mess, no testosterone or fat-burning supplement will help you. Once you have those on track, I’d recommend pairing Testosil with another fat burner. Even just a separate L-arginine supplement would do the trick.

RELATED: Best Supplements for Weight Loss

Best Testosterone Booster for Bodybuilding: D-Bal MAX

D-bal MAX
4.2
  • Daily dose: Four capsules
  • Cost per serving: One bottle: $2.33 per serving / Three bottle bundle: $1.48 per serving
  • Key ingredients: KSM 66® ashwagandha extract, l-arginine HCl, Senactiv®, zinc, and magnesium
  • Third-party testing: No
Check Price

Pros

  • Includes complementary ingredients (e.g., zinc and copper)
  • Focuses on creating an environment for healthy testosterone production
  • Contain caffeine – Making it a great pre-workout test booster

Cons

  • Uses forms of some ingredients that have poor bioavailability
  • Contains caffeine, which might be problematic if you’re sensitive to stimulants
  • You won’t see “bodybuilding level” results after just one month

Let me start by saying that while this is a great testosterone booster for bodybuilding, you shouldn’t expect to go from 90 pounds soaking wet to a 225-pound bodybuilding champion in one month. I like D-Bal MAX, but I also want to make sure I’m helping you set realistic expectations.

A close-up of the D-Bal MAX Testosterone Booster bottle
A close-up of the bottle of D-Bal MAX

D-Bal MAX prioritizes muscle and connective tissue repair, creating an optimal environment for the body to flourish and testosterone levels to spike. Its emphasis on muscle recuperation and combating inflammation earns it my recommendation as the best testosterone booster for bodybuilding.

While I like the supplement, in truth, I have a love-hate relationship with the formula of D-Bal MAX. 

On one hand, it contains ingredients that support one another in both bioavailability and benefit, especially when it comes to muscle recovery and testosterone production. 

For example, D-Bal MAX contains zinc and copper, which is important because zinc can decrease the absorption of copper in your body. If you’re taking additional copper supplements, you don’t need to be concerned about zinc hindering its absorption since you already have an ample amount of copper.

Magnesium and vitamin C also have a synergistic relationship. For example, vitamin C can enhance the body’s ability to absorb magnesium from the digestive tract. On the other hand, magnesium can help improve the efficiency of some of the body’s processes that use vitamin C (such as wound healing). When taken together, they can boost each other’s benefits in the body.

On the other hand, the formula contains the oxide forms of zinc and magnesium, which have the lowest bioavailability. I would love to see zinc picolinate or zinc citrate on the label — really anything but zinc oxide.

That aside, D-Bal MAX is an excellent muscle recovery agent that also offers testosterone support. Since it contains 200 milligrams of caffeine, I used it as a pre-workout supplement, taking it around 30 minutes before my gym session. That amount of caffeine with the added ginseng provided the boost I needed to get through serious sets. (17)

Be careful with your consumption of caffeine as it might impact your testosterone levels for better or worse. The right dosage in certain situations — mainly before exercise — may temporarily boost T levels. However, one study found that excessive caffeine consumption of more than 400 milligrams might lower testosterone levels because of high cortisol levels. (18) In other words, go easy on the cup of Joe.

Since the ingredients in D-Bal MAX all support some form of muscle repair, from anti-inflammatory properties to growth hormone secretion to improved glucose uptake, I also took it pre-workout to kickstart my recovery.

Better sets and recovery led to better results for me. I noticed my plate numbers steadily increasing from week to week, and people kept mentioning that my thighs and shoulders looked thicker. Full disclosure here: I was also taking creatine and glutamine, supplement staples that I’ve taken for most of my fitness career.

RELATED: Best Bodybuilding Supplements

Best Anti-Aging Testosterone Booster: Lifeforce DHEA

Lifeforce DHEA
4.0
  • Daily dose: Three capsules
  • Cost per serving: One-time order: $1.83 per serving / Subscribe and save: $1.16 per serving
  • Key ingredients: DHEA, 7-Keto DHEA, and Pregnenolone
  • Third-party testing: No
Check Price

Pros

  • Proven ingredients to boost testosterone and support longevity
  • Properly dosed for results
  • May experience a cognitive boost in addition to more testosterone

Cons

  • Limited online reviews
  • Relatively newer supplement
  • May upset your stomach if you don’t take it with food

Lifeforce DHEA incorporates three of the most studied and proven longevity ingredients: DHEA, pregnenolone, and 7-Keto DHEA. That’s why it got my vote as the best anti-aging testosterone booster.

A close-up of the bottle of Lifeforce DHEA
Testing the Lifeforce DHEA testosterone booster

What’s the connection between longevity, testosterone, and DHEA (Dehydroepiandrosterone)?

Just like testosterone, DHEA levels begin to steadily decline in men once they reach their mid-30s. Studies show that there is a direct correlation between lower levels of testosterone and DHEA and a worse state of general health. (19

Put simply: If you want to look and feel your best – like a younger version of yourself – you want to keep these levels in check. And that’s where Lifeforce DHEA comes in. Let’s break down these three important ingredients:

  • DHEA is a hormone produced by the adrenal glands. It acts as a precursor to both testosterone and estrogen, which means it may increase testosterone levels, especially in older individuals whose natural DHEA levels have dwindled. (20)
  • Pregnenolone is a steroid hormone but don’t let the name scare you! It’s not an illegal anabolic steroid. It’s a naturally occurring compound in your body from which other steroid hormones, including DHEA, progesterone, and testosterone, are derived. Some experts also believe that pregnenolone may promote other anti-aging benefits, including improved memory, alleviated stress, and elevated mood. (21)
  • 7-Keto DHEA is a DHEA metabolite. While it does not directly boost testosterone levels, it does possess several anti-aging benefits. It may enhance metabolism, aid in weight loss, and support immune function. (22)

The most noticeable benefit from Lifeforce DHEA was the boost in energy that I had when I took it in the morning. I didn’t even bother with my usual cup of coffee until the early afternoon and that was more out of habit than actually needing it. I felt like that energy carried over into the gym because I was really focused on what I was doing as I moved between exercises.

My testosterone levels continued to soar high as I took Lifeforce DHEA, and this was evident by the uptick in libido and sex drive. Overall, I’d say it did an awesome job at helping me maintain my T-levels while giving me the added benefit of a cognitive boost.

RELATED: Best Multivitamin for Men

Additional Testosterone Booster Recommendations

On that note about Lifeforce DHEA, I’d like to highlight a unique service they offer, which isn’t provided by any other brand on this list.

Lifeforce offers an at-home health test that checks over 40 biomarkers in your body that impact your hormone levels, well-being, and generally how you feel every day. Of those 40 markers, Lifeforce checks your levels for luteinizing hormone and testosterone, the two things you want to increase (and the reason you’re reading this article).

Here’s how it works. You take the test at home, send it in, and you’ll receive a complete report with your results in about 10 days. But you’re not left on your own to interrupt those results. You’ll hop on a virtual call with a doctor to discuss things like your hormones, metabolism, organ health, and any health risks you might have. You’ll also receive a personalized health plan.

If you really want to go the extra mile and track your testosterone levels as you take one of these supplements, Lifeforce Diagnostic could be something to look into.

Learn more about what is provided in a Lifeforce membership on their website: Lifeforce Diagnostic Blood Test and save $225 on your initial diagnostic by using the code BREAKINGMUSCLE.

What Are the Benefits of Testosterone Boosters?

Before we dive into the benefits, it’s important to understand that taking a testosterone booster alone may not yield the transformational results you want.

A testosterone booster should be treated as a complement to a consistent resistance training program and a healthy, well-balanced diet. 

Put simply: For a testosterone booster to have the maximum effect, and for you to see the following benefits, you need to lift weights and eat a proper diet consisting of lean proteins, complex carbs, fruits, vegetables, and healthy fats. 

Furthermore, regardless of these potential benefits, it’s important to approach testosterone boosters with caution and knowledge. Results will vary from person to person. Always consider potential side effects and consult a healthcare professional before starting supplements.

Increased Testosterone Levels

Elevated testosterone can amplify various physiological functions, from improved muscle growth to enhanced mood and energy. 

I mention this first because the boost in your testosterone levels plays a direct role in making the other benefits on this list happen.

Improved Muscle Mass and Strength

One of the most cited advantages of increasing testosterone levels is the potential for greater muscle growth and strength. 

Testosterone plays a crucial role in muscle development, so it’s no surprise that many supplement users report improved muscle gains when combining these supplements with hypertrophy-focused resistance training.

Enhanced Libido

A decline in testosterone is often linked with a decrease in libido or sexual desire. 

Testosterone boosters can reignite that spark and improve sexual drive. Again, the best results happen when you’re using a testosterone booster in conjunction with a strength training program and a healthy diet.

Mood Enhancement

Testosterone has been linked with mood and mental well-being. Men with lower testosterone levels sometimes experience mood swings, depression, or irritability. 

Boosting levels might help alleviate these symptoms and promote a better overall mood.

Improved Energy Levels

Feeling constantly fatigued? Testosterone boosters might offer a solution. 

Users often report an increase in their energy levels, helping them feel more vibrant while reducing feelings of lethargy.

Enhanced Cognitive Function

Some studies suggest that optimal testosterone levels can help in maintaining cognitive health, including memory and focus. 

While more research is needed, some users claim to experience improved mental clarity after using these supplements.

Fat Loss

Elevated testosterone levels can help increase metabolism, which might assist in fat loss. 

While it’s not a replacement for a balanced diet and regular exercise, a testosterone booster could potentially play a role in a comprehensive weight loss strategy.

Bone Density

Testosterone plays a role in bone density. As men age and testosterone levels drop, there’s a potential risk of developing osteoporosis. Boosting testosterone might help in maintaining bone strength.

Improved Recovery

Athletes and fitness enthusiasts alike might find that testosterone boosters help them recover faster post-workout, thanks to the hormone’s role in muscle repair and regeneration.

What To Consider When Looking for a Testosterone Booster

How can you walk into your local supplement shop or browse an online supplement catalog and not feel overwhelmed by the choices?

There are literally dozens of options to choose from, and if you don’t know what you’re looking for, you might throw in the towel before clicking the “buy” button. 

Let’s take the stress out of the shopping experience. Here’s what to look for when buying a testosterone booster.

Your Goals

Before diving into the specifics of a product, identify what you hope to achieve. 

Are you looking for improved muscle mass, enhanced libido, mood elevation, or perhaps a combination of benefits? 

Understanding your goals will help you choose a booster that’s aligned with your needs.

Different supplements have varied recommended dosages, and too many of them under-dose their products. At the same time, be careful of over-dosed supplements!

Overconsumption can lead to potential side effects such as acne, excessive estrogen levels, and generally feeling ill, while underconsumption might not yield the desired results.

A quick Google search can help you understand how much of a certain ingredient you should be taking to see results.

Ingredients

Pay close attention to the ingredients listed on the label. Look for products that contain clinically researched and proven ingredients such as the following:

  • DHEA
  • Fenugreek
  • D-Aspartic Acid
  • Ashwagandha
  • Vitamin D3 (preferably with Vitamin K2)
  • Zinc
  • Magnesium
  • Stinging Nettle Leaf

I recommend avoiding supplements with proprietary blends where the exact amounts of ingredients aren’t specified.

Safety

Always opt for products that are manufactured in facilities following Good Manufacturing Practices (GMP). 

Additionally, products that have been third-party tested for purity and potency are more likely to be trustworthy.

Two of the most trusted names in supplement third-party testing are NSF International and ConsumerLab. These organizations independently test and verify the contents of supplements, ensuring that what’s on the label matches what’s in the bottle and that harmful contaminants are not present.

PCT Requirements

Post Cycle Therapy (PCT) refers to supplements (or certain drugs) that are taken after a cycle of anabolic steroids or performance-enhancing compounds to help restore hormonal balance. It mainly focuses on kick-starting the production of natural testosterone and preventing estrogen-related side effects such as gynecomastia. Some of the most common PCTs include Clomid and Nolvadex.

If you want to avoid a mess of trouble, including throwing your hormones out of whack and possibly developing man boobs, I’d highly recommend staying away from any testosterone booster that requires a PCT supplement. Typically, natural testosterone boosters like the ones on this list will not require any type of “follow-up supplement” to avoid side effects. You should be able to start and stop taking the supplement without worrying about potential downsides.

Potential Side Effects

While testosterone boosters can offer numerous benefits, they may also come with potential side effects. Some common ones include acne, hair loss, or an increase in aggression. 

It’s essential to familiarize yourself with the possible side effects of any supplement you’re considering.

How To Boost Testosterone Naturally

While supplements can be an effective way to enhance testosterone levels, there are also several natural methods to boost this vital hormone. 

A holistic approach encompassing lifestyle changes and habits can play a fundamental role in optimizing your testosterone levels.

Diet and Nutrition

It’s easy to say, “Eat healthy,” but what does that mean in the context of increasing your testosterone levels? Here are some dietary tips that will support those T-levels.

  • Get adequate amounts of zinc and vitamin D. These two nutrients are essential for testosterone production. Foods like oysters, beef, pumpkin seeds, and spinach are high in zinc, while fatty fish, fortified dairy products, and egg yolks are good sources of Vitamin D.
  • Consume healthy fats. Don’t skip on the healthy fats! You can find monounsaturated and omega-3 fats in avocados, nuts, seeds, and fatty fish like salmon.
  • Limit sugar and processed foods. High sugar consumption and a diet rich in processed foods can lead to insulin resistance, which may reduce testosterone levels.
  • Limit alcohol and drugs. Excessive alcohol consumption can lower testosterone levels.

Regular Exercise

Any form of physical activity is good for healthy weight management, but if your goal is to boost your testosterone, you want to focus on two specific forms of exercise:

  • Resistance training. Strength training or weightlifting has been shown to boost testosterone levels both immediately after a workout and over the long term. Aim for three days per week of some form of resistance training.
  • High-intensity interval training (HIIT). Short, intense bursts of exercise like sprints or a HIIT workout can be effective for weight management, muscle growth, and testosterone production.

Lifestyle Choices

Outside of diet, exercise, and supplements, there are some changes you can make in your day-to-day routine to support healthy testosterone levels.

  • Manage stress. Chronic stress elevates cortisol, a hormone that can lower testosterone. Techniques like meditation, deep breathing exercises, and regular physical activity can help manage and reduce stress.
  • Get adequate sleep. Testosterone production follows a circadian rhythm, with peak production occurring during sleep. Aim for seven to nine hours of quality sleep per night to support optimal testosterone levels.
  • Maintain a healthy weight. Obesity can negatively affect testosterone levels. Achieving and maintaining a healthy weight through diet and exercise can support optimal testosterone production.
  • Avoid endocrine disruptors. Chemicals such as BPA, commonly found in some plastics, can act as endocrine disruptors, affecting testosterone levels. Choose BPA-free products and reduce exposure to potential environmental toxins. (23)
  • Stay socially active. Engaging in social activities, bonding with friends and family, and maintaining healthy relationships can positively influence testosterone levels, especially as you age.
  • Talk to your doctor if you take prescription medications. Certain medications can impact testosterone production, so it’s essential to discuss any concerns with your healthcare provider.

Final Thoughts

While TRT (testosterone replacement therapy) is a surefire way to increase testosterone levels, it’s also looked at as a last resort option. If you want to naturally increase your testosterone levels and fight back against the symptoms of low T, a testosterone booster supplement might be able to help.

Before getting drawn into the idea of testosterone boosters, remember the basics: working out and eating right. A testosterone booster should always act as a complement to well-established healthy lifestyle choices and habits. Once you’ve got those down, then think about adding a supplement.

Best Testosterone Boosters: Side-by-Side Comparison

Best Testosterone Booster
Overall
Best Natural
Testosterone
Booster
Best Testosterone Booster for Muscle Growth
Best Testosterone Booster
for Men Over 50
Best Testosterone Booster
for Burning Fat
Best Testosterone Booster for Bodybuilding
Best Anti-Aging Testosterone
Booster
Description:
  • Daily dose: Four capsules
  • Cost per serving: One bottle: $2.16 per serving / Three-bottle bundle: $1.44 per serving
  • Key ingredients: D-aspartic acid, Panax ginseng, KSM 66® ashwagandha extract, and fenugreek
  • Third-party testing: Yes
Description:
  • Daily dose: Two gummies
  • Cost per serving: $0.63 per serving
  • Key ingredients: Ashwagandha extract
  • Third-party testing: No
Description:
  • Daily dose: Four capsules
  • Cost per serving: One bottle: $2.16 per serving / Three bottle bundle: $1.44 per serving
  • Key ingredients: Vitamin D3, D-aspartic acid, nettle leaf extract, Korean red ginseng extract, and fenugreek 
  • Third-party testing: No
Description:
  • Daily dose: One capsule
  • Cost per serving: One bottle: $1.99 per serving / Three bottle bundle: $1.33 per serving
  • Key ingredients: Furosap® 
  • Third-party testing: Yes
Description:
  • Daily dose: Four capsules
  • Cost per serving: One bottle: $1.99 per serving / Three bottle bundle: $1.33 per serving
  • Key ingredients: D-aspartic acid, KSM 66® ashwagandha extract, l-arginine HCl, Asian ginseng, and fenugreek
  • Third-party testing: No
Description:
  • Daily dose: Four capsules
  • Cost per serving: One bottle: $2.33 per serving / Three bottle bundle: $1.48 per serving
  • Key ingredients: KSM 66® ashwagandha extract, l-arginine HCl, Senactiv®, zinc, and magnesium
  • Third-party testing: No
Description:
  • Daily dose: Three capsules
  • Cost per serving: One-time order: $1.83 per serving / Subscribe and save: $1.16 per serving
  • Key ingredients: DHEA, 7-Keto DHEA, and Pregnenolone
  • Third-party testing: No
Best Testosterone Booster
Overall
Description:
  • Daily dose: Four capsules
  • Cost per serving: One bottle: $2.16 per serving / Three-bottle bundle: $1.44 per serving
  • Key ingredients: D-aspartic acid, Panax ginseng, KSM 66® ashwagandha extract, and fenugreek
  • Third-party testing: Yes
Best Natural
Testosterone
Booster
Description:
  • Daily dose: Two gummies
  • Cost per serving: $0.63 per serving
  • Key ingredients: Ashwagandha extract
  • Third-party testing: No
Best Testosterone Booster for Muscle Growth
Description:
  • Daily dose: Four capsules
  • Cost per serving: One bottle: $2.16 per serving / Three bottle bundle: $1.44 per serving
  • Key ingredients: Vitamin D3, D-aspartic acid, nettle leaf extract, Korean red ginseng extract, and fenugreek 
  • Third-party testing: No
Best Testosterone Booster
for Men Over 50
Description:
  • Daily dose: One capsule
  • Cost per serving: One bottle: $1.99 per serving / Three bottle bundle: $1.33 per serving
  • Key ingredients: Furosap® 
  • Third-party testing: Yes
Best Testosterone Booster
for Burning Fat
Description:
  • Daily dose: Four capsules
  • Cost per serving: One bottle: $1.99 per serving / Three bottle bundle: $1.33 per serving
  • Key ingredients: D-aspartic acid, KSM 66® ashwagandha extract, l-arginine HCl, Asian ginseng, and fenugreek
  • Third-party testing: No
Best Testosterone Booster for Bodybuilding
Description:
  • Daily dose: Four capsules
  • Cost per serving: One bottle: $2.33 per serving / Three bottle bundle: $1.48 per serving
  • Key ingredients: KSM 66® ashwagandha extract, l-arginine HCl, Senactiv®, zinc, and magnesium
  • Third-party testing: No
Best Anti-Aging Testosterone
Booster
Description:
  • Daily dose: Three capsules
  • Cost per serving: One-time order: $1.83 per serving / Subscribe and save: $1.16 per serving
  • Key ingredients: DHEA, 7-Keto DHEA, and Pregnenolone
  • Third-party testing: No

FAQs

What is the best testosterone booster that really works?

When choosing a testosterone booster, it’s not about the brand but the ingredients within. Key ingredients like ashwagandha, D-aspartic acid, DHEA, fenugreek, magnesium, stinging nettle leaf, vitamin D3, and zinc have proven benefits, supported by studies and user reviews. Always prioritize these ingredients and consult a healthcare professional before starting any new supplement.

Do testosterone boosters really help?

Testosterone boosters can help address low T levels, but their effectiveness depends on the ingredients, dosage, individual body chemistry, and the root cause of the low testosterone. Ingredients like fenugreek, zinc, and vitamin D have scientific backing, but it’s essential to understand the reason for low levels, such as aging or chronic illness. Moreover, combining a booster with healthy lifestyle practices, like proper diet and sleep, often yields better results than the supplement alone.

What is the number one thing to increase testosterone?

For optimal testosterone levels, nutrition is paramount. Prioritize foods rich in zinc, vitamin D, omega-3s, and clean proteins while minimizing processed foods, alcohol, and sugars. Coupled with resistance training, good nutrition forms a solid fitness foundation that can naturally increase testosterone. Once these habits are solid, you may consider a testosterone booster, but with a well-managed diet and exercise regimen, supplements might become unnecessary.

When is the best time to take testosterone booster pills?

The best time to take testosterone boosters will vary by product and ingredients. Some recommend taking it in the morning to align with the body’s natural testosterone rhythm. On the other hand, ZMA-containing supplements should be taken before bedtime since zinc, magnesium, and vitamin B6 can enhance sleep—a crucial period for testosterone production. Always consult the label or a medical professional for guidance.

Research

  1. Stanworth RD, Jones TH. Testosterone for the aging male; current evidence and recommended practice. Clin Interv Aging. 2008;3(1):25-44. doi: 10.2147/cia.s190. PMID: 18488876; PMCID: PMC2544367.
  2. Topo E, Soricelli A, D’Aniello A, Ronsini S, D’Aniello G. The role and molecular mechanism of D-aspartic acid in the release and synthesis of LH and testosterone in humans and rats. Reprod Biol Endocrinol. 2009 Oct 27;7:120. doi: 10.1186/1477-7827-7-120. PMID: 19860889; PMCID: PMC2774316.
  3. Rao A, Steels E, Inder WJ, Abraham S, Vitetta L. Testofen, a specialised Trigonella foenum-graecum seed extract reduces age-related symptoms of androgen decrease, increases testosterone levels and improves sexual function in healthy aging males in a double-blind randomised clinical study. Aging Male. 2016 Jun;19(2):134-42. doi: 10.3109/13685538.2015.1135323. Epub 2016 Jan 20. PMID: 26791805.
  4. Shin S, Kim K, Lee MJ, Lee J, Choi S, Kim KS, Ko JM, Han H, Kim SY, Youn HJ, Ahn KJ, An IS, An S, Cha HJ. Epigallocatechin Gallate-Mediated Alteration of the MicroRNA Expression Profile in 5α-Dihydrotestosterone-Treated Human Dermal Papilla Cells. Ann Dermatol. 2016 Jun;28(3):327-34. doi: 10.5021/ad.2016.28.3.327. Epub 2016 May 25. PMID: 27274631; PMCID: PMC4884709.
  5. Pilz S, Frisch S, Koertke H, Kuhn J, Dreier J, Obermayer-Pietsch B, Wehr E, Zittermann A. Effect of vitamin D supplementation on testosterone levels in men. Horm Metab Res. 2011 Mar;43(3):223-5. doi: 10.1055/s-0030-1269854. Epub 2010 Dec 10. PMID: 21154195.
  6. Te L, Liu J, Ma J, Wang S. Correlation between serum zinc and testosterone: A systematic review. J Trace Elem Med Biol. 2023 Mar;76:127124. doi: 10.1016/j.jtemb.2022.127124. Epub 2022 Dec 23. PMID: 36577241.
  7. Topo, E., Soricelli, A., D’Aniello, A. et al. The role and molecular mechanism of D-aspartic acid in the release and synthesis of LH and testosterone in humans and rats. Reprod Biol Endocrinol 7, 120 (2009). https://doi.org/10.1186/1477-7827-7-120.
  8. G. D’Aniello, S. Ronsini, T. Notari, N. Grieco, V. Infante, N. D’Angel, F. Mascia, M. Fiore, G. Fisher and A. D’Aniello, “D-Aspartate, a Key Element for the Improvement of Sperm Quality,” Advances in Sexual Medicine, Vol. 2 No. 4, 2012, pp. 45-53. doi: 10.4236/asm.2012.24008.
  9. Lopresti AL, Drummond PD, Smith SJ. A Randomized, Double-Blind, Placebo-Controlled, Crossover Study Examining the Hormonal and Vitality Effects of Ashwagandha (Withania somnifera) in Aging, Overweight Males. American Journal of Men’s Health. 2019;13(2). doi:10.1177/1557988319835985
  10. Chauhan S, Srivastava MK, Pathak AK. Effect of standardized root extract of ashwagandha (Withania somnifera) on well-being and sexual performance in adult males: A randomized controlled trial. Health Sci Rep. 2022 Jul 20;5(4):e741. doi: 10.1002/hsr2.741. PMID: 35873404; PMCID: PMC9297375.
  11. Yeo HB, Yoon HK, Lee HJ, Kang SG, Jung KY, Kim L. Effects of Korean Red Ginseng on Cognitive and Motor Function: A Double-blind, Randomized, Placebo-controlled Trial. J Ginseng Res. 2012 Apr;36(2):190-7. doi: 10.5142/jgr.2012.36.2.190. PMID: 23717119; PMCID: PMC3659585.
  12. Chrubasik JE, Roufogalis BD, Wagner H, Chrubasik S. A comprehensive review on the stinging nettle effect and efficacy profiles. Part II: urticae radix. Phytomedicine. 2007 Aug;14(7-8):568-79. doi: 10.1016/j.phymed.2007.03.014. Epub 2007 May 16. PMID: 17509841.
  13. Kesarwani K, Gupta R, Mukerjee A. Bioavailability enhancers of herbal origin: an overview. Asian Pac J Trop Biomed. 2013 Apr;3(4):253-66. doi: 10.1016/S2221-1691(13)60060-X. PMID: 23620848; PMCID: PMC3634921.
  14. Maheshwari A, Verma N, Swaroop A, Bagchi M, Preuss HG, Tiwari K, Bagchi D. Efficacy of FurosapTM, a novel Trigonella foenum-graecum seed extract, in Enhancing Testosterone Level and Improving Sperm Profile in Male Volunteers. Int J Med Sci. 2017 Jan 10;14(1):58-66. doi: 10.7150/ijms.17256. PMID: 28138310; PMCID: PMC5278660.
  15. Oh HS, Oh SK, Lee JS, Wu C, Lee SJ. Effects of l-arginine on growth hormone and insulin-like growth factor 1. Food Sci Biotechnol. 2017 Dec 12;26(6):1749-1754. doi: 10.1007/s10068-017-0236-6. PMID: 30263714; PMCID: PMC6049717.
  16. Amerikanou, Charalampia & Kaliora, Andriana & Gioxari, Aristea. (2021). The efficacy of Panax ginseng in obesity and the related metabolic disorders. Pharmacological Research – Modern Chinese Medicine. 1. 100013. 10.1016/j.prmcm.2021.100013.
  17. Alsunni AA. Energy Drink Consumption: Beneficial and Adverse Health Effects. Int J Health Sci (Qassim). 2015 Oct;9(4):468-74. PMID: 26715927; PMCID: PMC4682602.
  18. Glover, F.E., Caudle, W.M., Del Giudice, F. et al. The association between caffeine intake and testosterone: NHANES 2013–2014. Nutr J 21, 33 (2022). https://doi.org/10.1186/s12937-022-00783-z.
  19. Walther A, Seuffert J. Testosterone and Dehydroepiandrosterone Treatment in Ageing Men: Are We All Set? World J Mens Health. 2020 Apr;38(2):178-190. doi: 10.5534/wjmh.190006. Epub 2019 Jun 4. PMID: 31190486; PMCID: PMC7076306.
  20. Li Y, Ren J, Li N, Liu J, Tan SC, Low TY, Ma Z. A dose-response and meta-analysis of dehydroepiandrosterone (DHEA) supplementation on testosterone levels: perinatal prediction of randomized clinical trials. Exp Gerontol. 2020 Nov;141:111110. doi: 10.1016/j.exger.2020.111110. Epub 2020 Oct 10. PMID: 33045358.
  21. Ramírez S, Haddad-Tóvolli R, Radosevic M, Toledo M, Pané A, Alcolea D, Ribas V, Milà-Guasch M, Pozo M, Obri A, Eyre E, Gómez-Valadés AG, Chivite I, Van Eeckhout T, Zalachoras I, Altirriba J, Bauder C, Imbernón M, Garrabou G, Garcia-Ruiz C, Nogueiras R, Soto D, Gasull X, Sandi C, Brüning JC, Fortea J, Jiménez A, Fernández-Checa JC, Claret M. Hypothalamic pregnenolone mediates recognition memory in the context of metabolic disorders. Cell Metab. 2022 Feb 1;34(2):269-284.e9. doi: 10.1016/j.cmet.2021.12.023. PMID: 35108514; PMCID: PMC8815774.
  22. Kalman, Douglas & Colker, Carlon & Swain, Melissa & Torina, Georgeann & Shi, Qingwei. (2000). A randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled study of 3-acetyl-7-oxo-dehydroepiandrosterone in healthy overweight adults. Current Therapeutic Research-clinical and Experimental – CURR THER RES. 61. 435-442. 10.1016/S0011-393X(00)80026-0.
  23. Cariati, F., D’Uonno, N., Borrillo, F. et al. “Bisphenol a: an emerging threat to male fertility”. Reprod Biol Endocrinol 17, 6 (2019). https://doi.org/10.1186/s12958-018-0447-6.

The post Best Testosterone Boosters for Men (2024): Fight Back Against Low T-Levels appeared first on Breaking Muscle.

]]>
Best Electrolyte Powder (2024): Hydration for Sports, Intense Exercise, and Daily Life https://breakingmuscle.com/best-electrolyte-powder/ Wed, 18 Oct 2023 12:55:55 +0000 https://breakingmuscle.com/?p=198914 Not that long ago, electrolyte powders were really only something that serious runners, cyclists, and athletes who trained in the heat had on their radar. Today, they’re available in pretty much every grocery and drug store, and in formulations and flavors designed to help everyone from kids to elite athletes to stay hydrated.  But with so many electrolyte...

The post Best Electrolyte Powder (2024): Hydration for Sports, Intense Exercise, and Daily Life appeared first on Breaking Muscle.

]]>
Not that long ago, electrolyte powders were really only something that serious runners, cyclists, and athletes who trained in the heat had on their radar. Today, they’re available in pretty much every grocery and drug store, and in formulations and flavors designed to help everyone from kids to elite athletes to stay hydrated. 

But with so many electrolyte powders, how do you know which one to choose?

Evaluating the electrolyte amount, ingredient list, flavors, and price can be overwhelming and confusing. You don’t want to waste your money on a powder that tastes bad or spend hours researching and reading reviews for the best option. And you shouldn’t need a science degree to figure this out!

Here are the best electrolyte powders that our team of experts recommend for athletes, individuals training in the heat, and those of us who just want to supercharge our water.  

Medical disclaimer: This article is intended for educational and informational purposes only. It is not intended as a substitute for medical advice. For health advice, contact a licensed healthcare provider.

How We Chose the Best Electrolyte Powder

Our Breaking Muscle team members consist of certified personal trainers, nutrition coaches, powerlifting coaches, Olympic weightlifters, and CrossFit aficionados. We’ve tasted over 20 of the most popular electrolyte powders, consuming them before or after our toughest workouts or throughout the day whenever we felt extra thirsty. We gave each powder an overall score based on the quality and dosage of the electrolyte blend, flavors, taste, texture, potential side effects, and whether it’s third-party tested. We also compared the prices and the customer reviews to find the best value for money.

We know that people use electrolytes in a wide range of situations and settings, so our top picks cover not only the best electrolyte powder overall, but also the ones that taste the best, have no added sugars, or are best suited for certain populations, like runners. In the list below, you should find everything you need to choose the best electrolyte powder for your needs.

Our Top Picks for the Best Electrolyte Powder

Best Electrolyte Powder Overall: Transparent Labs Hydrate

Transparent Labs Hydrate
4.5
  • Number of servings: 40 servings
  • Cost per serving: $0.75
  • Electrolytes per serving: Calcium, magnesium, sodium, potassium
  • Additional key ingredients: Taurine, panax ginseng, coconut water powder
Check Price

Pros

  • Transparent, proprietary-free supplement
  • Gluten-free, vegan-friendly, non-GMO
  • Independent third-party tested by Informed Choice
  • Well-priced at $29.99

Cons

  • Stevia might be too sweet for some
  • Only two flavors are available

Transparent Labs Hydrate is our pick for the best electrolyte powder overall because it has a fully transparent label with ingredients that are third-party tested. It also hits some big checkmarks for users with specific needs, like being gluten-free, vegan-friendly, and free of artificial sweeteners, colors, and preservatives. After testing it for several weeks, the Breaking Muscle reviews staff scored it 4.5 out of 5 stars.

Unlike many other supplements, including a surprising number of electrolyte powders, Transparent Labs Hydrate is a hydration drink that’s free of any proprietary ingredient blends. Companies often hide the dosages of certain ingredients on the labels of their supplements under a “blend” or “matrix,” supposedly to protect them from other brands who would simply make a duplicate product for their profit. However, it also means they can claim to include a popular ingredient, while doing so in a less-than-effective dose. 

Transparent Labs lives up to its name by showing exactly what you get in each serving: research-backed dosages of four electrolyte ingredients, plus the amino acid taurine, which helps maintain the body’s water/electrolyte balance. This means you can confidently customize the dosage according to your needs and preferences without worrying about underdosing or overdosing on ingredients.

One of our product testers used Hydrate as both a pre-workout and post-workout drink. In both instances, they noticed increased hydration but found that when taken before training, it was an excellent way for them to improve their muscle endurance. It’s possible an electrolyte powder can be the best non-stim pre-workout you haven’t tried.

Hydrate is certified by the third-party testing agency Informed Choice for purity, potency, and accuracy, and the results of each are available for anyone to see on the Certificates of Analysis page on their website. This means that you can be confident that each serving of Hydrate meets a high standard of quality and efficacy and includes exactly what it claims to contain while being free of contaminants that could harm your health and performance.

Currently, Hydrate only comes in two flavors: Tropical Punch and Peach Mango. Some commenters have noted that the tropical punch flavor tends to be very sweet, which our tester confirmed. He tends to add more water than recommended because when he followed the package’s directions, it tasted like a very concentrated Hawaiian punch. He also noted that he’s added it to a shaker bottle of cluster dextrin and the taste still came through very strongly.

If you’re sensitive to sweet flavors, you may want to start with a half serving instead or double the water.

RELATED: Best Protein Powders for Muscle Gain for Men, Women, Beginners, and More

Best Electrolyte Powder for Athletes: Kaged Hydra-Charge

Kaged Hydra-Charge
4.5
  • Number of servings: 60 servings
  • Cost per serving: $0.49
  • Magnesium per serving: 15 milligrams
  • Daily value: Four percent
  • Form: Drink mix
Check Price

Pros

  • Informed Sport-certified for accuracy and banned substances
  • 351 milligrams of essential electrolytes with 500 milligrams of coconut water powder
  • No artificial colors, flavors, or dyes
  • Rated 5 out of 5 from over 2,099 reviews
  • Gluten-free, vegan-friendly, non-GMO

Cons

  • Sucralose and stevia might be too sweet for some
  • Not suitable for those with tree nut allergies

Kaged Hydra-Charge is the best hydration mix for athletes because it’s Informed Sport-certified, provides 351 milligrams of five essential electrolytes, and has no artificial colors, flavors, or dyes. For these reasons, we scored it 4.5 out of 5 stars overall.

As an athlete, your body is your livelihood, and having peace of mind with your supplements is priceless. The Breaking Muscle reviews team loves that every batch of Kaged Hydra-Charge is tested for contamination against a broad range of banned substances using accredited methods. Informed Sport has over 60 years of experience in anti-doping testing for sports, so you can trust that Kaged Hydra-Charge is safe and compliant with the highest standards of quality and purity — giving you the lowest possible risk of being flagged for an illegal substance due to supplement contamination.

But Hydra-Charge is also a first-class hydration tool for athletes who sweat heavily and need to maximize athletic performance. It delivers a powerful blend of five essential electrolytes in each 351-milligram dose, plus an additional 500 milligrams of coconut water powder. With this combined cocktail, Hydra-Charge has the potential to maintain your fluid balance, prevent muscle cramps, support muscle function, and promote recovery.

When your goal is the top of the podium, you treat your body like a temple. Kaged Hydra-Charge supports your quest by having no artificial colors, flavors, or dyes — a rarity in our world of ultra-processed foods and drinks. But rest assured, Kaged still respects your taste buds! Hydra-Charge comes in eight flavors and has an average rating of 5 out of 5 from over 2,099 reviews. 

Our product testers tasted the orange mango and said it was DELIGHTFUL (they even used all-caps), with more of an emphasis on the citrus flavor than the mango. They found it sweet but not overpowerfully so. It also dissolved 100 percent.

Look further down the label, and you’ll notice that the last two ingredients are stevia and sucralose. Kaged uses small amounts of both “to mask bitterness and improve the overall taste profile,” according to the company’s website. While stevia is plant-based and zero-calorie, a July 2018 study in Nutrients determined that it’s still 50 to 350 times sweeter than sugar. (1) Because of this, people sensitive to sweetened foods or drinks might want to start with a smaller serving or add more water than recommended.

Hydra-Charge uses coconut water powder, a common ingredient in electrolyte blends. A May 2020 study in The Annals of Allergies, Asthma, and Immunology found the prevalence of tree nut allergies to be less than one to three percent worldwide, but it still means this electrolyte powder isn’t suitable for people who know they are sensitive to coconut products or who are allergic to tree nuts. (2)

Best Tasting Electrolyte Powder: Liquid I.V. Hydration Multiplier

Liquid I.V. Hydration Multiplier
3.8
  • Number of servings: 16 servings 
  • Cost per serving: $1.56
  • Electrolytes per serving: Sodium, potassium
  • Additional key ingredients: Pure cane sugar, dextrose, citric acid
Check Price

Pros

  • 11 delicious flavors
  • Mixes well
  • Convenient single-serve packets

Cons

  • Limited traditional electrolyte ingredients
  • 11 grams of sugar per packet

Liquid I.V. Hydration Multiplier is the best-tasting electrolyte powder due to its wide range of 11 flavors that have a balanced salty-to-sweet taste while being easy to carry and mix well.

A pouch of Liquid IV and the powder mixed in a glass of water
Showing how Liquid I.V. looks when mixed in water

Whether you prefer fruity, citrusy, or tropical flavors, you’ll find something in Liquid I.V.’s lineup that suits your taste buds. Our product testers ordered a variety pack with Lemon Lime and Acai Berry. They found them not too sweet, just a touch salty, and true to the flavors in both cases. One of our pregnant staff members who finds herself parched all the time raved about Liquid I.V. She said that she is often still thirsty after drinking plain water, and Liquid I.V. is the only thing that will quench her thirst.

While some popular electrolytes come in scoopable powder form, Hydration Multiplier comes in pre-measured packets. The powder dissolves easily in water and doesn’t leave any clumps or residue. You just need to follow the instructions and mix each packet with 16 ounces of water. Our testers noticed that the drink can turn out a bit grainy if using less than the recommended amount of water. That said, you can add more water if you prefer a slightly more diluted flavor.

Hydration Multiplier’s lightweight packets are small enough to stash in a gym bag, backpack, or pocket for whenever you need hydration. There’s no need to worry about measuring scoops or spilling powder. Just tear open a packet, pour it into a bottle of water, shake it up, and drink. 

Pouring a Liquid I.V. packet into a glass of water
Pouring a packet of Liquid I.V. into a cup of water

Personally, I’ve been keeping a package of Liquid IV in my pantry at all times for a couple of years. When I drink a packet after an intense workout, I’ve noticed that I recover faster and feel less beat up overall, especially on a hot, humid day. I’ve tried many flavors, but Watermelon, Tropical Punch, and Strawberry are my favorites.

The downside of such tasty flavors is that they result from added sugar. Liquid I.V. uses pure cane sugar as its first ingredient, contributing 45 calories and 11 grams of sugar per packet. This is still far less than a can of soda, but it may not be ideal for people watching their sugar intake or those who have diabetes. While cane sugar is arguably better than corn syrup or other artificial sweeteners, it’s still a source of empty calories that can affect your blood sugar levels.

Liquid I.V. also claims to provide three times more electrolytes than traditional sports drinks. However, when you look at the electrolyte content, it only has 500 milligrams of sodium and 370 milligrams of potassium per packet. It also doesn’t contain calcium or magnesium, key electrolytes for muscle function and nerve transmission. This means that Liquid I.V. has the lowest total electrolyte count out of all the powders in this article and is the main reason we only scored it 3.8 out of 5 stars.

RELATED: Best Magnesium Supplements of 2023 for Better Sleep, Leg Cramps, and More

Best Sugar-Free Electrolyte Powder: LMNT Zero-Sugar Electrolytes

LMNT Zero-Sugar Electrolytes
4.0
  • Number of servings: 30 servings
  • Cost per serving: $1.35
  • Electrolytes per serving: Sodium, potassium, magnesium
  • Additional key ingredients: Natural flavors, stevia leaf extract
Check Price

Pros

  • Keto and paleo-friendly
  • Convenient single-serve packets
  • Balanced electrolyte ratio
  • Gluten-free

Cons

  • More expensive
  • “Salted” flavors can be very salty

LMNT Zero-Sugar Electrolytes is the best sugar-free electrolyte powder we tested. It not only has no sugar, but is also free of gluten, fillers, and any artificial ingredients, making it ideal for keto, paleo, low-carb, intermittent fasting, and gluten-free diets. After taking it before and after our workouts and at various times of the day when we felt extra thirsty, we scored it 4 out of 5 stars.

A packet of LMNT Electrolyte Powder
A packet of unflavored LMNT Electrolyte Powder

This electrolyte drink has zero sugar and only two grams of carbs per serving, much lower than other electrolyte beverages. You can enjoy this drink without worrying about breaking your ketosis or low-carb nutrition plan and know that you’re simultaneously maximizing your hydration status.

The packets are lightweight and small enough to stuff in your gym bag, day bag, or pockets for hydration anywhere you go. You don’t need to measure or scoop anything; just tear open a packet and mix it with water. Whether you are working out, traveling, or just feeling dehydrated, these packets are easy to use and convenient to carry around. 

LMNT claims to give you electrolytes in the “perfect ratio for optimal hydration and performance.” They state that a robust body of scientific literature shows we have underestimated our electrolyte needs for decades, especially if you live an active, low-carb, or ketogenic lifestyle. Yet, popular electrolyte drinks on the market still have low amounts of electrolytes and include a ton of sugar. 

So what’s the solution? In a word, salt! LMNT provides 1,000 milligrams of sodium, nearly double any of the other supplements we featured in this list. It also offers 200 milligrams of potassium and 60 milligrams of magnesium per serving, both of which are essential for maintaining fluid balance, nerve function, muscle contraction, and energy production.

All that sodium can be beneficial for replenishing the sodium lost from sweating, but some people may find the “salted” flavors, such as Citrus Salt or Chocolate Salt, too savory for their liking. But this is definitely a matter of personal taste.

LMNT Electrolyte Powder mixed in water
A packet of LMNT mixed in a glass of water

One of our Breaking Muscle product testers reported that she loved the saltiness, and finds it to be thirst-quenching, especially since she’s constantly parched due to being pregnant. If saltiness isn’t your craving, try the other flavors without the S-word in their names.

Personally, I loved the Mango Chili flavor, which had the same 1,000 milligrams of sodium but a less salt-forward profile. I was afraid that it would be too spicy and make me feel even hotter after a workout, but it turned out the subtle spiciness was just right. I don’t enjoy the unflavored option on its own, but I think it would blend well in juice or another flavored beverage.

These packets don’t come cheap, though. A 30-pack of LMNT retails for $40.50 on Amazon, which is $1.35 per serving. This is more expensive than other electrolyte powders such as Kaged Hydra-Charge, which only costs $0.50 per serving. However, for athletes in need of serious levels of sodium, the high quality and effectiveness of LMNT could justify the higher price tag.

Best Electrolyte Drink Powder: XWERKS Motion

XWERKS Motion
3.6
  • Number of servings: 30 
  • Price per serving: $1.96
  • Amount of BCAAs per serving: Three grams 
  • Calories per serving: 110
  • Flavors: Raspberry Lemonade 
  • Third-party tested: Not at the time of this writing
Check Price

Pros

  • Provides fuel with 25 grams of carbs
  • Promotes recovery with three grams of BCAAs
  • Delivers hydration from electrolytes
  • Gluten-free and dairy-free

Cons

  • High carb content for non-athletic daily drinking
  • Low sodium content
  • Only one flavor
  • Unclear if third-party tested

XWERKS Motion is a complete solution for your hydration, fuel, and recovery needs. Each serving contains 25 grams of carbs, three grams of BCAAs, and the electrolytes calcium, magnesium, and sodium for hydration. This makes it a great pre-workout sipper for anyone who has found themselves mixing products or adding extra ingredients to their electrolytes in the past. 

Kate Meier, Breaking Muscle editorial member and certified personal trainer, pouring XWERKS Motion into a shaker bottle

The carbs in Motion come from cluster dextrin, a new carbohydrate type with a high molecular weight and a low osmotic pressure. This means it dissolves easily, passes through your stomach quickly, and replenishes your energy levels faster than other carbs. Cluster dextrin can be gentle on your stomach and shouldn’t cause bloating or discomfort. This makes it a great carb for long-duration training, marathons, or other races, or for athletes who want to avoid fatigue and maintain high intensity during their workouts. 

One of our product reviewers said Motion really shines as a pre-workout drink when they don’t feel like eating before an early morning workout. He can feel the difference in his energy and output during those sessions.

That said, the carb content might be a bit excessive for someone just looking for an electrolyte for daily drinking. If that’s you, consider saving Motion for your workouts, and sipping on a different blend throughout the day. 

Each serving of Motion also contains three grams of the branched-chain amino acids (BCAAs): leucine, isoleucine, and valine. Dietary BCAAs are essential for muscle growth and repair, and a November 2019 meta-analysis in Vitamin and Nutrition Research found that supplemental BCAAs helped limit exercise-induced muscle soreness when taken after exercise. (3)

The BCAAs in Motion come in a 2:1:1 ratio of leucine to valine and isoleucine. Leucine is the most important of the three for recovery, so you can enhance your recovery and be ready for your next fitness challenge. A Breaking Muscle reviewer noted that he often uses it as a recovery drink or any time he feels hot and sweaty.

Speaking of sweat, XWERKS Motion contains calcium, magnesium, and sodium to help you stay hydrated and avoid the adverse effects of electrolyte loss. However, its sodium content is the lowest of the products we tested, at just 34 grams, or one percent of your daily allowance. If you’re a particularly heavy sweater or are training in the heat, you might benefit from some additional sodium on top of this drink, or some extra salt on your food. 

Motion currently only comes in only one flavor: Raspberry Lemonade. The Breaking Muscle product reviewers found it tasted more like raspberry than lemonade but was still quite refreshing. They also noted that following XWERKS’ instructions led to a drink that was slightly powdery and suggested using more water than recommended on the packaging to improve its texture. We gave it 4 out of 5 stars because we wished it tasted more like the flavor name and would have liked it to be more soluble.

Most of the electrolyte supplements we included here are either NSF Sport Certified or Informed Sport Certified, which indicates that they have been tested for banned substances and contaminants. While XWERKS’ website claims that “every batch of XWERKS is third-party tested for potency and purity,” the products themselves don’t contain any certifications showing this. These approvals would give consumers more confidence and trust in XWERKS. 

RELATED: Best BCAA Supplements for Women, Men, Weight Loss, and More

Best Electrolyte Powder for Runners: BUBS Hydrate or Die

BUBS Naturals Hydration Powder
4.0
  • Number of servings: 18 servings
  • Cost per serving: $1.89
  • Electrolytes per serving: Sodium, potassium, magnesium, chloride
  • Additional key ingredients: Taurine, iron, coconut water powder
Check Price

Pros

  • NSF Sport Certified supplement
  • Convenient single-serve packets
  • GMO-free, gluten-free, soy-free
  • No artificial flavors, sweeteners, or preservatives
  • 2, 000 milligrams of electrolytes

Cons

  • Noticeably more expensive
  • Very salty flavor

BUBS Hydrate or Die is NSF Sport Certified and comes in convenient single-serve packets, which can be a huge help for serious runners without much pocket space to spare. 

A package of lemon-flavored BUBS Hydrate or Die packets
BUBS Hydrate or Die at the Breaking Muscle testing facility

This electrolyte blend is also NSF Sport Certified, which means an independent organization has tested and verified this product line to ensure it doesn’t contain banned substances, contaminants, or impurities that could harm your health or performance. Especially if you compete beyond the recreational level, this can help you maximize your performance while minimizing your risk from contaminated supplements. 

Unlike other hydration mixes that come in bulky containers and use a scoop for measuring, BUS Hydrate or Die’s packets are lightweight and small enough to keep in a fanny pack, running pack, or your pocket, so you can stay hydrated without being slowed down. Just tear open a packet and pour it into your water bottle, shake well, and enjoy.

The formulation is based on natural ingredients free from genetically modified organisms (GMOs), glute, and soy. This means you can enjoy electrolytes’ benefits without worrying about potential allergens, sensitivities, or preferences that may affect your diet. If you have celiac disease or are vegan, Hydrate or Die is still compatible with your lifestyle and running goals.

Our product tester tried the orange flavor, and it got their attention immediately. They likened the saltiness to licking the sweat off their lips. Compared to the LMNT electrolyte powder, they found BUBS saltier with less citrus flavor. They only rated out 4 out of 5 stars for this reason. 

BUBS Naturals Hydrate or Die Hydration is relatively expensive compared to other electrolyte powders on the market at costs $34 for 18 packets, about $1.89 per serving. This is more than double the price of other popular electrolyte powders, such as Transparent Labs Hydrate. With that and the flavor in mind, it’s definitely more of a fit for high-sweat training and race day, rather than for normal daily sipping. 

What Are Electrolyte Powders?

Electrolyte powders are supplement powders that you can add to your water or other beverages to replenish the minerals and electrolytes you lose through sweat, urine, and daily life. 

Electrolytes conduct electricity when dissolved in water, making them vital for many functions in your body, such as muscle contraction, nerve transmission, fluid balance, and pH regulation. A few of the key electrolytes are sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, chloride, and bicarbonate. (3)

Electrolyte powders, such as tablets, capsules, packets, or tubs, come in different forms. They also come in different flavors like lemon, orange, berry, or unflavored. Some contain additional ingredients, including vitamins like vitamin C or B vitamins, antioxidants or sweeteners like glucose, stevia, sucralose, or sugar. Even some of the best electrolyte tablets and powders also contain caffeine, so make sure to read the label closely before buying. 

Benefits of Electrolyte Powder

There are many benefits of using electrolyte powder, especially if you are an active person who sweats a lot, or if you live in a hot or humid climate. 

  • Reduce the risk of dehydration. Dehydration is a condition where your body loses more water than it takes in, and it can cause symptoms such as headache, fatigue, dizziness, confusion, or even fainting. By adding electrolyte powder to your water, you can ensure that you replace the fluids and electrolytes you lose and stay hydrated throughout the day.
  • Improved athletic performance. You need electrolytes to keep your muscles and nerves functioning properly, whether exercising, working, studying, or just living your life. If your levels get low enough that you experience an electrolyte imbalance, you may experience cramps, weakness, spasms, or even an irregular heartbeat. You can enhance your endurance, strength, speed, and recovery by using electrolyte powder before, during, or after athletic activity.
  • Supports overall health. Electrolytes are not only crucial for physical performance but also for overall health and wellness. They can help regulate blood pressure, blood sugar, bone density, kidney function, and much more.

When Is the Best Time to Take Electrolyte Powder?

This question has no definitive answer, as it depends on your individual needs and preferences. However, here are some general guidelines that you can follow — just make sure to follow the directions on the label and not exceed the recommended dosage:

  • Before exercise: If you plan to do a long or intense workout or compete in a sports event, take some electrolyte powder about 30 minutes before you start. This will help prepare your body for the upcoming physical activity and reduce the risk of dehydration and fatigue.
  • During exercise: If you are sweating a lot or exercising for more than an hour, you can sip some electrolyte powder mixed with water every 15 to 20 minutes. This will help replenish the fluids and electrolytes you lose and maintain your performance and energy levels. Consider a powder that includes carbohydrates like XWERKS Motion for long-duration, continuous intense exercise.
  • After exercise: If you have just finished a hard workout or competition, taking electrolyte powder immediately after you stop can help restore your fluid-electrolyte balance and speed up your recovery and muscle repair. (4)
  • Any time: If you aren’t exercising but still want to enjoy the benefits of electrolyte powder, you can take it any time during the day as a refreshing drink. 

What To Look For in an Electrolyte Powder

Electrolyte Content

The whole point of using an electrolyte powder is to replenish the essential minerals you lose through sweat, such as sodium, potassium, magnesium, and calcium. Look for powders with at least 300 milligrams of sodium and 100 milligrams of potassium per serving, as these are the most important electrolytes for hydration. 

Magnesium and calcium are excellent additions that companies will look to cut costs on, so consider it a bonus when they’re included. You can also look for powders with other trace minerals, such as zinc, copper, manganese, and selenium, for added benefits.

Calories

Calories are a big differentiator between electrolyte supplements and traditional sports drinks. Unless you’re looking for a meal replacement, you want to avoid a powder loaded with calories. Look for ones that have less than 50 calories per serving. Some of the products we reviewed here are even calorie-free. 

A possible exception to this rule is when you need to hydrate during a multi-hour strenuous exercise session. For these situations, consider an electrolyte like XWERKS Motion, which contains 110 calories per serving and 25 grams of fast-digesting carbs. 

Other Ingredients

Some electrolyte powders have more than just electrolytes. Kaged Hydra-Charge contains a blend of antioxidants, for example, and BUBS Hydrate or Die contains 1.5 milligrams of iron. Many electrolyte supplements can also contain additional vitamins, amino acids, or caffeine. These can be helpful if you’re looking for an energy boost, enhanced recovery, or immune support. 

However, caffeine can also cause side effects such as jitters, nausea, or headaches if you’re very sensitive or have already taken a high dose of caffeine from another supplement. This is a big reason to be careful with powders with long ingredient lists or hidden amounts under proprietary blends. Read the label carefully and avoid anything you’re allergic or sensitive to.

RELATED: Best Non-Stim Pre-Workout Supplements for All of the Focus Without the Jitters (2023)

Flavors 

Electrolyte powders come in a variety of flavors, from fruity to salty — and even a few that are chocolatey! You might find some delicious and others downright disgusting. The taste of your powder can make a big difference in how much you enjoy drinking it and how often you use it. Try to find a flavor that you like and that matches your preferences. 

For example, go for lemon or lime if you like sour drinks. If you want sweet beverages, go for berry or orange. If you enjoy creamy drinks, go for vanilla or coconut. If you like salty flavors, go for salted chocolate or caramel.

Dissolvability 

A clumpy or gritty electrolyte powder can ruin both the taste and texture of your drink at the exact moment when you’re thirstiest. What a drag! Look for powders that dissolve quickly and fully in the recommended water amount without leaving any residue or sediment.

Convenience

Depending on how and when you train, you may want an electrolyte powder that’s easy to carry around. If you’re on the go often, look for powders in individual stick packs that you can toss in your bag or pocket. That way, you can always have one handy when you need it. 

If your run or ride always starts from home, you can also look for powders in tubs or jars that you can scoop out and measure yourself. This can be more economical and customizable, but also messier.

Final Thoughts

Electrolyte powders are a great way to stay hydrated and healthy, especially if you’re active or live in a hot or humid climate. However, not all electrolyte powders are created equal. 

You should look for one that replenishes the important electrolytes you lose through sweat, such as sodium and potassium. You should also find one that suits your taste buds and lifestyle, whether you need a convenient packet to take on the go or a tub to mix at home. 

And, of course, consider the ingredients’ price and quality — you don’t want to break the bank or compromise your health.

Best Electrolyte Powder: Side-by-Side Comparison

Best Electrolyte Powder Overall
Best Electrolyte Powder for Athletes
Best Tasting Electrolyte Powder
Best Sugar-Free Electrolyte Powder
Best Electrolyte Drink Powder
Best Electrolyte Powder for Runners
Description:
  • Number of servings: 40 servings
  • Cost per serving: $0.75
  • Electrolytes per serving: Calcium, magnesium, sodium, potassium
  • Additional key ingredients: Taurine, panax ginseng, coconut water powder
Description:
  • Number of servings: ~60 servings
  • Cost per serving: $0.50
  • Electrolytes per serving: Calcium, phosphorus, magnesium, sodium, potassium
  • Additional key ingredients: Taurine, coconut water powder, antioxidant blend
Description:
  • Number of servings: 16 servings 
  • Cost per serving: $1.56
  • Electrolytes per serving: Sodium, potassium
  • Additional key ingredients: Pure cane sugar, dextrose, citric acid
Description:
  • Number of servings: 30 servings
  • Cost per serving: $1.35
  • Electrolytes per serving: Sodium, potassium, magnesium
  • Additional key ingredients: Natural flavors, stevia leaf extract
Description:
  • Number of servings: 30 servings
  • Cost per serving: $1.63
  • Electrolytes per serving: Calcium, magnesium, sodium
  • Additional key ingredients: Cluster dextrin, BCAAs, electrolytes
Description:
  • Number of servings: 18 servings
  • Cost per serving: $1.89
  • Electrolytes per serving: Sodium, potassium, magnesium, chloride
  • Additional key ingredients: Taurine, iron, coconut water powder
Best Electrolyte Powder Overall
Description:
  • Number of servings: 40 servings
  • Cost per serving: $0.75
  • Electrolytes per serving: Calcium, magnesium, sodium, potassium
  • Additional key ingredients: Taurine, panax ginseng, coconut water powder
Best Electrolyte Powder for Athletes
Description:
  • Number of servings: ~60 servings
  • Cost per serving: $0.50
  • Electrolytes per serving: Calcium, phosphorus, magnesium, sodium, potassium
  • Additional key ingredients: Taurine, coconut water powder, antioxidant blend
Best Tasting Electrolyte Powder
Description:
  • Number of servings: 16 servings 
  • Cost per serving: $1.56
  • Electrolytes per serving: Sodium, potassium
  • Additional key ingredients: Pure cane sugar, dextrose, citric acid
Best Sugar-Free Electrolyte Powder
Description:
  • Number of servings: 30 servings
  • Cost per serving: $1.35
  • Electrolytes per serving: Sodium, potassium, magnesium
  • Additional key ingredients: Natural flavors, stevia leaf extract
Best Electrolyte Drink Powder
Description:
  • Number of servings: 30 servings
  • Cost per serving: $1.63
  • Electrolytes per serving: Calcium, magnesium, sodium
  • Additional key ingredients: Cluster dextrin, BCAAs, electrolytes
Best Electrolyte Powder for Runners
Description:
  • Number of servings: 18 servings
  • Cost per serving: $1.89
  • Electrolytes per serving: Sodium, potassium, magnesium, chloride
  • Additional key ingredients: Taurine, iron, coconut water powder

FAQs

Which electrolyte brand is best?

We selected Transparent Labs as the best electrolyte brand. Their electrolyte powder called Hydrate has a fully transparent label with gluten-free and vegan-friendly ingredients while being third-party tested. It also tastes great both during exercise or as a daily water enhancement. 

Do electrolyte powders really work?

Yes, electrolyte powders provide your body with essential minerals that help regulate fluid balance, muscle contraction, nerve function, blood pressure, and pH levels. They can improve your performance and recovery and can be especially helpful if you lose a lot of fluids and electrolytes through sweating, vomiting, diarrhea, or fever. 

What is the healthiest electrolyte water to drink?

The healthiest electrolyte water is infused with LMNT Keto Electrolyte Powder Packets. It has no sugar, gluten, fillers, or artificial ingredients, making it ideal for keto, low-carb, intermittent fasting, and gluten-free diets. 

Is it okay to drink electrolyte powder every day?

It’s perfectly safe to drink electrolyte powder every day. However, you probably don’t need to drink electrolyte powder every day if you eat a healthy diet. You may already get enough electrolytes from food sources such as fruits, vegetables, dairy products, nuts, seeds, and salted foods.

Research

  1. Samuel P, Ayoob KT, Magnuson BA, et al. Stevia Leaf to Stevia Sweetener: Exploring Its Science, Benefits, and Future Potential. J Nutr. 2018;148(7):1186S-1205S. doi:10.1093/jn/nxy102
  2. McWilliam VL, Perrett KP, Dang T, Peters RL. Prevalence and natural history of tree nut allergy. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol. 2020;124(5):466-472. doi:10.1016/j.anai.2020.01.024
  3. Fedewa MV, Spencer SO, Williams TD, Becker ZE, Fuqua CA. Effect of branched-Chain Amino Acid Supplementation on Muscle Soreness following Exercise: A Meta-Analysis. Int J Vitam Nutr Res. 2019;89(5-6):348-356. doi:10.1024/0300-9831/a000543
  4. Baker LB, Jeukendrup AE. Optimal composition of fluid-replacement beverages. Compr Physiol. 2014;4(2):575-620. doi:10.1002/cphy.c130014

The post Best Electrolyte Powder (2024): Hydration for Sports, Intense Exercise, and Daily Life appeared first on Breaking Muscle.

]]>
Best Probiotic for Women (2024): Gut Health Supplements for Bloating, Pregnancy, Weight Loss and More https://breakingmuscle.com/best-probiotic-for-women/ Tue, 17 Oct 2023 14:45:11 +0000 https://breakingmuscle.com/?p=198920 Everybody’s talking about gut health these days, which means probiotics are finally getting the attention some of us felt they deserved all along. Probiotics are like the “good guys” in your gut — they’re helpful bacteria that hang out with other tiny creatures like bacteria, fungi, viruses, and protozoa in your large intestine to help maintain a balanced...

The post Best Probiotic for Women (2024): Gut Health Supplements for Bloating, Pregnancy, Weight Loss and More appeared first on Breaking Muscle.

]]>
Everybody’s talking about gut health these days, which means probiotics are finally getting the attention some of us felt they deserved all along. Probiotics are like the “good guys” in your gut — they’re helpful bacteria that hang out with other tiny creatures like bacteria, fungi, viruses, and protozoa in your large intestine to help maintain a balanced microbiome. Probiotics, either from fermented foods or supplements or both, can support smoother digestion and enhanced immune health. 

Our Breaking Muscle team, including certified personal trainers, nutrition experts, competitive Olympic weightlifters, and other highly credentialed individuals, have tested 20 of the most popular probiotic supplements so you can feel confident when you’re comparing similar-looking products online. 

As a registered dietitian and nutrition writer who’s no stranger to providing education about probiotics, I’ve combined my knowledge of nutrition with their product feedback to offer you an extensive guide delving into the best probiotics for women. 

Medical disclaimer: This article is intended for educational and informational purposes only. It is not intended as a substitute for medical advice. For health advice, contact a licensed healthcare provider.

How We Chose the Best Probiotic for Women

Our selection of top probiotics for women was determined by analyzing specific strains, live bacteria quantity, and the pricing of each product. Additionally, our first-hand testing of 20 probiotics enabled us to learn more about them from a customer perspective. To identify the best options, we combined our experiences with reviews from verified customers, assessing factors like taste, ease of swallowing, scent, and any potential side effects.

Additionally, we took brand reputation and credibility into account, giving preference to those with transparent labeling and third-party testing. Our goal is to offer candid reviews that empower women to make well-informed choices when selecting a probiotic supplement.

Our Top Picks for the Best Probiotic for Women

Best Probiotic for Women Overall: Ritual Synbiotic+

Ritual Synbiotic+
4.5
  • Number of servings: 30
  • Cost per serving: $1.80
  • Form: Delayed-release capsule
  • Strains: Two
  • CFU count: 11 billion
Check Price

Pros

  • Contains prebiotics, probiotics, and postbiotic
  • 11 billion colony-forming units of live strain probiotics 
  • No refrigeration necessary 
  • Delayed-release capsule
  • Third-party tested

Cons

  • Not available on Amazon
  • More expensive than other options that cost less than $1.00 per serving 
  • Automatically signs you up for a subscription when you make a purchase

Ritual Synbiotic+ is a three-in-one supplement, containing prebiotics, probiotics, and a postbiotic. It’s made with traceable, gluten-free ingredients without common allergens. The probiotic blend includes two of the world’s most clinically studied strains for a balanced gut microbiome. 

It’s increasingly common for probiotic supplements to also contain prebiotics. Prebiotics are fibers that act as food for probiotics, helping healthy populations to flourish and thrive in the gut. PreforPro, a prebiotic bacteriophage blend, is included in Synbiotic+ to support the growth of beneficial bacteria living inside the gut. 

Eleven billion colony forming units (CFUs, or the number of bacterial cells) from the live bacteria strains lactobacillus rhamnosus (LGG) and Bifidobacterium animalis ssp. lactis (BB-12) make up the probiotic blend in Synbiotic+. These highly-studied probiotics can help relieve occasional discomforts such as bloating, gas, and diarrhea.

The postbiotic, tributyrin, is a triglyceride (a type of fat), made up of three molecules of butyric acid linked to glycerol. When released from tributyrin, butyric acid may support the growth of beneficial gut bacteria and promote the health of intestinal cells.

The delayed-release capsule is designed to help its contents reach the colon, the ideal place for probiotics to survive and grow. Its appearance is cutting-edge, and we think it even smells better than other probiotics. Synbiotic+ is mint essenced, which our Breaking Muscle tester found to be refreshing after testing other brands, which can tend to smell earthy. The capsule itself isn’t too large, and we found it to be easily swallowed without discomfort. 

Some customers report uncomfortable side effects when first starting this supplement. Our team member experienced a little gas, but nothing unbearable. This is normal when starting a probiotic because your gut needs a little time to adjust to 11 billion or so new guests.  

Furthermore, the product is third-party tested, so you know it’s been evaluated for heavy metals and potentially harmful contaminants. 

RELATED: Best Multivitamin for Women

Best Probiotic for Women for Weight Loss: Kaged Probiotic

Kaged Pro-Biotic
3.5
  • Number of servings: 90
  • Cost per serving: $0.33
  • Form: Capsule
  • Strains: Lactobacillus plantarum
  • CFU count: 30 billion CFUs
Check Price

Pros

  • Clinically studied patented probiotic strain 
  • 30 billion colony-forming units of live strain probiotics 
  • Third-party tested

Cons

  • Only one strain of bacteria
  • Having to take three capsules per day raises the cost

Kaged Pro-Biotic is designed to improve both gut function and exercise performance. Recent research indicates that incorporating a probiotic supplement may help athletes improve their muscle endurance and shorten recovery times. Kaged Pro-Biotic stands out in this regard as it contains TWK10®, a patented probiotic version of the strain lactobacillus plantarum, tailored to target gut muscle to enhance training. 

Each capsule provides 10 billion CFUs of TWK10®, derived from fermented kimchi. A 2019 clinical study published in the journal Nutrients found that non-trained healthy individuals taking TWK10® had significantly improved exercise performance, body composition, and endurance. (1) The researchers also concluded that TWK10® could support weight management efforts. Participants who took a high dose saw a significant reduction in body fat and an increase in muscle mass. 

Kaged Pro-Biotic comes in the form of a small delayed-release vegetable capsule. It’s designed to surpass the harsh environment of the stomach and remain intact until it dissolves in the intestines, where it’s best absorbed. The more your body can absorb, the greater the health benefits of each serving.

Our Breaking Muscle expert tester did not notice any off-putting smell or taste when taking this supplement. The capsules are easy to swallow, and she didn’t experience any side effects. 

Kaged claims that each serving size is one capsule, but they encourage you to take one three times a day with breakfast, lunch, and dinner. So, even though each “serving” is only $0.33, you’re actually spending $1.00 per day if you take the recommended three capsules. 

Best Probiotic for Women over 50: Ritual Synbiotic+

Ritual Synbiotic+
4.5
  • Number of servings: 30
  • Cost per serving: $1.80
  • Form: Delayed-release capsule
  • Strains: Two
  • CFU count: 11 billion
Check Price

Pros

  • Contains prebiotics, probiotics, and postbiotic
  • 11 billion colony-forming units of live strain probiotics 
  • No refrigeration necessary 
  • Delayed-release capsule
  • Third-party tested

Cons

  • Not available on Amazon
  • More expensive than other options that cost less than $1.00 per serving 
  • Automatically signs you up for a subscription when you make a purchase

Ritual Synbiotic+ is a comprehensive 3-in-1 supplement that combines prebiotics, probiotics, and a postbiotic. Its probiotic blend features two of the world’s most extensively studied strains, LGG and BB-12, which were shown in a March 2021 study in Frontiers in Immunology to improve constipation, reduce diarrheal episodes, and reduce inflammation in the gut in older individuals. (2)

In addition to 11 billion colony-forming units from two strains of bacteria, Synbiotic+ includes PreforPro, a prebiotic bacteriophage blend, to specifically support the expansion of beneficial gut bacteria. Including prebiotics in a probiotic supplement is common, as prebiotics serve as nourishment for probiotics, fostering their growth and activity within the gut. 

In addition, the supplement includes a postbiotic called tributyrin, a type of triglyceride composed of three butyric acid molecules linked to one glycerol molecule. As people get older, they sometimes have lower levels of butyric acid (this varies based on diet, genetics, and health conditions). Having enough butyric acid is crucial for keeping your gut healthy, preventing inflammation, and providing energy to the cells lining your intestines.

To ensure the effective absorption of its contents, Synbiotic+ features a delayed-release capsule designed to reach the colon, the optimal environment for probiotic survival and growth. Its mint essence adds a refreshing taste, and the pills are comfortably sized for easy swallowing.

RELATED: Best Collagen Supplements

Best Probiotic for Women for Vaginal Health: Culturelle Women’s 4-in-1 Protection Capsules

Culturelle Women’s 4-in-1 Daily Probiotic Supplements
4.5
  • Number of servings: 30
  • Cost per serving: $0.91
  • Form: Capsule
  • Strains: Lactobacillus rhamnosus GG, Lactobacillus crispatus LBV 88, Lactobacillus rhamnosus LBV 96, Lactobacillus gasseri LBV 150N, Lactobacillus jensenii LBV 116 
  • CFU count: 15 billion CFUs
Check Price

Pros

  • Contains both prebiotics and probiotics 
  • Made with five different probiotic strains for diverse benefits 
  • Promotes healthy vaginal microbiota
  • Helps protect the urinary tract from unfriendly bacteria

Cons

  • Some customers complain of nausea and stomach pain
  • Not third-party tested

Your vaginal microbiome (community of microorganisms) can easily be disrupted by stress, diet, sex, menstruation, and certain medications. Culturelle Women’s 4-in-1 Protection Capsules are designed to offer complete feminine care, benefiting vaginal, immune, gut, and urinary tract health. Each capsule includes a probiotic and prebiotic blend to support a diverse microbiome. 

Every dose provides 15 billion CFUs, combining the probiotic Lactobacillus rhamnosus GG with a blend of four lactobacilli found in the vaginal microbiomes of healthy women. Lactobacillus rhamnosus GG supports the digestive system and immune health by restoring the balance of bacteria in the gut. It helps to reduce occasional digestive upset, diarrhea, gas, and bloating. The lactobacilli strains promote beneficial bacteria to support vaginal pH balance for feminine health. 

Additionally, this 4-in-1 protection capsule features a feminine prebiotic blend formulated to protect the urinary tract from bad bacteria. For women who experience frequent urinary tract infections (UTIs), this supplement may help prevent them. 

Customer reviews on the Culturelle website are generally positive about swallowability and benefits. Some customers complain of uncomfortable side effects in the days after they start taking it. One verified buyer writes, “It works pretty good. Doesn’t upset my stomach Like other probiotics have. Easy to swallow. Doesn’t have an aftertaste.” Another reports, “I didn’t really notice a difference until a week later when I was experiencing nausea and just sick to my stomach.” 

Remember, it’s common to experience mild bloating or gas when starting a probiotic. This is due to the changing environment in the gut and typically resolves within a couple of weeks. 

Best Prebiotic and Probiotic for Women: Onnit Total Gut Health 

Onnit Total Gut Health
4.5
  • Number of servings: 15
  • Cost per serving: $2.53
  • Form: Vegetarian capsules 
  • Strains: Five
  • CFU count: 35 billion
Check Price

Pros

  • Made with five different probiotic strains for diverse benefits 
  • Includes betaine HCl to aid in digestion 
  • Contains enzymes to help break down nutrients 
  • Made with two types of prebiotics to feed probiotic strains

Cons

  • Each serving contains seven pills
  • More expensive than other options that cost less than $1.00 per serving

Onnit Total Gut Health is much more than a probiotic. Every packet includes seven capsules consisting of digestive enzymes, probiotics, prebiotics, and betaine HCl to support digestion and a diverse gut microbiome. 

Total Gut Health includes five strains of probiotics, more than most other supplements. Together in a single capsule, these five strains may help improve digestion, reduce inflammation, alleviate gas, and contribute to a balanced gut microbiome. 

The packet also contains two prebiotic capsules from organic Jerusalem artichoke and organic dandelion root. Prebiotics help feed the probiotic strains and contribute to a positive balance of beneficial bacteria.

Furthermore, three pills offer digestive enzymes and betaine HCl for enhanced digestion. Betaine HCl promotes stomach acid production to break down food. Digestive enzymes are proteins that facilitate the breakdown of carbs, fat, and protein and optimize the nutrient absorption to be used for energy and growth and repair of tissues.

Finally, each capsule provides saccharomyces boulardii, a beneficial yeast that acts as a probiotic and promotes a healthy balance of microorganisms in the gut. It may also help alleviate symptoms of diarrhea by interfering with the growth of harmful bacteria.

The only catch? To experience all those benefits, you have to take seven separate pills. If you don’t like swallowing pills, this may not be the best option. Onnit recommends taking all seven capsules daily but mentions they can be spread out throughout the day as long as they’re taken with food. 

Customers rate Total Gut Health a 4.5 out of 5 stars on the Onnit website. One customer says, “I was experiencing bloating, gas, discomfort and decided to try this product after reading some reviews. It worked very well, and I am happy with how it helps.” 

Best Probiotic for Gut Health for Women: Transparent Labs Probiotic 

Transparent Labs Probiotic
4.5
  • Number of servings: 30
  • Cost per serving: $1.53
  • Form: Capsule 
  • Strains: 10
  • CFU count: 100 billion
Check Price

Pros

  • Contains a remarkable 100 billion colony-forming units
  • Includes 10 probiotic strains 
  • No artificial sweeteners, flavors, or colors

Cons

  • Not many product reviews 
  • More expensive than other options that cost less than $1.00 per serving

Transparent Labs Probiotic-Advanced Gut Health Formula boasts an impressive 100 billion live microorganisms in every serving, surpassing the quantities found in most top-rated probiotic supplements. It also encompasses a diverse array of 10 probiotics, offering the gut a surplus of benefits. 

A bottle of Transparent Labs Probiotic
A bottle of Transparent Labs Gut Health Probiotic at the Breaking Muscle testing facility

The main probiotic strain is lactobacillus acidophilus, which an August 2022 study in The Journal of Microbiology and Biotechnology concluded to support the regulation of intestinal flora balance, enhance immunity, have potential age-delaying and anti-cancer effects, and possibly even help reduce cholesterol. (3) Following closely is lactobacillus rhamnosus, known to restore the balance of beneficial gut bacteria and reduce irritable bowel syndrome (IBS) symptoms like gas, bloating, and diarrhea. 

These strains are also known for their ability to survive the acid and bile salts in the stomach. This is important because they are more likely to make it to the digestive tract, where they can be absorbed to offer the most benefits. 

In essence, this supplement is teeming with a wealth of live gut bacteria that wield significant advantages for both gut and immune health. Furthermore, it maintains a clean profile by omitting artificial sweeteners, colorings, and preservatives, all of which have the potential to trigger bloating and compromise immune function.

Amazingly, each serving is only two pills per day. Our Breaking Muscle tester found the capsules easy to swallow and didn’t experience any nausea or gastrointestinal discomfort. The capsules also didn’t have any distinct smell or taste.

To date, there are only 34 product reviews of Advanced Gut Health Formula on the Transparent Labs website. One customer writes, “I use this daily. I’ve noticed a change in bloating and I just feel better throughout the day. Would recommend to anyone!” Another says, “Great supplement. Has definitely helped my gut health and made digestive issues better.”

Best Probiotic Gummies for Women: Olly Probiotic + Prebiotic Gummy

Olly Probiotic + Prebiotic Gummy
4.0
  • Number of servings: 30
  • Cost per serving: $0.40
  • Form: Gummy 
  • Strains: One
  • CFU count: 500 million
Check Price

Pros

  • Contains an impressive 500 billion colony-forming units
  • Includes prebiotic fiber that nourishes good bacteria
  • More affordable than others that cost more than $1.00 per serving
  • Third-party tested

Cons

  • Only one strain of probiotic bacteria
  • Some customers complain about the oversized bottles and plastic packaging

Olly Probiotic + Prebiotic Gummies offer a two-pronged approach to enhance digestive health and maintain a balance of good bacteria in the gut. As the name indicates, this blend contains prebiotics, which other supplements like Transparent Labs Probiotic lack. Prebiotics are food for probiotics and help them work more effectively.

Each serving is packed with an impressive dose of 500 million Bacillus Coagulans, known for reducing symptoms of irritable bowel syndrome (IBS). Specifically, a January 2021 study in Medicine found it may improve bloating, cramping, abdominal pain, diarrhea, and constipation. (4)

The prebiotic fiber blend includes inulin, which an April 2023 review study found can improve digestive health, offer constipation relief, and improve the management of diabetes. (5) Prebiotics nourish beneficial gut bacteria so they thrive and work more efficiently. 

Customers highly approve of the peach flavor of these probiotics and rate the product a 4.6 out of 5 stars. One customer review on the Olly website says, “I have been taking these for a few weeks now and can definitely see a difference, especially with making me feel less bloated and regular. I love how these taste great and are gummies.” Some customers complained about the oversized plastic bottle, which they felt was wasteful. 

Those objections aside, Olly Probiotic + Prebiotic Gummies are very affordable. They cost only $0.47 per serving, drastically less than other probiotic supplements like Onnit Total Gut Health, which costs $2.53 per serving. 

RELATED: Best Magnesium Supplements

Best Probiotic for Women with IBS: YourBiology Gut+

YourBiology Gut+
4.5
  • Number of servings: 30
  • Cost per serving: $2.17
  • Form: Capsule
  • Strains: Four
  • CFU count: 40 billion
Check Price

Pros

  • Contains four strains of probiotic bacteria 
  • Includes prebiotic fiber that nourishes good bacteria
  • Made with a marine polysaccharide complex to protect probiotics from stomach acid

Cons

  • More expensive than other options that cost less than $1.00 per serving
  • Not available on Amazon 
  • Very few reviews on the website

YourBiology Gut+ combines four probiotic strains, prebiotic fiber, and a marine polysaccharide complex to reduce symptoms of IBS and improve gut health. The capsules are formulated to survive the harsh environment in the stomach to allow for better absorption. 

Those with IBS are no strangers to tummy troubles, diarrhea, constipation, gas, and bloating. This probiotic utilizes lactobacillus acidophilus, which a January 2020 randomized controlled trial study found to help balance good bacteria in the gut and reduce uncomfortable symptoms of IBS. (6) Bifidobacterium lactis also helps reduce symptoms by assisting in the breakdown of food for more consistent bowel movements, which may help you feel lighter and slimmer. 

Capsules include the patented MAKtrek® marine polysaccharide complex derived from brown seaweed, which shields the probiotics from stomach acid until in the intestines, ensuring you absorb more of the good gut bacteria. The company claims that the YourBiology Gut+ supplement has a survival rate 250 times better than standard probiotics. 

Furthermore, fructooligosaccharide, a natural prebiotic fiber, helps nourish the good gut probiotic bacteria so they can continue to thrive.

Customer reviews on the website are very limited. One says, “So far so good. I wake up feeling calm and without stomach issues. Works pretty fast.” Another customer writes, “My stomach doesn’t hurt nearly as much and I have a better mood!” If you can afford the higher price tag of $2.66 per serving, they may be worth the potential gut relief. 

Best Probiotic for Menopausal Women: HUM Nutrition Fan Club 

HUM Nutrition Fan Club
4.0
  • Number of servings: 30
  • Cost per serving: $1.33
  • Form: Capsule
  • Strains: Lactobacillus plantarum
  • CFU count: Five billion CFUs
Check Price

Pros

  • Includes Siberian rhubarb to reduce symptoms of menopause
  • Only one capsule per serving
  • Contains grape seed extract to relieve stress

Cons

  • More expensive than other options that cost less than $1.00 per serving
  • Only one probiotic strain

Hum Fan Club is a probiotic formula specifically designed to tackle 11 symptoms of menopause. This innovative and hormone-free supplement includes Siberian rhubarb, probiotics, and grape seed extract to help reduce the effects of reduced estrogen levels. 

Lactobacillus plantarum (DR7) takes the stage in this single-strain probiotic formula. It’s a patented probiotic clinically shown to support the gut-brain axis, improve mood, and balance cortisol levels. The pathway connecting the intestine to the brain is thought to play an important role in regulating mood, emotions, and digestion. An imbalance in the gut-brain axis can negatively impact mental health conditions and gastrointestinal disorders. 

Furthermore, this supplement is formulated with Siberian rhubarb extract, shown to reduce several common symptoms women experience during menopause. One clinical trial found that it helped subjects reduce hot flashes, night sweats, sleep disturbances, mood swings, fatigue, vaginal dryness, and joint and muscle pain. (7)

Menopause is commonly associated with increased stress and anxiety. Hum Fan Club contains grape seed extract, which a February 2021 study in Nutrients concluded could reduce stress, worries, and anxiety. (8) Grape seed extracts are also rich in antioxidants and may help decrease inflammation and cell damage from free radicals.

Customers on the Hum Nutrition website rate this product a 4.3 out of 5 stars. Most find the product to be effective. However, some complain of ongoing, frequent hot flashes. One customer says, “I don’t find that it is helping with the hot flashes.” But another writes, “One of my favorite things in this lifetime! Mood swings, hot flashes, and sleepless nights no more…happy me!” 

Best Probiotic for Bloating for Women: Unbloat Capsules

Unbloat Anti-Bloat Pills for Women
3.8
  • Number of servings: 30
  • Cost per serving: $2.00
  • Form: Capsule
  • Strains: L. casei, b. Lactis, L. plantarum, L. acidophilus, L. rhamnosus, B. longum, B. bifidum 
  • CFU count: 25 billion CFUs
Check Price

Pros

  • Forty ingredients to aid digestion 
  • Vegan and free of common allergens
  • Contains seven different probiotic strains

Cons

  • More expensive than other options that cost less than $1.00 per serving
  • Only available on the company website

Unbloat offers a comprehensive solution to help individuals find relief from bloating. It’s far more than a probiotic supplement, containing prebiotic fiber, enzymes, and numerous herbs. With over 40 ingredients, it’s designed to help you lose the bloat for good so you can feel better and have more energy.

Each serving contains seven probiotic strains to benefit the gut in different ways. For instance, the lactobacillus casei helps prevent or treat diarrhea, while b. Lactis reduces constipation and inflammation in the gut.

Unbloat’s primary prebiotic fibers include inulin and partially hydrolyzed guar gum (PHGG). Inulin encourages the growth of beneficial gut bacteria. PHGG, a soluble dietary fiber, supports regular bowel movements.

Furthermore, the digestive enzymes help to break down nutrients to be absorbed into the bloodstream, and the herbal formula works to combat bloating. Included in the herbal formula are peppermint and ginger, both known to decrease flatulence and stomach cramps.

Customers rate Unbloat a 4.7 out of 5 stars on the product website. One customer raves, “Relief within 24 hours. I’ve been suffering for six months with strange menopausal bloating, like a nightmare mind game! I really was at my WITS’ END! Thank You Unbloat.”

RELATED: Best Greens Powder

Best Probiotic for Pregnant Women: Garden of Life Dr. Formulated Probiotics Once Daily Prenatal 

Garden of Life Dr. Formulated Once Daily Prenatal
4.0
  • Number of servings: 30
  • Cost per serving: $0.47
  • Form: Capsule
  • Strains: Lactobacillus rhamnosus, Lactobacillus rhamnosus HN001, Lactobacillus acidophilus, Lactobacillus plantarum, plus 12 more
  • CFU count: 20 billion CFUs


Check Price

Pros

  • Dairy-free, soy-free, gluten-free
  • Contains sixteen different probiotic strains
  • Third-party tested
  • Budget-friendly

Cons

  • More expensive than other options that cost less than $1.00 per serving
  • Some customers complain that the oversized bottle is wasteful

Probiotics can significantly improve the diversity of the microbiome in expectant mothers. Taking Once Daily Prenatal Probiotic, which contains 20 billion live probiotic cultures, during pregnancy has the potential to help support the immune system of both mom and baby. 

Amongst the 16 probiotic strains in this blend are the big hitters lactobacillus acidophilus and lactobacillus rhamnosus HN001, both of which have been clinically shown to support the immune systems of mom and baby during pregnancy and while breastfeeding. 

One study in the journal Clinical Mechanisms in Allergic Disease found that mothers who took lactobacillus rhamnosus in the third trimester had a higher level of IFN-gamma, a protein that protects against infections, in their cord blood. (9) This could indicate that the babies born to mothers who took lactobacillus rhamnosus probiotics during pregnancy may have a more robust immune response, potentially offering them better protection against infections early in life. (9)

This daily probiotic includes prebiotics from potato and acacia fiber. These ingredients feed the probiotics so they can grow in the gut. 

It’s important to note, however, that this is not a prenatal multivitamin. This means it doesn’t contain essential nutrients, like folic acid, which are needed during pregnancy. All pregnancies are different, so be sure to talk with our doctor before starting any new supplement. 

Amazon customers rate this product very highly at 4.7 out of 5 stars. One customer says, “I am currently pregnant and having some constipation issues (a common issue for pregnancy). I tried several other probiotics and this one has been my favorite thus far. It keeps gas away, makes me regular again.” Some customers complain that the bottle is far too large and wasteful. 

Best Natural Probiotic for Women: Naked Nutrition Naked Gut 

Naked Nutrition Naked Gut
4.5
  • Number of servings: 40
  • Cost per serving: $0.62
  • Form: Digestive powder
  • Strains: One
  • CFU count: Five billion
Check Price

Pros

  • Contains glutamine to support intestinal health 
  • No artificial sweeteners, flavors, or colors 
  • Forty servings per container, which is more than most others with 30 servings

Cons

  • Only one probiotic strain
  • Some customers complain of the taste

Approximately 70% of our immune system resides in the gut. Probiotics, such as DE111 (Bacillus subtilis) included in Naked Gut Health, can assist in maintaining a healthy gut balance, enabling it to support immune function, digestion, and regularity. 

Naked Gut Health uniquely contains glutamine, an amino acid that’s important for the immune system and plays a role in intestinal health. Glutamine is a source of fuel for immune cells, including white blood cells and some intestinal cells. (10) A March 2021 study in Food Science and Human Wellness also concluded that glutamine showed the potential to promote proper gut health and function. (11)

This gut health supplement includes prebiotic fiber, like inulin and acacia, to nourish beneficial bacteria in the gut. Together, the natural ingredients in this dietary supplement, including probiotics, prebiotics, and glutamine, help boost immunity and reduce bloating, constipation, and inflammation.

Customers who don’t like swallowing pills may be drawn to this powdered probiotic. You simply add it to your sports drinks, juice, or smoothies once a day. The container also offers more servings (40 servings) than other probiotics on our list, compared to only 30 servings in Hum Fan Club and Unbloat. 

Customer reviews on the Naked Nutrition website are resoundingly positive. One customer writes, “Finally, a probiotic that works! I have IBS and my gut kills me every single day. I was skeptical but this probiotic actually works!” Some mention the taste isn’t great, but that can be easily remedied by mixing it with a flavorful smoothie or beverage. 

RELATED: Best Organic Protein Powder

What Are the Benefits of Probiotics for Women?

The benefits of probiotics for women seem endless. However, not all probiotics have the same strains of bacteria, so their benefits vary depending on the formulation. Some benefits of probiotics may include: 

  • A balanced microbiome
  • Reduced bloating, gas, and diarrhea
  • Improved vaginal health
  • Stronger immune system
  • Improved mood 
  • Reduced inflammation
  • Relief from constipation 

What To Consider When Buying a Probiotic for Women

There are several factors to consider when choosing the best probiotic supplements. Probiotic supplements are drastically different, so it’s important to know what to look for when shopping. 

Price

Among the probiotics we’ve reviewed, YourBiology Gut+ is the priciest at $2.66 per serving, while Kaged probiotic capsules are the most budget-friendly at just $0.33 each. This is a significant range in price! For something you’ll likely take daily, or even multiple times per day, make sure that it fits comfortably within your budget. 

CFU Count

CFU is an abbreviation for “colony-forming units,” which indicates the quantity of bacteria found in each serving of a probiotic supplement. Probiotic supplements can range from 1 to 50 billion CFUs or more. While it’s tempting to think higher CFUs equate to a better product, that’s not necessarily the case, as the effectiveness depends on factors like the specific strain, quality, and the purpose for which it’s being used. 

RELATED: 4 Signs You Are Taking Too Many Probiotics

Storage Requirements

Typically, shelf-stable probiotics should be stored in a cool, dry location, away from direct sunlight and extreme temperatures. Some probiotic supplements require refrigeration to maintain their potency, so refer to the product label for specific storage instructions.

Bacterial Strains

Consider probiotic supplements with more than one strain of bacteria. Multiple strains offer a diverse range of potential benefits. If you find a product that you like with only a single strain, research its specific effects to ensure you’re getting a supplement that offers the benefits you desire. 

Pre-Existing Health Conditions

Talk with your healthcare provider before taking a new supplement, especially if you have a pre-existing health condition. Those who are immunocompromised or recovering from gastrointestinal surgery may need to avoid probiotics. Additionally, these supplements and many other supplements could interfere with certain medications.

Form

Most probiotics come in capsule form, with servings usually including 1-2 pills daily. A few, like Kaged Pro-Biotic and Onnit Total Gut Health, recommend taking three or more pills per day. If you dislike swallowing pills, consider gummy or powder products, such as Olly Probiotic + Prebiotic Gummies or Naked Gut Health. 

Certifications and Third-Party Testing

When searching for supplements, prioritize those that undergo third-party testing to guarantee they adhere to established quality standards and maintain their safety. Also, depending on dietary needs, consider supplements with certifications that indicate they are vegan, kosher, or gluten-free.

Final Thoughts

Selecting the best probiotic for women is a personal journey,  shaped by your overall health needs and dietary preferences. Choose a supplement that aligns with your goals, whether it’s enhancing gut health, supporting the immune system, or addressing unique women’s health concerns. With a wide range of options available, consider key factors like probiotic strains, CFU count, additional ingredients, and cost.

Best Probiotic for Women: Side-by-Side Comparison

Best Probiotic for Women Overall
Best Probiotic for Women for Weight Loss
Best Probiotic for Vaginal Health
Best Prebiotic and Probiotic for Women
Best Probiotic for Gut Health for Women
Best Probiotic Gummies for Women
Best Probiotic for Women With IBS
Best Probiotic for Menopausal Women
Best Probiotic for Bloating for Women
Best Probiotic for Pregnant Women
Best Natural Probiotic for Women
Description:
  • Number of servings: 30
  • Cost per serving: $1.80
  • Form: Delayed-release capsule
  • Strains: Two
  • CFU count: 11 billion
Description:
  • Number of servings: 90
  • Cost per serving: $0.33
  • Form: Capsule
  • Strains: Lactobacillus plantarum
  • CFU count: 30 billion CFUs
Description:
  • Number of servings: 30
  • Cost per serving: $0.91
  • Form: Capsule
  • Strains: Lactobacillus rhamnosus GG, Lactobacillus crispatus LBV 88, Lactobacillus rhamnosus LBV 96, Lactobacillus gasseri LBV 150N, Lactobacillus jensenii LBV 116 
  • CFU count: 15 billion CFUs
Description:
  • Number of servings: 15
  • Cost per serving: $2.53
  • Form: Vegetarian capsules 
  • Strains: Five
  • CFU count: 35 billion
Description:
  • Number of servings: 30
  • Cost per serving: $1.53
  • Form: Capsule 
  • Strains: 10
  • CFU count: 100 billion
Description:
  • Form: Gummy
  • Daily dose: Two 
  • Cost per serving: $0.31
  • Key vitamins and minerals: Vitamin A, vitamin C, vitamin D, biotin, zinc, B vitamins
  • Certifications: NSF Certified
Description:
  • Number of servings: 30
  • Cost per serving: $2.17
  • Form: Capsule
  • Strains: Four
  • CFU count: 40 billion
Description:
  • Number of servings: 30
  • Cost per serving: $1.33
  • Form: Capsule
  • Strains: Lactobacillus plantarum
  • CFU count: Five billion CFUs
Description:
  • Number of servings: 30
  • Cost per serving: $2.00
  • Form: Capsule
  • Strains: L. casei, b. Lactis, L. plantarum, L. acidophilus, L. rhamnosus, B. longum, B. bifidum 
  • CFU count: 25 billion CFUs
Description:
  • Number of servings: 30
  • Cost per serving: $0.47
  • Form: Capsule
  • Strains: Lactobacillus rhamnosus, Lactobacillus rhamnosus HN001, Lactobacillus acidophilus, Lactobacillus plantarum, plus 12 more
  • CFU count: 20 billion CFUs


Description:
  • Number of servings: 40
  • Cost per serving: $0.62
  • Form: Digestive powder
  • Strains: One
  • CFU count: Five billion
Best Probiotic for Women Overall
Description:
  • Number of servings: 30
  • Cost per serving: $1.80
  • Form: Delayed-release capsule
  • Strains: Two
  • CFU count: 11 billion
Best Probiotic for Women for Weight Loss
Description:
  • Number of servings: 90
  • Cost per serving: $0.33
  • Form: Capsule
  • Strains: Lactobacillus plantarum
  • CFU count: 30 billion CFUs
Best Probiotic for Vaginal Health
Description:
  • Number of servings: 30
  • Cost per serving: $0.91
  • Form: Capsule
  • Strains: Lactobacillus rhamnosus GG, Lactobacillus crispatus LBV 88, Lactobacillus rhamnosus LBV 96, Lactobacillus gasseri LBV 150N, Lactobacillus jensenii LBV 116 
  • CFU count: 15 billion CFUs
Best Prebiotic and Probiotic for Women
Description:
  • Number of servings: 15
  • Cost per serving: $2.53
  • Form: Vegetarian capsules 
  • Strains: Five
  • CFU count: 35 billion
Best Probiotic for Gut Health for Women
Description:
  • Number of servings: 30
  • Cost per serving: $1.53
  • Form: Capsule 
  • Strains: 10
  • CFU count: 100 billion
Best Probiotic Gummies for Women
Description:
  • Form: Gummy
  • Daily dose: Two 
  • Cost per serving: $0.31
  • Key vitamins and minerals: Vitamin A, vitamin C, vitamin D, biotin, zinc, B vitamins
  • Certifications: NSF Certified
Best Probiotic for Women With IBS
Description:
  • Number of servings: 30
  • Cost per serving: $2.17
  • Form: Capsule
  • Strains: Four
  • CFU count: 40 billion
Best Probiotic for Menopausal Women
Description:
  • Number of servings: 30
  • Cost per serving: $1.33
  • Form: Capsule
  • Strains: Lactobacillus plantarum
  • CFU count: Five billion CFUs
Best Probiotic for Bloating for Women
Description:
  • Number of servings: 30
  • Cost per serving: $2.00
  • Form: Capsule
  • Strains: L. casei, b. Lactis, L. plantarum, L. acidophilus, L. rhamnosus, B. longum, B. bifidum 
  • CFU count: 25 billion CFUs
Best Probiotic for Pregnant Women
Description:
  • Number of servings: 30
  • Cost per serving: $0.47
  • Form: Capsule
  • Strains: Lactobacillus rhamnosus, Lactobacillus rhamnosus HN001, Lactobacillus acidophilus, Lactobacillus plantarum, plus 12 more
  • CFU count: 20 billion CFUs


Best Natural Probiotic for Women
Description:
  • Number of servings: 40
  • Cost per serving: $0.62
  • Form: Digestive powder
  • Strains: One
  • CFU count: Five billion

FAQs

What is the number one women’s probiotic?

We recommend Ritual Synbiotic+, a 3-in-1 supplement that contains prebiotics, probiotics, and a postbiotic. Made with traceable, gluten-free ingredients, its probiotic blend includes two of the world’s most clinically studied strains for a balanced gut microbiome. 

What is the best probiotic for female athletes?

We recommend Kaged Pro-Biotic, a supplement designed to improve gut function and exercise performance. Each capsule provides 10 billion CFUs of TWK10®, which may improve athletic performance, body composition, and endurance.

How often should a woman take a probiotic?

Follow the instructions on the product label of the probiotic you choose. Most supplements instruct users to take them once daily, but some recommend taking a pill with every meal. 

What is the best probiotic for women who suffer from yeast infections?

We recommend Culturelle Women’s 4-in-1 Protection Capsules for women who experience yeast infections. This supplement is designed to offer complete feminine care, benefiting vaginal, urinary, gut, and immune health.

Research

  1. Huang WC, Lee MC, Lee CC, et al. Effect of Lactobacillus plantarum TWK10 on Exercise Physiological Adaptation, Performance, and Body Composition in Healthy Humans. Nutrients. 2019;11(11):2836. Published 2019 Nov 19. doi:10.3390/nu11112836
  2. Castro-Herrera VM, Fisk HL, Wootton M, et al. Combination of the Probiotics Lacticaseibacillus rhamnosus GG and Bifidobacterium animalis subsp. lactis, BB-12 Has Limited Effect on Biomarkers of Immunity and Inflammation in Older People Resident in Care Homes: Results From the Probiotics to Reduce Infections iN CarE home reSidentS Randomized, Controlled Trial. Front Immunol. 2021;12:643321. Published 2021 Mar 4. doi:10.3389/fimmu.2021.643321
  3. Gao H, Li X, Chen X, et al. The Functional Roles of Lactobacillus acidophilus in Different Physiological and Pathological Processes. J Microbiol Biotechnol. 2022;32(10):1226-1233. doi:10.4014/jmb.2205.05041
  4. Gupta AK, Maity C. Efficacy and safety of Bacillus coagulans LBSC in irritable bowel syndrome: A prospective, interventional, randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled clinical study [CONSORT Compliant]. Medicine (Baltimore). 2021;100(3):e23641. doi:10.1097/MD.0000000000023641
  5. Qin YQ, Wang LY, Yang XY, et al. Inulin: properties and health benefits. Food Funct. 2023;14(7):2948-2968. Published 2023 Apr 3. doi:10.1039/d2fo01096h
  6. Martoni CJ, Srivastava S, Leyer GJ. Lactobacillus acidophilus DDS-1 and Bifidobacterium lactis UABla-12 Improve Abdominal Pain Severity and Symptomology in Irritable Bowel Syndrome: Randomized Controlled Trial. Nutrients. 2020;12(2):363. Published 2020 Jan 30. doi:10.3390/nu12020363
  7. Kaszkin-Bettag M, Ventskovskiy BM, Solskyy S, et al. Confirmation of the efficacy of ERr 731 in perimenopausal women with menopausal symptoms. Altern Ther Health Med. 2009;15(1):24-34.
  8. Schön C, Allegrini P, Engelhart-Jentzsch K, Riva A, Petrangolini G. Grape Seed Extract Positively Modulates Blood Pressure and Perceived Stress: A Randomized, Double-Blind, Placebo-Controlled Study in Healthy Volunteers. Nutrients. 2021;13(2):654. Published 2021 Feb 17. doi:10.3390/nu13020654
  9. S.L. Prescott, K. Wickens, L. Westcott, W. Jung, H. Currie, P. N. Black, T. V. Stanley, E. A. Mitchell, P. Fitzharris, R. Siebers, L. Wu, J. Supplementation with Lactobacillus rhamnosus or Bifidobacterium lactis probiotics in pregnancy increases cord blood interferon-c and breast milk transforming growth factor-b and immunoglobin A detection. Clinical and Experimental Allergy. 2008 (38) 1606–1614.
  10. Demling RH. Nutrition, anabolism, and the wound healing process: an overview. Eplasty. 2009;9:e9.
  11. 1.Deters BJ, Saleem M. The role of glutamine in supporting gut health and neuropsychiatric factors. Food Science and Human Wellness. 2021;10(2):149-154. 

The post Best Probiotic for Women (2024): Gut Health Supplements for Bloating, Pregnancy, Weight Loss and More appeared first on Breaking Muscle.

]]>
Best CrossFit Shoes for Flat Feet, Wide Feet, and More (2024) https://breakingmuscle.com/best-crossfit-shoes/ Mon, 16 Oct 2023 16:00:31 +0000 https://breakingmuscle.com/?p=198598 Searching for CrossFit shoes isn’t as simple as walking into a store and grabbing the first thing you see. Or at least it shouldn’t be. It’s actually one of those things you’ll want to be intentional about because there are numerous factors you’ll want to keep in mind. For instance, you’ll want to identify which heel-to-toe drop would...

The post Best CrossFit Shoes for Flat Feet, Wide Feet, and More (2024) appeared first on Breaking Muscle.

]]>
Searching for CrossFit shoes isn’t as simple as walking into a store and grabbing the first thing you see. Or at least it shouldn’t be. It’s actually one of those things you’ll want to be intentional about because there are numerous factors you’ll want to keep in mind. For instance, you’ll want to identify which heel-to-toe drop would accommodate your workout style and if the shoe’s upper can withstand rope climbs. 

Here, we’ll not only explain what to look for in a CrossFit shoe but also share what we’ve found to be the best CrossFit shoes on the market today. 

How We Chose the Best CrossFit Shoes

One thing is for certain: folks here at Breaking Muscle are no strangers to CrossFit. Some staff members have been doing CrossFit for almost a decade and, as you might imagine, have owned their fair share of CrossFit shoes. In fact, Breaking Muscle Reviews Editor Amanda Dvorak currently has five pairs of CrossFit sneakers that she rotates through.

For the purposes of this review, we tested dozens of shoes for metcons, heavy lifting, running, and indoor and outdoor workouts. Therefore, in an effort to pick some of the best CrossFit shoes, we relied on our own experience and conducted some additional research to see what others had to say.

As we reviewed each shoe on our original list, we realized that not one pair of CrossFit shoes would appeal to everyone. Therefore, we came up with categories in which to rank each shoe, including appearance, durability, comfort, and stability. We eliminated choices until we identified the best option for each one. Now, you can more easily find the most practical choice for you before spending $100+ on a shoe that doesn’t meet your needs.

Our Top Picks for the Best CrossFit Shoes

Best CrossFit Shoes Overall: Reebok Nano X3  

Reebok Nano X3
4.0
  • Heel-to-toe drop: Seven millimeters
  • Weight: 12 ounces (unisex size 9)
  • Material: Synthetic and textile upper
  • Width: Ideal for wide feet
Check Price

Pros

  • Numerous colorway designs 
  • Proprietary Lift and Chassis System
  • Improved rope guard
  • Allows for versatile workouts

Cons

  • Confusing unisex sizing
  • Expensive
  • May be too loose for some

Are you looking for a CrossFit shoe that is stylish enough to wear out with friends and solid enough to use for strength training? If so, that’s the Reebok Nano X3.

This latest iteration of the Nano, which dropped in early 2023, is the 13th version and has a lot going for it. Previous versions, like the Nano X1 and Nano X2, lacked some performance edge. For instance, the RopePro technology and Flexweave knit upper didn’t hold up well for rope climbs in either shoe. But now, with the addition of the Lift and Run Chassis System and the improved RopePro technology, CrossFitters can perform workouts more efficiently in the Nano X3. 

The Lift and Run Chassis System in the midsole provides a more stable platform than previous Nano models thanks to the dome-shaped heel piece that compresses when lifting heavy loads. The revamped RopePro+ rope guard technology in the midfoot makes the shoe even sturdier, so the front and sides of the shoes don’t get damaged as easily.

Based on our experience, we don’t think the upper is as durable as the SuperFabric on NOBULL trainers. Still, CrossFitters who do rope climbs, burpees, and other popular WOD movements can worry less about tearing up the Nano X3s. Even the Flexweave mesh upper is sturdy while being equally breathable and flexible, which led to us giving the Nano X3s 4.5 out of 5 stars for construction and durability. 

Reebok also reworked the all-surface rubber outsole in the Nano X3. The updated tread pattern allows for better traction, making you feel more stable while completing weightlifting workouts. We ranked the outsole a solid 4 out of 5.

The wide toe box is undoubtedly a pro, as it allows your toes to spread out and improves your stability for squatting-type movements. However, you have to ensure you get the correct size. With the Nano X3, Reebok implemented a unisex sizing scale. Our female product tester noted that the shoes run slightly large — though we should note that she was unable to get the size she’d normally order in a men’s shoe. The poor sizing was especially evident when she performed exercises like burpees, lunges, and wall walks.

As a result, it might be wise to get half a size down or, if possible, try them on somewhere first so you can find the best fit for you. 

Another thing to consider is the Nano X3’s seven-millimeter heel-to-toe drop (the same as the Nano X2). Most CrossFit shoes we’ve tried have a four-millimeter heel-to-toe drop. Research shows that a heel-to-toe drop of five millimeters or greater in running shoes increases knee extension and could also cause patellofemoral joint stress. (1) So, what does that mean for CrossFit shoes that have a slightly higher heel-to-toe drop? 

Well, shoes that cause you to have a more forward knee placement may change how you perform CrossFit exercises, which could be a good or bad thing. It’s good if you’re doing squats and have bad ankle mobility, as it allows you to reach proper depth more easily. However, it may not be good when doing exercises like box jumps because it can place excess stress on your knee. Therefore, figuring out the best heel-to-toe drop for you is critical. If you visit a podiatrist, they can measure your feet, which should give you some insight into the type of shoe that’s most ideal for you. 

Ultimately, the numerous colorways and the solid construction of the shoe make these the best CrossFit shoes overall. They are expensive, though, costing between $140 and $150. However, most popular CrossFit shoes fall in that price range. 

Best CrossFit Shoes For Men: Nike Metcon 8

Nike Metcon 8
4.2
  • Heel-to-toe drop: Four millimeters
  • Weight: 12.5 ounces (size 10)
  • Material: Lightweight mesh with textured overlays
  • Width: Neutral to wide
Check Price

Pros

  • Attractive price  
  • Responsive foam midsole 
  • Breathable upper
  • Lace lock mechanism

Cons

  • May run small
  • Noisy 
  • Clunky heel

Guys looking for a great CrossFit shoe should consider the Nike Metcon 8. With this being the eighth iteration of this shoe, it’s improved a lot. For instance, the chain-link mesh upper on the Metcon 7 isn’t as durable or flexible. In fact, the toe box upper ripped for some lifters. For the record, we didn’t experience this with the 7s — in fact, before the 8s came out, our team called the 7s one of the best Metcon versions they had ever tried.

Even so, Nike appears to have fixed the upper in the Metcon 8’s. The new upper is less stretchy, more breathable, and has improved stability. 

The construction of the tongue and lacing system is also different between the Metcon 7 and 8. The tongue on the Metcon 7 has a velcro lace-lock feature on the top and bottom to help keep the laces in place. The Metcon 7 also sports three middle eyelets with Nike Flywire on the lateral side of the midfoot. While the Nike Flywire feature is said to help boost support and minimize load, it’s not found on the Metcon 8. Instead, the Metcon 8 follows a more traditional lacing system with five eyelets and only has the lace-lock mechanism at the top of the tongue.

Nonetheless, the Metcon 8s provide solid midfoot stability. Our product tester wore them for deadlifts and noted that his foot really felt connected to the ground. He gave them 4 out of 5 stars for stability.

Another interesting change is that the Metcon 8s don’t have a rope guard. If you take a close look, you will notice that the shoes have a rubber-type wraparound that partially goes up the inside of the shoe. This is not a true rope guard, though it still allows for a good grip. The lack of a true rope guard might seem alarming to those who do rope climbs frequently. However, performance-wise, customer reviews suggest that the shoes still hold up well. 

The current Hyperlift heel could be annoying to some, though. Some say the heel construction feels stiff and clunky. In previous iterations, the Hyperlift heel was a removable insert that allowed you to adjust the height under your heels. This came in handy if you wanted the extra heel height for squats without changing into a pair of lifters. Today, the heel portion still goes by the same name, but it doesn’t have a separate insert. Breaking Muscle Editor Amanda Dvorak never used the insert in her Nike Metcon 2s or 6s; if you’re like her, you probably won’t miss the insert, anyway.

We agree with other customers that the heel can be uncomfortable. Based on our product tester’s feedback, the Metcon 8s aren’t ideal for running long distances or daily wear. They’re an especially poor choice for running if you’re a heel striker because the hard heel doesn’t offer much cushioning. However, it works for weightlifting, occasional sprints, and shorter 200- or 400-meter runs that frequently come up in CrossFit WODs. 

The four-millimeter heel-to-toe drop combined with the lightweight, soft Nike React Foam in the forefoot are great for folks doing heavy lifts, box jumps, and squats. Although these are a great pair of shoes to wear during a CrossFit workout, they’re occasionally out-of-stock. The attractive $130 price tag (and sometimes less) might be partially to blame for the limited supply. 

A member of the Breaking Muscle team noted that Nike is one of the only brands he trusts to make a shoe that fits his wide foot. He gave the shoe 4 out of 5 stars for adjustability and ergonomics for this reason. But some people have complained that the new toe box seems too narrow since the new construction is slightly more snug. Consider getting a half-size up if you have wider feet. 

Truthfully, the Metcon 8’s are an excellent shoe for both men and women, but only six colorways are available for women. There are 10+ colorways for men.

Best CrossFit Shoes for Women: TYR CXT-1 Trainer

TYR CXT-1 Trainer
4.4
  • Heel-to-toe drop: Nine mililmeters
  • Weight: 12.65 oz (for the size 10 men’s)
  • Material: Breathable upper engineered mesh construction
  • Width: Neutral
Check Price

Pros

  • Heel tab for smoother gliding
  • Patent-pending stability platform 
  • Grippy outsole 
  • High arch support

Cons

  • Not as durable for rope climbing 
  • Difficult to clean 
  • High heel-to-toe drop is not ideal for weightlifting

Usually, finding a CrossFit shoe with a low heel-to-toe drop is best, but could the TYR CXT-1 Trainer be the exception? This CrossFit shoe boasts a high 9mm drop, and people still love it. In fact, these shoes are giving other popular cross-training shoes a run for their money. But what about these kicks has folks switching out their Nano’s and Metcon’s for them? 

A side view of the TYR CXT-1 Trainer
A side view of the TYR CXT-1 Trainer

Amanda Dvorak, an Editor at Breaking Muscle, has been wearing these for three months now for metcons three to four days a week and loves them. She says, “They fit my somewhat narrow feet pretty well and offer a great balance of cushioning and stability.”

Regarding the latter, a patent is pending on the stability platform built into the shoe. This platform helps the foot sit deep in the shoe, allowing you to stay grounded while doing heavy lifting. On top of that, these shoes feature a wrap-around side gripper that goes around the heel, which adds even more stability.

The outsole provides a good level of grip, too. This is useful for keeping your feet in place during squats or deadlifts and not slipping when running outdoors. Amanda says she’s never worried about her feet slipping when training in the CXT-1s, whether she’s lifting on rubber gym flooring in her garage or doing short runs outside on wet pavement. As such, she rated the outsole 4.5 out of 5 stars.

Another feature that stands out on the TYR Trainers is the Surge NRG Foam midsoles. These are incredibly responsive, meaning that when your foot hits the ground, you can sort of feel it bounce back up. That “springy” feeling may help propel you forward and absorb some of the impact. In fact, Amanda says that the CXT-1s are the first pair of CrossFit shoes she doesn’t mind running in (for up to a mile — she hasn’t tested them for distances longer than that).

The firm yet flexible cushioning in the forefoot should allow you to perform agility exercises seamlessly without discomfort. Amanda even noted, “My feet often start to ache about halfway through long WODs when I wear other shoes, but I’ve gotten through a 30-minute WOD without discomfort when I wore the TYR trainers.”

However, some say they prefer a less chunky midsole than the TYR Trainers. Amanda doesn’t find them that chunky, but she still recognizes that they wouldn’t be the best choice if you want a more minimalist shoe. 

In addition, the lightweight mesh upper makes these shoes breathable. According to Amanda, this helps keep her feet dry and comfortable even when she exercises in hot weather. 

A woman doing squats while wearing the TYR CXT-1 Trainers
Amanda doing goblet squats while wearing the TYR CXT-1 Trainers

If you plan on doing handstand push-ups, you’ll appreciate the heel tab, as it can help your heels glide along the wall more easily. Also, the anatomical toe box is more spacious than those found on the Nike Metcon 8s, but still not the best choice for someone with wider feet. It fits snugly and might even feel cramped to some, so you may need to go a half-size up. 

An area where the CXT-1s might not shine is rope climbing. One buyer said doing so tore the outer sole of their right shoe. Another challenge you might encounter if exercising outside is scrubbing grass stains from the mesh on the toe box. For some reason, it’s just not easy to get the stains to come off. Amanda hasn’t worn these shoes when working out on grass, so she can’t speak to the staining issue. But if you don’t want to worry about frequently trying to scrub your shoes, consider getting a dark color that will hide any stains.

Besides those caveats, the TYR CXT-1s are solid. The arch and ankle support they provide are ideal for someone with a high arch, which may be more common in women. Interestingly, women wearing high-heeled shoes may see musculoskeletal changes over time, like an increased foot arch. (2) But the support is also adequate for athletes with flat feet. Amanda has flat feet and a history of ankle and foot injuries, and she’s satisfied with the level of support she gets from the CXT-1s. This is one reason why we consider these the best CrossFit shoes for women. 

For $140, you may be able to find a shoe that checks more boxes, but it all comes down to your preferences. 

Best CrossFit Shoes for Running: Reebok Nano X3

Reebok Nano X3
4.0
  • Heel-to-toe drop: Seven millimeters
  • Weight: 12 ounces (unisex size 9)
  • Material: Synthetic and textile upper
  • Width: Ideal for wide feet
Check Price

Pros

  • Lift and Run Chassis System
  • Ankle support from TPU-unit
  • Soft and responsive Floatride Energy Foam

Cons

  • Too heavy
  • Rigid upper 
  • Low heel-to-toe drop

A shoe so nice we had to run it back twice is the Reebok Nano X3. Honestly, it’s quite rare to find a CrossFit shoe that’s also suitable for cardio exercises, like running. This is because training shoes tend to be larger and heavier, which isn’t comfortable if you plan on going for long runs. CrossFit shoes usually aren’t as well-cushioned and, as a result, don’t properly distribute the shock of your feet hitting the ground. However, the Reebok Nano X3 is designed in a way that provides the best of both worlds…sort of.

Breaking Muscle Editor Amanda Dvorak hasn’t personally tested the Nano X3s, but she’s trained in previous models of the Nanos. The most recent Nano version she owns is the Nano X1, and she still alternates that shoe with the TYR CXT-1 trainer for WODs with a lot of running. She was pleased to see that Reebok has still included several features in the X3s that make them more suitable for running than most other CrossFit shoes.

For one, the unique Lift and Run Chassis System (which wasn’t even included in the X2 and is completely new for the X3) in the midsole offers a cushioned base that runners may appreciate as their feet repeatedly hit the pavement. Yet, it’s still flat enough for individuals to maintain their balance when lifting. This system is also attached to a thicker TPU unit within the heel that helps with ankle support and additional stability while running.

On top of that, you’ll find the Floatride Energy Foam in the forefoot fairly soft and responsive, which is an admirable feat when doing short runs. 

However, this isn’t a shoe that serious runners should be considering. The upper on the Nano X3s, in particular, is stiff, and the shoe is heavy. Running shoes usually weigh between 6.5 and 13 ounces. Weighing 12 ounces, the Nano X3 is on the heavier end. Plus, running shoes typically have a heel-to-toe drop that’s greater than seven millimeters, and the Nano X3 is right at that number.

This isn’t to say a lower heel-to-toe-drop is bad on a CrossFit running shoe. There are situations where it makes more sense, like if you strike the ground with the front of your foot first. In general, though, long-distance running just isn’t going to be very comfortable in this shoe, so it’s best to stick to sprints or short distances like 400 meters. 

Best CrossFit Shoes for Wide Feet: NOBULL Trainers

NOBULL Trainers
3.8
  • Heel-to-toe drop: Four millimeters
  • Weight: 11 ounces (Men's 9 / Women's 10.5)
  • Material: SuperFabric®
  • Width: Wide
Check Price

Pros

  • Minimalist shoe 
  • Wider toe box 
  • Great for strength training

Cons

  • Not for running or plyometric exercises
  • May need to break in 
  • Feels hot after prolonged use

If you have wider feet, you already know how difficult it is to find shoes that properly fit. Poorly fitting shoes can cause preventable foot pain and disorders, so finding ones that work for you is crucial. This is especially true when you’re looking for a CrossFit shoe. Fortunately, the NOBULL Trainers may be an option for those with wide feet. 

A pair of NOBULL trainers on a plyo box with the bottom of one shoe facing up
Showcasing the top and bottom of the NOBULL trainers

The NOBULL Trainer came to the market in 2015. While NOBULL has added new shoes to their lineup, they haven’t strayed too far from the original trainer. For instance, the upgraded NOBULL Trainer+ has a thicker midsole, which enhances comfort for high-impact movements like box jumps, but the original trainer offers more stability and is just as good. This level of consistency means that CrossFit athletes who want to buy new shoes from the same brand already know what to expect. You won’t experience this with Reebok Nano’s and Nike Metcon’s as they tend to change more over time.

What’s unique about NOBULL Trainers is the SuperFabric® technology they use for the upper. With SuperFabric®, they basically use regular mesh and apply guard plates to make it rigid and resistant to abrasions. As a result, doing activities like rope climbs shouldn’t cause damage to the shoe, but putting them on could prove challenging. Amanda Dvorak, Breaking Muscle’s Reviews Editor, says that when she wears her NOBULL trainers, she has to loosen the laces nearly all the way to get them on her feet.

The shoe’s midsole is made of phylon, a lightweight yet stable foam material. Therefore, you should be able to do strength training with no issues since they are pretty good at resisting compression when under heavy weight. Amanda says, “I do love the stability they offer for squatting and deadlifting.”

However, there is a caveat to having such a tough midsole construction, and that’s responsiveness. These shoes aren’t the best if you plan on doing HIIT workouts or running. They’re just uncomfortable to use for fast-paced movements, so Amanda only uses them on the days she does strength training. 

The four-millimeter heel-to-toe drop and high carbon rubber outsole also make these adequate gym shoes for heavy lifting. Plus, the wider toebox allows you to splay your toes, which can help you keep your balance when lifting heavy weights.

A young woman deadlifting in the NOBULL Trainers
Amanda doing deadlifts in the NOBULL trainers

However, these might not be the shoes you grab for long-distance running or walking around town. If you wear them too long, they start to get too hot. According to Amanda, the lack of cushioning also means they’re less than ideal for being on your feet for long periods. This is too bad because they offer a ton of colorways and would look nice for general wear. Most are priced between $129 and $139, which aligns with other popular CrossFit shoes like the Metcons and Nanos. 

Best Budget CrossFit Shoes: Converse Chuck Taylors

Converse Chuck Taylors
3.7
  • Heel-to-toe drop: Zero millimeters
  • Weight: 14.3 ounces (size 10)
  • Material: Cotton canvas and rubber
  • Width: Narrow
Check Price

Pros

  • Very affordable 
  • Stylish 
  • Minimalist shoe
  • Comfortable for daily wear

Cons

  • Not the best for high-impact movements 
  • Heavy 
  • Narrow midfoot

If you’re not ready to spend $100+ on a pair of CrossFit shoes, look at the Converse Chuck Taylors. These popular and stylish shoes are only around $65, about half the price of the Nanos, TYR trainers, and Metcons. Given their budget-friendly price tag, it’s not surprising that I see so many people wearing them in the free weights section of the gym. But how does this shoe really hold up when doing CrossFit, weightlifting, and running?

When people think of a minimalist shoe, Chuck Taylors are often the first to come to mind. The zero heel-to-toe drop (barefoot style) allows your foot to be closer to the ground, which permits a more natural movement. The flat rubber soles are sturdy, making it easier to maintain your balance as you push off the ground. They grip well on gym floors, wooden platforms, and even carpets.

If you’re a lifter who wants to feel a stable connection to the ground during deadlifts, squats, and other heavy lifts, these can help you achieve that. If you opt for a high-top style, they can also offer good ankle support, which is a bonus for CrossFitters with a history of ankle injuries.

Depending on the type of exercises you’ll be doing, they might not be the best CrossFit shoes. To start, the sole lacks cushion. While this is helpful for deadlifts, it’s not what you look for when doing high-impact movements like box jumps. With exercises like that, it helps to have some cushion that’ll absorb the shock. If needed, you can put an orthotic insert (which you’ll need to buy separately) in your Chuck Taylors for more cushioning.

At 14 ounces, Converse Chuck Taylors are also heavier than most CrossFit shoes. For comparison, the Nike Metcon 8s weigh 12.5 ounces, and the Nano X3s weigh 12 ounces. As you might imagine, the heavier weight can make workouts with a speed component uncomfortable. Although these clunky shoes are awesome for daily wear, they may not be a proper choice for those who want shoes that can handle exercise versatility. 

If you take a closer look at the toe box and midfoot areas of Converse, you’ll see another reason why you shouldn’t use these for certain CrossFit WODs. The shoe narrows through the midfoot, making it too snug, especially for those with wider feet. The toe box is tight, too, so your toes might have trouble spreading out to help you maintain your balance. Lastly, the canvas uppers might not be the most durable for repetitive training. I’ve heard people complain about them ripping during rope climbs. 

Overall, these aren’t a bad choice if most of your CrossFit routine involves lifting. But if you plan on mainly doing running and jumping movements, go for another option on our best CrossFit shoe list. 

Best CrossFit Shoes For Flat Feet: New Balance Minimus TR

New Balance Men's Minimus
3.5
  • Heel-to-toe drop: Zero millimeters 
  • Weight: 8.1 ounces
  • Material: Mesh upper
  • Width: Narrow
Check Price

Pros

  • Outsole has great grip and traction 
  • Rubber shank for added stability  
  • Rebound effect 
  • Can wear without socks

Cons

  • Not ideal for outdoor use
  • Takes time to break in 
  • Too tight for those with wide feet

If you’ve got flat feet or are just looking for a minimalist shoe, take a look at the New Balance Minimus TR. They’re a narrow-fitting shoe that admittedly won’t work for everyone but could be the proper choice for athletes with narrow feet. For instance, if you’ve tried a few neutral or wider-fitting shoes, like the Nano X3s, that just didn’t make your feet feel secure, these might help. After all, the last thing you want to deal with while doing CrossFit movements is heel slipping.

The well-cushioned rubber midsole on this shoe doesn’t collapse and is made to handle pressure. This sturdiness is further maintained by the rubber shank that travels across the midfoot, allowing trainees to remain stable. You might even notice a slight rebound that gives you an extra bounce, thanks to its TPU (Thermoplastic Polyurethane)-infused design. This rebound effect is beneficial when you’re doing double-unders. But, as with all things, this may not be a feature you’ll like, as some people find it unnatural. 

The outsole pattern on the New Balance Minimus TR mirrors those found on gym floors. In fact, it almost seems to stick to manufactured surfaces. If you’re looking for a shoe with a strong grip that can handle your lifting heavy weights, you’ll find it with these. Unfortunately, that means this isn’t a great outdoor shoe, as the tread might not give you the traction you’d want when training on rough surfaces.  

The mesh upper on this shoe is surprisingly responsive, breathable, and lightweight. These seem to handle plyometric workouts pretty well. Therefore, you shouldn’t experience much heel slippage when doing agility exercises since the upper helps to keep your foot in place.

Do keep in mind that the wrap-around upper might take about a week or so to break in when you first get them. For some, it may almost feel too tight on the foot. However, some people prefer the sock-like fit. 

If you plan on doing a lot of rope climbing, this shoe may not hold up as well in terms of performance and durability. But handstand push-ups shouldn’t be a problem due to the TPU heel clip aids. 

As with most things, it all comes down to your personal preference. For around $100 to $150, this is a decent cross-trainer for someone with flat and/or narrow feet. 

Best CrossFit Lifting Shoes: Adidas Adipower 3

Adidas Adipower
4.0
  • Heel-to-toe drop: 22 millimeters
  • Weight: 16.4 ounces
  • Material: Canvas upper
  • Width: Neutral
Check Price

Pros

  • Well-constructed and durable
  • Grippy outsole 
  • Stylish with many colorways  
  • Lace and strap design

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Narrow toe box
  • Often out-of-stock

If you plan on doing some serious barbell WODs and want a shoe that can handle the heavy lifting, you might be interested in the Adidas Adipower Weightlifting 3 shoes. But what makes these the best CrossFit shoes for lifting?

To start, they weigh 16.4 ounces, which is heavier than any of the other shoes on this list. This extra weight will help your feet plant to the floor and keep you stable while under heavy loads. You’ll also find that this shoe has a significant 22-millimeter heel-to-toe drop, which is ideal for weightlifting. A greater offset improves the range of motion in your hips and ankles. As a result, they may help you achieve a deeper squat, even if your ankles aren’t very flexible.

Like a few other shoes on this list, the Adidas Adipower 3 has previous iterations. The much-loved OG Adipower launched in 2012. The less successful second iteration wasn’t released until 2019. In 2022, the Adipower 3 came out and quickly became a favorite, much like the originals. The newest version is almost two millimeters taller than the Adipower 2s. The additional height can benefit athletes with long femurs or poor ankle mobility, as it can promote better squat mechanics and make it easier to get the hip crease below the knee.

The Adipower 3 also has a revamped ripstop upper that’s made up of 50 percent recycled material. The ripstop material is highly durable but breathable and doesn’t add much extra weight to the shoe. In fact, the Adipower 3 is 1.3 ounces lighter than the Adipower 2. Besides that, Adidas hasn’t changed much with the shoe. 

What makes the Adipower line-up so popular is how well-constructed it is. The durable canvas has a lace and strap design that’ll assist in keeping your feet locked in, while the ripstop fabric upper includes synthetic overlays for greater durability. Even with these features, the shoes remain breathable, so you can comfortably get through longer weightlifting sessions. 

The high-density midsole is another feature that consumers like. It’s firm, which will help you maintain stability as you power through various workouts. However, it does clash with the narrow toe box and makes for an extra snug fit. Those with wider feet may find this troubling. 

The low-sitting rubber outsole provides a good grip, probably due to its barbell knurling-like pattern. It’s definitely the type of traction you’d want when doing heavy lifting. However, while you could technically wear them for WODs with movements like burpees, box jumps, or double-unders, their ruggedness may weigh your feet down. The hard, flat sole will also not be very shock-absorbent. On the other hand, the Adipower 3s would be suitable for WODs with lower-impact movements like wall balls and thrusters.

The Adipower 3s come in various colors and sport the classic three stripes people have come to love and associate with Adidas. To get the sleek design and favorable features this weightlifting shoe offers, expect to shell out about $230. 

Benefits of CrossFit Shoes 

Whether you’re new to CrossFit training or have been doing it for a while, you’ve probably wondered if you actually need CrossFit shoes. While the word “need” might be a stretch, there are some benefits to getting shoes designed for the varied functional movements incorporated into this type of fitness regimen. The constantly changing mix of higher weights, rapid movements, gymnastics, and longer distances is meant to help you become stronger, faster, and more flexible. 

CrossFit shoes are designed to handle those things, so they tend to have a lower heel-to-toe drop, ample heel support, and better traction. These factors may help improve your performance (thanks to the increased stability) and decrease the likelihood of injury. The shoes are cushioned in areas where you’d need the most support but not so thick or plush that they leave you off-balanced for heavy lifts.

What Is the Difference Between CrossFit Shoes and Running Shoes?

CrossFit shoes differ from running shoes in a few ways. They tend to have a lower heel-to-toe drop and are made with more durable fabrics to withstand abrasions better. While cushioning is important in both running and CrossFit shoes, specifically in the forefoot and heel areas, it’s minimal in CrossFit shoes to prioritize stability. You’ll want a firm CrossFit shoe when you’re doing something like deadlifts and squats. The sole also tends to be more flexible so that you can complete dynamic and lateral movements.

As one study found, running shoes, in general, should be “lightweight, comfortable, and have as minimal pronation control technology as possible.” (3) Running shoes need to be breathable and lightweight so you can efficiently propel forward, whether you’re going a long or short distance.

To further assist in propelling you forward is a higher heel-to-toe drop, which is why you’ll find many running shoes with drops between eight and 12 millimeters. In comparison, CrossFit shoes tend to have a heel-to-toe drop of no more than nine millimeters (unless it’s more of a weightlifting shoe — those can have heel-to-toe drops of up to 25 millimeters).

In addition, cushioning in the forefoot and midfoot areas in running shoes helps absorb the impact of your foot hitting the ground. 

Pronation, which refers to your foot’s natural side-to-side movement as you walk or run, should be limited in running shoes. Usually, the foot rolls somewhat inward when you step to help absorb the shock of your foot hitting the ground. However, some shoes implement pronation control that could result in pain or injury of the knee while running, so it’s not recommended in running shoes unless you genuinely need it. (4)

What To Look For in a CrossFit Shoe

Low Heel-to-Toe Drop

When shopping for CrossFit shoes, you’ll likely want to pick a pair with a low heel-to-toe drop between two and six millimeters. With lower-drop shoes, the weight distributes similarly to if you weren’t wearing any shoes at all. This is why you’ll find some individuals seeking minimalist shoes, which permits more balance and stability. One study even suggests that a minimalist shoe may prevent injury and boost performance. (5)

Now, there are certain situations when you might want a higher heel-to-toe drop. For example, if your CrossFit workout includes lots of heavy squats or snatches, you may prefer a shoe like the 22-millimeter Adipower 3s. The greater heel-to-toe drop can make it easier for you to reach proper squat depth. CrossFit folks who run a lot might opt for the nine-millimeter Nano X3s. 

Durability

Heavy weights and fast, functional movements are a recipe for torn-up shoes. The upper, midsole, and sole will likely experience a lot of impact from workouts like rope climbs, burpees, and even handstand push-ups. Therefore, you’ll want CrossFit shoes made with materials that can withstand abrasion while still being breathable enough that your feet don’t overheat.

Wide Toe Box

If you pay close attention, you’ll notice that your toes naturally try to spread out when doing specific movements like squats. This “grounding of your toes” helps with balance, so you’ll want a wider toe box that accommodates this. In our experience, the Nike Metcons are suitable for athletes with wide feet or those who simply prefer a shoe with a wide toe box.

However, this is a matter of preference. If you have narrow feet, you might feel like your feet are swimming in shoes with a wider toe box. In this situation, Converse Chuck Taylor’s might be a good choice. 

Rigid Sole

CrossFit training tends to be versatile, so you’ll want a sole that supports and protects your feet. One 2020 study even found that a rigid sole can decrease plantar pressure in the forefoot and reduce the rate of plantar re-ulceration. (6) Therefore, it’s worth ensuring your shoes’ soles meet your needs. The NOBULL trainers have one of the most rigid soles we’ve seen in a CrossFit shoe.

Minimal Cushioning

While a lot of cushioning may sound good, it’s not what you should look for in a CrossFit shoe. Too much cushioning could interfere with your balance and stability, especially when deadlifting or squatting. Aim for firm cushioning that can help with shock absorption during plyometric movements but that doesn’t impede your ability to push through the floor for squats, deadlifts, and other heavy lifts. We find that the Nike Metcon 8s, Reebok Nano X3s, and TYR CXT-1 trainers have an ideal balance of cushioning and stability.

Versatility

CrossFit doesn’t just consist of one type of exercise. It involves many different push, pull, and squat actions. There are also a lot of running, gymnastics, and bodyweight movements. As a result, you’ll need a shoe that can handle the different workout styles you plan to do so that you don’t have to keep changing your shoes. Will you mainly be doing WODs with heavy barbell work or WODs with lots of running and jumping? Will you be spending lots of time trying to perfect your rope climbs? Depending on your answer, pick the shoe that resonates with that. 

Breathability

Some shoes don’t have the greatest airflow, and that can make you want to cut your workout short. Hot CrossFit shoes that make your feet sweat aren’t what you want when doing an intense workout. Therefore, look for shoes constructed with mesh, as those are more breathable. On the flip side, synthetic materials and knits have decreased breathability but they’re more durable. So consider a shoe that has a blend of mesh and other materials, as that may give you the best of both worlds. 

Price

Whether you’re on a tighter budget or have a little money to spare, there’s a CrossFit shoe on this list that may work for you. However, as with all things, a lower price may mean fewer desirable features. For instance, a lower-priced option like the $65 Converse Chuck Taylor is a fashionable choice for a beginner lifter, but it might not handle more aggressive CrossFit movements well. In contrast, the $150 Reebok Nano X3s can take on plyometric exercises but how they’re sized throws everyone off. 

Ultimately, regardless of price, each shoe has pros and cons. In other words, don’t assume that the most expensive shoe will automatically meet your needs. It could very well have features you don’t want or need.   

Final Thoughts

Now that you’ve learned about some of the best CrossFit shoes on the market, which pair will you go with? By reflecting on your own preferences, goals, and style, you should be able to find an option here that works for you. For example, if your CrossFit routine primarily involves weightlifting, the Adidas Adipower 3 is a good choice, but if it’s running, the Reebok Nano X3 is a possible contender. From kicks for wide and flat feet to the best CrossFit shoes for men and women, there’s something for everybody.

Best CrossFit Shoes: Side-by-Side Comparison

Best CrossFit Shoes Overall
Best CrossFit Shoes for Men
Best CrossFit Shoes for Women
Best CrossFit Shoes for Wide Feet
Best Budget CrossFit Shoes
Best CrossFit Shoes for Flat Feet
Best CrossFit Lifting Shoes
Description:
  • Heel-to-toe drop: Seven millimeters
  • Weight: 12 ounces (unisex size 9)
  • Material: Synthetic and textile upper
  • Width: Ideal for wide feet
Description:
  • Heel-to-toe drop: Four millimeters
  • Weight: 12.5 ounces (size 10)
  • Material: Lightweight mesh with textured overlays
  • Width: Neutral to wide
Description:
  • Heel-to-toe drop: Nine mililmeters
  • Weight: 12.65 oz (for the size 10 men’s)
  • Material: Breathable upper engineered mesh construction
  • Width: Neutral
Description:
  • Heel-to-toe drop: Four millimeters
  • Weight: 11 ounces (Men's 9 / Women's 10.5)
  • Material: SuperFabric®
  • Width: Wide
Description:
  • Heel-to-toe drop: Zero millimeters
  • Weight: 14.3 ounces (size 10)
  • Material: Cotton canvas and rubber
  • Width: Narrow
Description:
  • Heel-to-toe drop: Zero millimeters 
  • Weight: 8.1 ounces
  • Material: Mesh upper
  • Width: Narrow
Description:
  • Heel-to-toe drop: 22 millimeters
  • Weight: 16.4 ounces
  • Material: Canvas upper
  • Width: Neutral
Best CrossFit Shoes Overall
Description:
  • Heel-to-toe drop: Seven millimeters
  • Weight: 12 ounces (unisex size 9)
  • Material: Synthetic and textile upper
  • Width: Ideal for wide feet
Best CrossFit Shoes for Men
Description:
  • Heel-to-toe drop: Four millimeters
  • Weight: 12.5 ounces (size 10)
  • Material: Lightweight mesh with textured overlays
  • Width: Neutral to wide
Best CrossFit Shoes for Women
Description:
  • Heel-to-toe drop: Nine mililmeters
  • Weight: 12.65 oz (for the size 10 men’s)
  • Material: Breathable upper engineered mesh construction
  • Width: Neutral
Best CrossFit Shoes for Wide Feet
Description:
  • Heel-to-toe drop: Four millimeters
  • Weight: 11 ounces (Men's 9 / Women's 10.5)
  • Material: SuperFabric®
  • Width: Wide
Best Budget CrossFit Shoes
Description:
  • Heel-to-toe drop: Zero millimeters
  • Weight: 14.3 ounces (size 10)
  • Material: Cotton canvas and rubber
  • Width: Narrow
Best CrossFit Shoes for Flat Feet
Description:
  • Heel-to-toe drop: Zero millimeters 
  • Weight: 8.1 ounces
  • Material: Mesh upper
  • Width: Narrow
Best CrossFit Lifting Shoes
Description:
  • Heel-to-toe drop: 22 millimeters
  • Weight: 16.4 ounces
  • Material: Canvas upper
  • Width: Neutral

FAQs

What are the best shoes to use for CrossFit?

The best shoes for CrossFit honestly depend on your fitness goals, workout style, and the width of your feet. That said, we consider the Reebok Nano X3s the best CrossFit shoes because they’re stable enough for lifting weights, have adequate cushioning for jumping and short-distance running, and

What kind of shoes do CrossFit athletes wear?

CrossFit athletes tend to wear shoes with a low heel-to-toe drop, minimal cushioning, solid sole, and an extremely durable upper. Shoes like the Reebok Nano X3s, Nike Metcon 8s, and NOBULL Trainers all fit the bill.

What CrossFit shoes are good for knee pain?

One study discovered that shoes with a high heel-to-toe drop may increase knee stress. (1) The Nike Metcon 8s have a four-millimeter heel-to-toe drop, which is lower than other CrossFit shoes we’ve tested. Therefore, it may be safe to assume that they are less likely to cause knee pain.

Do CrossFit shoes make a difference?

CrossFit shoes are constructed differently from regular, everyday shoes and even other athletic shoes like running sneakers. A good CrossFit shoe may help improve your performance and decrease the probability of injury. It can also withstand the versatility of CrossFit WODs, which can include a combination of running, gymnastics, heavy barbell lifting, and bodyweight movements.

Are CrossFit shoes good for lifting?

Not all CrossFit shoes are suitable for lifting. In our experience, shoes like the Reebok Nano X3s have just a bit too much cushioning for pushing into the floor during heavy squats and deadlifts. Good CrossFit lifting shoes typically have a flat, rigid sole, like the Converse Chuck Taylors. If you plan on doing a lot of Olympic weightlifting in addition to your CrossFit WODs, you may also want to consider a strict weightlifting shoe, like the Adidas Adipower 3.

Research

  1. Zhang, M., Zhou, X., Zhang, L., Liu, H., & Yu, B. (2022). The effect of heel-to-toe drop of running shoes on patellofemoral joint stress during running. Gait & posture, 93, 230–234. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.gaitpost.2022.02.008
  2. Özandaç Polat, S., & Yücel, A. H. (2018). Wearing high-heeled shoes increases the foot arch angle inducing measurable changes in the musculoskeletal system. Journal of back and musculoskeletal rehabilitation, 31(6), 1119–1129. https://doi.org/10.3233/BMR-170891
  3. Agresta, C., Giacomazzi, C., Harrast, M., & Zendler, J. (2022). Running Injury Paradigms and Their Influence on Footwear Design Features and Runner Assessment Methods: A Focused Review to Advance Evidence-Based Practice for Running Medicine Clinicians. Frontiers in sports and active living, 4, 815675. https://doi.org/10.3389/fspor.2022.815675
  4. Agresta, C., Giacomazzi, C., Harrast, M., & Zendler, J. (2022). Running Injury Paradigms and Their Influence on Footwear Design Features and Runner Assessment Methods: A Focused Review to Advance Evidence-Based Practice for Running Medicine Clinicians. Frontiers in sports and active living, 4, 815675. https://doi.org/10.3389/fspor.2022.815675
  5. Xu, J., Saliba, S. A., & Jaffri, A. H. (2023). The Effects of Minimalist Shoes on Plantar Intrinsic Foot Muscle Size and Strength: A Systematic Review. International journal of sports medicine, 44(5), 320–328. https://doi.org/10.1055/a-1908-8867
  6. López-Moral, M., Molines-Barroso, R. J., Álvaro-Afonso, F. J., Uccioli, L., Senneville, E., & Lázaro-Martínez, J. L. (2020). Importance of Footwear Outsole Rigidity in Improving Spatiotemporal Parameters in Patients with Diabetes and Previous Forefoot Ulcerations. Journal of clinical medicine, 9(4), 907. https://doi.org/10.3390/jcm9040907

The post Best CrossFit Shoes for Flat Feet, Wide Feet, and More (2024) appeared first on Breaking Muscle.

]]>